SoCal Hiker https://socalhiker.net Trail Guides, Gear Reviews, & Community Thu, 31 Aug 2023 18:04:55 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.4.1 https://i0.wp.com/cdn1.socalhiker.net/wp-content/uploads/2020/03/01003558/cropped-SoCalHiker-2020-Sticker-circle.png?fit=32%2C32&ssl=1 SoCal Hiker https://socalhiker.net 32 32 Backpacking the Grand Canyon of Tuolumne Loop in Yosemite National Park https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-the-grand-canyon-of-tuolumne-loop-in-yosemite-national-park/ https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-the-grand-canyon-of-tuolumne-loop-in-yosemite-national-park/#respond Sat, 25 Mar 2023 03:59:51 +0000 https://socalhiker.net/?p=429609

Yosemite National P ark, and in particular Yosemite Valley, is home to some of the most famous wilderness landmarks in America. But north of the Valley, and north of Highway 120 and Tuolumne Meadows, resides an area of the park known as the Yosemite Wilderness. And in the same way that the mighty Merced River cuts its way through the 3,000+ foot deep Yosemite Valley, so too does the powerful Tuolumne River cut its way through a similarly spectacular canyon in the Yosemite Wilderness know simply as The Grand Canyon of Tuolumne. This huge river runs West and Southwest from Tuolumne Meadows, through Glen Aulin and then almost 20 miles to the massive Hetch Hetchy Reservoir – all the while cutting its way through the deep and massive Grand Canyon of Tuolumne. The Grand Canyon features a series of famous waterfalls at it’s upper/Eastern end, including Waterwheel Falls, LeConte Falls, California Falls and Tuolumne Falls.

Trail Details
Trail Map Distance: 47.1 miles
Time: 5 days
Difficulty: Moderately Strenuous
Elevation Gain: ~10,000 ft
Dogs: No
When to Go: Mid-June to Early September. For BIG waterfalls, early summer is best.

The Grand Canyon of Tuolumne can be backpacked as a multi-day out-and-back from either its West side or East Side, or it can be backpacked as a loop – starting from either Tuolumne Meadows or from White Wolf. We decided to backpack it as a loop starting and ending at White Wolf in a fantastic 5-day, 50-mile backcountry adventure.

Why start/end at White Wolf? Several reasons:

  • During 2022, the Tuolumne Meadows backpacker’s camp was CLOSED for restoration and repairs. This eliminated the opportunity to sleep there the night before our start for acclimation and gear shakedowns. The White Wolf campground was open and available.
  • The White Wolf campground is much closer to the entrance to the GC of Tuolumne, eliminating the out-and-back miles that would have to be repeated from Tuolumne Meadows to Glen Aulin and back.
  • The White Wolf campground day one start would be almost all downhill into the GC of Tuolumne – a good way to start day one.

Planning the Trip

We booked our backcountry permit online through the Yosemite backcountry permit system exactly 168 days prior to our entry date. The map we used to plan our route was the Tom Harrison Yosemite High Country Map. This one map shows the entire route. We chose the following schedule for our trip – hoping that this would keep our average miles around 10 miles per day and also put us near water each night:

  • Travel Day One: Drive to Yosemite National Park via Highway 395 and Highway 120 – enter YNP at the Highway 120 Eastern Gate. Acquire our backcountry permit at the Tuolumne Meadows ranger station. Then drive to White Wolf, sign in and pay the money at the drop box, and pitch camp in the White Wolf backpackers camp.
  • Day One: Hike from White Wolf North to Harden Lake, then East/Northeast and down into the GC of Tuolumne to Pate Valley.  
  • Day Two: Hike East up the GC of Tuolumne to Waterwheel Falls.
  • Day Three: Hike East up and out of the GC of Tuolumne to Glen Aulin, then South to the May Lake / Ten Lakes trail junction with a side trip to Polly Dome Lakes.
  • Day Four: Hike West around Tuolumne Peak to Ten Lakes.
  • Day Five: Hike over Ten Lakes Pass and then South and West to White Wolf, load up the car and then head home via a night in Bishop.

Total (Tom Harrison Map) Miles (including the side trip to Polly Dome Lakes): 48.9 Miles.

(NOTE: Actual GPS hiking mileage as recorded by the GaiaGPS for iPhone app was 53.35 Miles.

Map of the Grand Canyon of the Tuolumne Loop

Download file: grand-canyon-tuolumne.gpx

Day One – White Wolf Campground to Pate Valley

The trail from White Wolf Campground starts as a fire access road heading North towards the GC. In just under three miles you reach Harden Lake, which during our late-summer trip was quite low.

From Harden Lake the trail heads east and Down, Down, Down into the GC, winding its way 3,000 vertical feet to the canyon floor and the Tuolumne River. During this first week of September, the cool temperatures of White Wolf would skyrocket to over 100 degrees at the canyon floor! The switchback trail winds it way down Morrison Creek, which at this time of year was bone dry. 

The smoke from the Rogers fire was burning high up on the opposite canyon ridge, so we were in no danger. Looking back, there are a few good view points where you can make out the Hetch Hetchy reservoir to the West. This would be a much prettier hike earlier in the season, with some fun water crossings too.

Once at the canyon floor, the trail winds East/Northeast along the river. At approximately 10 miles in from White Wolf, you arrive at Pate Valley. There’s a large summer work camp there, and several bridges that cross over the Tuolumne River from the south side to the north side. Next to the main bridge is a fairly large area of calm river and several sandy beaches where we were able to get our shoes off and soak in the cold river water for some relief from the 100-degree heat! Pate Valley is known for its rattlesnake activity, and today was no exception. No sooner did we set foot on the beach than a huge black rattler greeted us. Needless to say we selected another spot to sit!

After a rattlesnake-free soak in the river, we decided to pack up and head up the trail further to find a more shaded campsite, as the sites at the Pate Valley bridge were very sun-exposed. We found a nice little spot along the trail with good river access about a mile up the trail, and pitched camp. It would be a hot night in the tent, with temps never getting below the mid-70s, sleeping on top of our bags…not in them. But we would get some sleep in the end. We would need it for the BIG climbing day tomorrow.

Day Two – Upper Pate Valley to Waterwheel Falls

Day Two of our adventure in the Grand Canyon of Tuolumne would be our big climbing day, as we would be heading directly UP the canyon. We woke to continued warm temps, had coffee and hit the trail while still dark to try and catch as much cool weather as we could. NOTE: try and avoid the biggest heatwave of the summer when doing this trip. Less than a mile up the trail, Pate Valley delivered its second rattlesnake sighting. This guy was sprawled out across the trail – and he was a big one! After throwing small rocks near him for a while, he finally decided to move out of the trail and into the woods – and we were able to continue our hike. It would be nice to get out of Pate Valley.

The hike up the Grand Canyon of Tuolumne is stunning. Like it’s big brother Yosemite Valley, the huge walls of granite on both sides of the powerful river make for an absolutely stunning backdrop. Up, up, up the trail climbs – and in places it leaves the canyon floor to climb around large rock formations, making for some challenging switchback ascents. As the temperatures rise again, the ascending becomes more challenging, and we work our way section by section, stopping to drink and rest and give each other pep talks to keep going strong. Again, this would be easier and more pleasant in earlier summer temperatures. The heat wave was energy sapping.

Finally, after an all-day hike and a final set of steep switchies, we arrive at Waterwheel Falls. Again, the late season waterfall flow is less than the majestic photos found in guide books, but it’s still quite beautiful and the perfect place to spend the night. The view from the top of the falls looking West unfolds to the grand canyon below, and the view to the East displays the most amazing sunset against the granite canyon walls. Above the falls, the river opens up to a beautiful still pond, and we sit on the flat granite and enjoy and perfectly gorgeous evening.

Later that night, the wind would pick up – making our sleep less than peaceful as it buffered our tent repeatedly. But in the end, it was a beautiful spot to enjoy the GC of Tuolumne.

Day Three – Waterwheel Falls to May Lake / Ten Lakes Trail Junction

Day Three is the “Waterfall Money Day” in the GC of Tuolumne. The first three or so miles up to the top of the canyon and Glen Aulin feature a series of gorgeous falls and granite features. Again we started early to beat the heat, so our views of the falls were shaded and lovely.

LeConte Falls

First, we arrive at LeConte Falls. Again, the late season flow is light, but it’s still an absolutely beautiful setting. Next, we climb up to California Falls – and hike in a bit off-trail to get a close up view. After California falls, the trail departs a bit North of the river and winds it way through the stunning Glen Aulin meadow. The walls of the canyon jut straight up from the side of the trail, and the lush green meadow creates an incredibly vibrant color pallet.    As we approach the junction of the Pacific Crest Trail and the Glen Aulin High Sierra Camp, the final water feature is the White Cascade – with its water flow and red rock, the sunrise gives it an absolutely beautiful look.

We stop for a quick rest just after the bridge over the Tuolumne River to admire the magnificent Tuolumne Falls and check out the map for upcoming water sources. Again, the late season schedule as eliminated most if not all of the seasonal water sources – so we need to make sure we’ll have water on this next leg of the trip. After a map review, we decide that we’d better carry and extra load of water – so I fill up our dirty bag at the falls with 4 extra liters of water and strap it to the outside of my pack. Not the most pleasant additional weight, but better safe the sorry. With the water strapped in, we turn away from the PCT (that heads back to Tuolumne Meadows) and head south and UP on the May Lake trail.

As we pass McGee Lake – a potential water source – we confirm that the lake is low and dirty, so we’re happy we have extra water. We encounter a solo hiker doing the same loop but counter clockwise and he confirms there’s not much water around. We then encounter two rangers on horseback that have ridden up from May Lake and Tuolumne Meadows on patrol. In a “small world” story, we find out that the ranger is from Southern California and works with Montrose SAR! We talk about the Angeles NF a bit, confirm the lack of water, and discuss a water side trip to Polly Dome Lakes. The ranger tells us how to find the trail and we say goodbye and carry on.

We find the turnoff to Polly Dome Lakes and I convince my wife that the extra 1.8 miles will be worth it to have a full water source. It’s a small up and down trail but it leads us to a beautiful and stunning setting on the lake with tons of camping areas. My wife is bushed from the lack of good sleep the night before, so I lay out a towel and get her comfortable for an afternoon nap. While she naps, I dump out all the water and do a complete fresh re-fill of all our water containers. Now we are good to go for the night and next morning. The combination of the water source, naptime and the beauty of this pristine lake make the 1.8 mile side trip totally worth it! After my wife wakes up – fully refreshed – the clouds start to roll in and it looks like a thunderstorm is on its way. So, we saddle up fast and head back to the main trail and south to the May Lake / Ten Lakes trail junction hoping to beat the storm.

Polly Dome Lakes

We arrive at the trail junction and scope out a flat piece of ground to pitch camp. As it starts to sprinkle, we quickly get the tent up and get everything secured in the vestibule. No sooner are we done than the thunder, lightning and rain hit full force. We jump in the tent and hunker down, riding out 30 minutes of storm. When it passes, we climb back out – inspect everything – and cook dinner. We are good to go for the night with enough water to get us to the next viable source on the way up to Ten Lakes the next day.

Day Four – May Lake / Ten Lakes Trail Junction to Ten Lakes

The climb to Ten Lakes starts off with about a mile of flat trail crossing a beautiful meadow.

Day 4 sunrise

Then the climbing and switchbacks begin as the trail heads north and northeast up and around the 10,800 foot Tuolumne Peak. It’s beautiful alpine hiking with fantastic views to the north back towards where we came. We encountered three hikers on this part of the trail. 

After 3 or 4 miles, on the Northwest corner of the base of Tuolumne Peak, the trail dives back down into the South Fork drainage. On the way down the steep switchbacks, we find a beautiful, crystal-clear spring bubbling up from the ground – and we take the opportunity to have a rest and filter some of the cleanest water we’ve had all week…absolutely delicious. At the bottom of the switchbacks, the trail then turns directly North and heads about a mile and half up the South Fork drainage through some beautiful forested areas and a lovely meadow. There is a bit of water in the South Fork, but it’s pretty dry. Luckily we are filled up with that amazing spring water so we don’t need to stop.

At the top of the South Fork drainage, the trail then turns immediately West and UP UP UP about 800 vertical feet of crazy switchbacks to make the climb towards Ten Lakes. We stop at the bottom and eat a light lunch before making the climb, as the sun is now up and in full force and this will be a HOT ascent. We encounter one solo hiker coming down from Ten Lakes, and he asks us about water sources. We turn him on to the location of the magical spring, and he thanks us and heads off.

We begin our ascent of the switchbacks – taking it one section at a time and hydrating regularly as the sun is now beating down and temps are HIGH. We complete the climb quickly and efficiently and then slowing ascend the final flatter section to the first of the Ten Lakes. Of the Ten Lakes, the two largest ones are actually right on the Ten Lakes trail (the others require some off-trail nav via use trails). We stop at the first one (“East” lake) at 9,400 feet elevation and have a rest and filter some water. There are some great campsites there are zero people, but we decide to keep going to the second lake (“West” lake) which will position us better for the climb over Ten Lakes Pass the next morning. We hike the last mile and change, descending down to the “West” lake at 8,950 feet. The view on the descent is stunning and we stop a take a few pictures. We arrive at the “West” lake and pitch camp on a rock outcropping overlooking the lake. Because Ten Lakes – accessible directly from the Yosemite Creek / Ten Lakes trail head on highway 120 – is only about a 6-mile hike in, there are quite a few people camping there by the end of the evening. We share the lakefront with some other campers and swimmers during dinner, but then everyone settles in for a quiet night. The storm rolls in but we don’t get hit as hard as the night before. This will be our last night in the Yosemite Wilderness.

Day 5 – Ten Lakes to White Wolf

We wake up early and pack up our gear for the last time. The morning is cool, which is good because we now have to climb 800 feet of switchbacks in about a mile to get out of the Ten Lakes area and up-and-over Ten Lakes Pass. We begin the due West climb up the switchbacks – and it doesn’t take long for the East-rising sun to start to heat us up. We encounter some pikas and a huge Marmot on the switchback ascent, as Ten Lakes Pass is reasonably high up at 9,670 feet in elevation.

We finish the ascent and arrive at Ten Lakes Pass – a beautiful alpine meadow – and are greeted by some playful deer. Now – we begin our 8 mile descent South and West to are starting point at White Wolf campground. After the initial set of steep downward switchbacks, the trail crosses the lovely Half Moon Meadow. We encounter a pair of backpackers camped out there, but otherwise it is quiet and still. It’s a beautiful meadow at the base of the Ten Lakes Pass – and we make a note to come back and visit it again.

From there, it’s another 2 miles or so until the trail junction of the Ten Lakes Trail and the East/West White Wolf Trail. We stop at the junction for a snack – there’s no water in Yosemite Creek at the junction, but we have plenty so we are ok to keep going. The trail heads directly West towards White Wolf, covering about 3 ½ miles of beautiful dense forest with some amazingly large trees. It also winds its way through a burn area left over from the Lukens fire many years earlier. But the forest is coming back – which is a good sign. From the Lukens Lake trail junction, it’s now just a bit under 2 miles to complete our journey.

We arrive back at the White Wolf Campground to the eerie sight of zero people. The campground closed just after Labor Day (the day after we were there), so it was locked up tight and no one was around. We saw two people sitting at a picnic table, and they look surprised to see us coming out of the forest, but other than that – no one. We were the only car left in the overflow parking, which was weird. We packed everything back into the car and followed the dirt loop back to the access road.

When we got to the access road / Highway 120 junction the GATE WAS CLOSED! Uh oh – how were we going to out??? I’ve got no phone signal either!! My first thought was to turn around and go back to those two people at the picnic table and say “how the heck did you guys get in here???” But first, I decided to get out of the car and check the gate. Sure enough, it was closed BUT THE LOCK wasn’t latched. Phew!!! I unwrapped the lock and chain and opened the gate, moved my car out, and then re-wrapped everything up. It took a few minutes for my heart to slow down LOL.

Alabama Hills Cafe

And just like that, our 5-day adventure on the Yosemite Wilderness Grand Canyon of Tuolumne Loop was complete. Now, time to drive to Bishop for Mexican Food and Beers! Then, the next morning, it would be a stop at the Alabama Hills Café in Lone Pine for breakfast, and then home!

Yosemite Grand Canyon of Tuolumne Tips and Notes

  • Wilderness Permits are required to stay overnite in the Yosemite Backcountry. All trailheads are based on a quota system, and permits can be applied for 168 prior to departure. For all information on Yosemite Wilderness Permits, trail quotas and applications, go to https://www.nps.gov/yose/planyourvisit/wildpermits.htm.
  • With the exception of the White Wolf Campground backpackers camp, all of the campsites we used on the trail were backcountry sites with NO bear boxes for storage. Therefore, APPROVED bear canisters are required for this loop to store all food and items with a scent. You will be required to go through a quick education process on this when you pick up your permit at the Tuolumne Meadows permit station.  
  • We tracked the trip via GaiaGPS for iPhone. Our GPX track can be downloaded above.
  • Due to our late season start date, water was scarce in some spots. Lakes and major streams should be used – seasonal water on maps was almost entirely dry. Earlier in the season would yield water from all seasonal sources and would require many wet trail crossings.
  • Normally in Yosemite, campfires are permitted above 6,000 fee and below 9,600 fee in elevation in improved rock fire rings. This year, NO FIRES were permitted in the park backcountry.
  • We had a short burst of heavy rain on Day 3 and light rain on Day 4, so make sure you have proper rain gear, pack covers and shelter on this loop.

Conclusions

If you are as passionate about Yosemite National Park as we are (after all, we were married at Glacier Point), then a trip to the Northern half of the park and the Yosemite Wilderness should be on your bucket list. The Grand Canyon of Tuolumne and it’s majestic canyon and stunning waterfalls are a box that should be checked off.

Another benefit of this route is the small numbers of people in late season – it is a true backcountry experience after Labor Day.

This loop is perfect for beginner backpackers and experienced backpackers alike.

There’s no better way to see the Northern section of Yosemite National Park than the Grand Canyon of Tuolumne Loop.

Originally hiked September 3-8, 2022 by Greg Glass and Barbara Hale. All photos by the same.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-the-grand-canyon-of-tuolumne-loop-in-yosemite-national-park/feed/ 0
Backpacking the Wonderland Trail https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-the-wonderland-trail/ https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-the-wonderland-trail/#comments Wed, 08 Apr 2020 21:59:00 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=427587 Backpacking the Wonderland Trail in Mount Rainier National Park

Backpacking the Wonderland Trail in Mount Rainier National Park is a great way to test the thru-hiking waters to see if it’s for you. Joan and I visited Mount Rainier National Park for the first time in 2018, as we were scouting trails for the Pacific Northwest Six-Pack of Peaks Challenge. We were awestruck by this majestic mountain. The 14,411 foot active stratovolcano is so massive that it creates its own weather systems. I knew I’d be back.

The Wonderland Trail is a 93-mile trail that loops completely around Mount Rainier. You might assume that it’s easier because it’s going around a mountain rather than over mountain crests. You would be wrong. The Wonderland Trail climbs and falls 23,000 feet over those 93 miles. You are constantly either going up or going down.

Wonderland Trail Overview
Distance: 93 miles
Time: 3-14 days
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain/loss: 25,593 ft
Dogs: No
When to go: July-September
Once a year, my friend Jason and I sign up for a half marathon near a different National Park. We’ve run at Zion, Grand Canyon, Glacier and Grand Teton. In 2019, we were hoping to sign up for the Rocky Mountain race, but alas, it’s held once every two years, and 2019 was a “bye” year. So we hatched an alternate plan: thru-hike the Wonderland Trail. Shortly after we announced our intentions our friend Derek signed on and we had a team.

Jason had previously attempted a thru-hike that was aborted due to his hiking partner’s illness, so this was a sort of “redemption hike” for him. He suggested modifying our route from the official trail, taking more scenic Spray Park route between Mowich Lake and Carbon River. This guide covers the Wonderland Trail using the Spray Park alternate.

Wonderland Trail Map & Elevation Profile (Spray Park Alternate)

Itinerary

After hiking the John Muir Trail and many other trips in the Sierra Nevada mountains and elsewhere, I was surprised to learn that there is no dispersed camping along the Wonderland Trail (there is dispersed camping in the park, but by specific permit, and generally well off the Wonderland Trail). On the Wonderland Trail there are 18 established camps (plus two more on the Spray Park Trail), each with a specific number of sites.

Campsites are designed to accommodate up to five people and two tents, with some camps also having group sites that could accommodate up to 12 people. Your permit requires a detailed, day-by-day itinerary that states which campsite you will stay at on each specific date of your trip.

Deer at Devils Dream Camp Dick's Creek Camp

When we did our original planning, we were using an 11-day itinerary using this excellent online itinerary planner. It provides some really useful tools, including the distance between camps, sunrise/sunset times and hours of daylight.

Clockwise or Counter-clockwise? When you plan your itinerary, you’ll need to decide where you want to start, and whether you want to hike clockwise or counter-clockwise. Most folks hike clockwise, where the biggest inclines are not as steep. Either way, you’ll cover the same mileage and climb (and descend) the same total vertical feet. We happened to hike clockwise.

Permits

Scoring permits for the Wonderland Trail turned out to be our first challenge. You can submit your permit request beginning on March 15th. Permit requests are only accepted online, but there is no rush to submit. Submit your request anytime between March 15th and March 31st. Rangers begin processing the requests on April 1st in random order. Each permit request includes a non-refundable $20 fee that is paid whether you are awarded a permit or not. You increase your odds by having flexibility in start dates and avoiding peak times (weekend and holidays).

In our case, the three of us each applied for a permit, with different start dates and slightly different itineraries. Our hope was that at least one of us would get a permit. Sadly, none of us got a permit. 

Fortunately, 30% of the campsites are reserved for walk-in permits. We had allotted two weeks for the trip to give ourselves flexibility, and decided to take our chances. Jason and I drove to Longmire on Sunday and found an open car campsite at Cougar Rock Campground. Once we reserved that, we drove down to Longmire, walked into the Wilderness Information Center at 2pm and walked out 30 minutes later with a permit to start the trail the next day.

Instead of doing the trail in 11 days as originally planned, we opted to maximize our available time off and take 13 days to hike the trail. Because of the lengthy duration of our trip (most trips on the Wonderland Trail are closer to 6-9 days), we were able to score some of the most-coveted campsites along the way. Your permit lists your day-by-day itinerary, and must be attached to the outside of your pack when hiking, and your tent when camped. And in case you’re wondering, rangers checked our permits two times along the trail.

Longmire Wilderness Information Center We scored a walk-in permit Longmire Lodge

For walk-in permits, the ranger handed us a blank itinerary and a print-out showing current availability for each campsite by date. We were warned to be quick about filling it out, as there are three ranger stations on the trail where hikers can request walk-in permits. All are working from the same availability data, so while a site might be available when the ranger hands you the list, by the time you turn in your itinerary, someone at a different ranger station may have already taken that last campsite. In our case, we were pretty lucky. First, we were starting on a Monday (rather than a weekend date). Second, we had 12 nights of camping along the way. While the first two days would require a lot of miles, we would have plenty of short, easy mileage days on the second half of our trip.

Proposed Wonderland Itinerary Wonderland Permit with Itinerary

Resupply

There are three main locations to ship or cache resupply packages: Longmire, Mowich Lake and Sunrise. Our hope was that we would start in Longmire, so we shipped resupply packages for both Mowich Lake and Sunrise. Another option would be to drive to the location(s) where you want to put a cache, which is feasible if you have day before you begin your thru-hike. Following the directions on the NPS website, we shipped in 5-gallon plastic bins, taped shut, via Fedex. It was expensive (~$158 for four buckets) so that might factor into your decision on the number of resupply packages, or whether you want to hand-deliver them the day before your trip begins.

One important tip: The NPS website tells you to write the date that the cache will be picked up on the container, but it doesn’t explain why. They have bear-proof storage boxes that are not large enough to store all of the caches. The rangers will fill the storage boxes with the caches based on the pickup date, and store the remainder in a secure area that you cannot get to. Since we were shooting to get walk-in permits, we didn’t know exactly what dates we would pick-up each cache, so we put down a date range.

Resupply at Mowich Lake Ranger Station

Resupply at the Mowich Lake Ranger Station

As it turned out, all three of us got our resupply shipments at Mowich Lake, but Derek’s package was not in the storage at Sunrise. Fortunately he was able to track down a ranger who was able to open up the building where the other caches were stored, and his resupply package was found. The date of pickup is important, or else be sure to get there before the ranger station closes.

If you ship your resupply packages, bear in mind that you cannot ship fuel. We planned for this and carried a bit extra from the start. We were able to purchase additional canisters as well as snacks at the small store at Sunrise.

Planning Resources for Backpacking the Wonderland Trail

Backpacking the Wonderland Trail, Day-by-Day

The remainder of this guide outlines our counter-clockwise journey on the Wonderland Trail, beginning near Longmire and taking the Spray Park alternate route. I’ve divided it roughly into three segments: Longmire to Mowich Lake; Mowich to Sunrise; and Sunrise back to Longmire.

You can travel with us with a day-by-day guide based on the itinerary we used to hike the Wonderland Trail, with photos, trail description map and elevation profile.

Longmire to Mowich Lake


Mowich Lake to Sunrise


Sunrise to Longmire

Headed to Summerland on the Wonderland Trail Looking back at Mount Rainier Below the Winthrop Glacier Watching Jason cross the Tahoma Creek Suspension Bridge St Andrews Lake on the Wonderland Trail Jeff, Jason and Derek in Mystic Lake Trail to South Mowich River Camp

Postscript

Would I have done anything differently were I to hike the trail again?

  • I combine a few of the days and complete the trail in 11 days vs 13 days. I enjoyed the lazy short days, but they were maybe a little too lazy for me.
  • I would put more variety and just plain thought into my meal planning. I did the expedient thing, and brought dehydrated meals for dinners. Towards the end I was yearning for something a little different, and I think that could be achieved by putting a little more thought into the planning and preparation.
  • One thing that was a hit? Flour tortillas and Nutella. Tasty, durable, packable, and loads of energy. I learned that tip from Carsten Jost when we backpacked in Grand Teton National Park. It’s a keeper.
  • And for another perspective on the same trip, check out Derek’s Wonderland post over at 100Peaks.com.

 


Originally hiked between August 5-17, 2019 with Jason Fitzpatrick and Derek Loranger.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-the-wonderland-trail/feed/ 6
Essential Wonderland Trail Resources https://socalhiker.net/essential-wonderland-trail-resources/ https://socalhiker.net/essential-wonderland-trail-resources/#comments Wed, 08 Apr 2020 20:44:59 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=427881 If you want to hike the Wonderland Trail, it pays to do your homework. There were a number of resources we used help us plan, prepare, and successfully hike the Wonderland Trail.

Book: Hiking the Wonderland Trail by Tami AsarsFirst up is the wonderful book Hiking the Wonderland Trail by Tami Asars. I used the paperback version as I was researching the trail and planning our trip. Derek had the Kindle version, so he was able to reference a downloaded copy on his iPhone. Tami has hiked the Wonderland Trail many times, and this was the best book I found covering the Wonderland Trail.

Highly recommended.


NatGeo Wonderland Trail mapI always bring a paper map. National Geographic’s Wonderland Trail Map was an invaluable reference that I carried with me on the trail. Even though the Wonderland Trail is pretty well marked, it’s useful to have a reference to quickly identify geographic features, water sources, and side trails.

This map is printed on durable, water-resistant paper and is organized in pages, rather than a fold-out map. Each two-page spread includes an elevation profile for the section shown.


Guthook GuidesGuthook Guides app with the Wonderland Trail data. The app is free and available for iOS and Android, but you’ll pay for the trail data. It is super-cool because the data is downloaded to your phone, and uses your phone’s GPS data to locate you. You’ll know in a snap exactly how far it is to your camp, or the nearest water source.

I’ve heard of Guthook Guides since they first came out for the PCT years ago, but this trip was the first time I actually used it. I’m hooked.


For emergencies (we thankfully had none), weather reports, and communication with our families back home, the Garmin InReach Mini is highly recommended.

I have an older model that I’ve used for several years, but when it comes time to replace it, I’ll get the Mini. You use your smartphone as the primary interface for typing messages (which is preferred anyway) and you can send and receive text messages with your family.  If there were an emergency, you can also alert Search and Rescue (SAR).


Keeping my iPhone and Apple Watch charged? I used an Anker PowerCore Charger. Yes, I wore my Apple Watch and used my iPhone extensively on this trip. I tracked our route, took photos and more.

I tried using a solar panel on the John Muir Trail, but over time, I’ve found that a portable battery like this is much more effective and reliable.


 

Some of these links are affiliate links, meaning we earn a small commission if you click the link and purchase. The pricing isn’t affected, but you’ll help support our trail guides at SoCalHiker.net, and for that we are thankful. – Jeff 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/essential-wonderland-trail-resources/feed/ 1
Mushrooms of the Wonderland Trail https://socalhiker.net/mushrooms-of-the-wonderland-trail/ https://socalhiker.net/mushrooms-of-the-wonderland-trail/#respond Tue, 07 Apr 2020 21:51:23 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=427816 I was amazed by the variety of mushrooms I saw on the Wonderland Trail. I know some of them are edible, but I’ve no idea which ones.

Click on the gallery to view larger, and leave a comment on a photo if you can help me identify them.

Amanita muscaria Mushrooms on the Wonderland Trail Mushrooms on the Wonderland Trail ]]>
https://socalhiker.net/mushrooms-of-the-wonderland-trail/feed/ 0
Backpacking the Red Peak Pass Loop in Yosemite National Park https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-the-red-peak-pass-loop-in-yosemite-national-park/ https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-the-red-peak-pass-loop-in-yosemite-national-park/#comments Mon, 21 Oct 2019 00:35:48 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=418959 Backpacking the Red Peak Pass Loop in Yosemite

Yosemite National Park features some of the most beautiful backcountry in all of the Sierra Nevada.  Surprisingly, however, most people stick to a few main trails – namely the John Muir Trail between Yosemite Valley – Tuolumne Meadows – Donahue Pass and the High Sierra Camp trails leading to Merced Lake – Vogelsang – Sunrise.  Often times the northern portion of the park above Highway 120 and the southern portion of the park towards the Sierra National Forest and Ansel Adams Wilderness are overlooked by backpackers.

For this trip, we asked ourselves a few questions:

  1. What is the highest trail point in Yosemite?  That would be a fun place to check out.
  2. How can we construct a ‘loop’ hike to that high point starting and ending in Yosemite Valley

ANSWER: the highest Class 1 trail point in Yosemite National Park is Red Peak Pass – a steep and narrow mountain pass that crosses over the Clark Range in the southeastern portion of the park.  The Clark Range – and the Cathedral Range to its north – are the two main mini-mountain ranges in eastern Yosemite that come off the main Sierra Nevada range to their east.  The Cathedral Range is a bit more famous, as it features Vogelsang High Sierra Camp and eventually Donahue Pass to the east.

It is fairly straightforward to construct a Red Peak Pass Loop from Yosemite Valley – either clockwise or counter-clockwise.  Most people will either start from the valley at Happy Isles (IF you can get a permit!) and either head south down Illiloutte Creek or head east towards Lake Merced.  For ease of permit acquisition, we decided to start up high above the valley floor at Glacier Point and head south and counter-clockwise.

We decided to not follow Illiloutte Creek across to Merced Pass Lakes, but instead go directly south and explore Buena Vista Lake, Royal Arch Lake and Buck Camp before heading back north and east towards Red Peak Pass.  This extended version of the Red Peak Pass Loop would give us a great 6 day / 57.6 map miles backcountry adventure.

Why enter at Glacier Point instead of Happy Isles / Yosemite Valley?  Several reasons:

  • Glacier Point has 15 permits per day as a quota, whereas Happy Isles > Illiloutte only has 3 permits per day that are desirable to John Muir Trail hikers.  Much easier to get the permits and the dates we wanted via Glacier Point.
  • By starting at Glacier Point, we start up at 7,700 feet and head down to start – nothing wrong with that on day one.
  • We can park our car in the Valley the day before we start, pick up our permit, stay at the Backpackers Camp in the valley, and take the Glacier Point tour bus to the trailhead the next morning – then when we end in the valley, we are at our car.
Trail Details
Distance: 57.6 miles
Time: Six days
Difficulty: Moderately Strenuous
Elevation gain: 8,859 ft
Dogs: No
When to go: Mid-July to September

Planning the Trip

We booked our backcountry permit online through the Yosemite backcountry permit system exactly 168 days prior to our entry date.  Once we had our permit, we then booked our Glacier Point bus tour tickets online as well.  The map we used to plan our route was the Tom Harrison Yosemite High Country Map.  This one map shows the entire route.  We chose the following schedule for our trip – hoping that this would keep our average miles around 10 to 11 miles per day for the first five days and also land us at a good water source each night:

  • Travel Day One: Drive to Oakhurst, CA and spend the night at a motel.  Since our departure was on Labor Day Weekend, we wanted to be able to get into the park the next morning as early as possible to insure getting a parking space at the Happy Isles trailhead parking lot.
  • Travel Day Two: Drive from Oakhurst into Yosemite Valley early a.m. and get a parking place in the Happy Isles trailhead parking lot.  Once secured, stow our gear and pitch camp at backpacker’s camp.  Then go the Wilderness Office in Yosemite Village and pick up our backcountry permit and parking pass.  Then go to Yosemite Lodge and pick up our bus tickets for the ride to Glacier Point. Do a little sightseeing in the Valley, then crash in our tent at backpacker’s camp that night.
  • Day One – 10.7 miles: Take the free Yosemite Shuttle from Backpacker’s Camp to Yosemite Lodge and pick up the tour bus to Glacier Point.  Hike south from Glacier Point to the point where Buena Vista Creek crosses the Buena Vista Trail near Hart Lakes.
  • Day Two – 10.7 miles: Hike south to Buena Vista Lake and over Buena Vista Pass.  Continue South past Royal Arch Lake and then east and up to Buck Camp. Then continue Northeast and up to the Moraine Meadows Trail Junction.
  • Day Three – 10 miles: Hike north over Merced Pass then northeast to Ottoway Lakes.  Ascend Red Peak Pass, then descend and head east into the Clark Range basin to an unnamed trail lake and camp.
  • Day Four – 10.5 miles: Hike east and down to the Triple Peak Fork Trail and then north to Washburn Lake.
  • Day Five – 11.5 miles: Hike north to Lake Merced and then west to Little Yosemite Valley.
  • Day Six – 4.2 miles: Hike west and down to Yosemite Valley.  Shower at Curry Village then drive home.

Total (Tom Harrison Map) Miles: 57.6 Miles
(NOTE: Actual GPS hiking mileage as recorded by the Gaia GPS for iPhone app was 60.72 miles)

Day One – Glacier Point to Buena Vista Trail / Buena Vista Creek Crossing

Day One Stats
Distance: 10.7 miles
Time: 6 hours
Elevation gain: 3,196 ft
The Glacier Point Shuttle drops you off right at the trailhead.  If you’ve never been to Glacier Point before, take a few minutes to look around and take in the views of Yosemite Valley.  When you’re ready, hit the trail.  The trail starts immediately downward as it descends South towards Illilouette Falls and the Panorama Trail junction.  Once past the junction, the trail follows Illilouette Creek two miles until it meets the junction of the Mono Meadows Trail and the Buena Vista Trail.

Glacier Point Trailhead

Barb at the Glacier Point Trailhead

Most Red Peak Pass Loop-ers will stay on the Illilouette Creek trail and head east directly towards Lower and Upper Merced Pass Lakes.  We chose the long route to head south and visit Buena Vista Lake, Royal Arch Lake and Buck Camp.  So here, we take the junction and join the Buena Vista Trail and head south.

Illiloutte Creek Crossing Illiloutte Creek

From here on out, we are alone on the trail. The Buena Vista Trail is a low altitude, dusty trail that follows a partially wooded, partially exposed path south.  To the east there are great views of Mt. Starr King – and still farther east we can see views of Red Peak and the Clark Range…our eventual target.  As this was late in the summer, seasonal creeks are mostly dry and we are careful to monitor our water supply and fill when we can.

First View of Red Peak to the East Mt. Starr King Red Peak to the East

As we get closer to the Buena Vista Creek trail crossing, the trail heads up and into the forest on a ridge known as Horse Ridge.  We get back up over 8,000 feet after a fairly steep switchback climb up onto the ridge and are welcomed by the shade of the forest again.  Then, as our GPS signals we are close, we spot our friends Mark and Mia who had headed out the day before and had already found the creek crossing and pitched camp.  They found a nice flat campsite near the creek crossing and it already had a built-out rock fire pit.

Campsite at Buena Vista Creek crossing

Unfortunately, Buena Vista Creek wasn’t flowing anymore, but Mark had found a small trickle and pool with clean water and we were good to go for the night.  For those that take the shorter version of the loop via the Illiloutte Creek trail, water is not a problem.  For this longer, Southern route towards Buena Vista Lake, be aware that late season water is limited unless you do a full 13+ miles to Buena Vista Lake on day one.  But with our clean pool at Buena Vista Creek, we were just fine!  Time for a campfire, dinner and night one on the trail.

NOTE on CAMPFIRES: Yosemite Campfire rules are a bit different than other parts of the Sierra.  Fires are ONLY allowed in improved campsite areas with rock fire rings and only above 6,000 feet and below 9,600 feet.  You should have a California Fire Permit with you along with your wilderness permit at all times.  Get the permit at http://www.preventwildfireca.org/Campfire-Permit/.  I also carry a lightweight collapsible bucket.  Not only does it work for washing clothes and feet, but you simply fill it up and keep that 5L of water next to the campfire so that when it’s time to put it out, you have a way to completely extinguish it quickly and safely.

Day Two – Buena Vista Trail / Buena Vista Creek Trail Junction to Moraine Meadows Trail Junction

Day Two Stats
Distance: 10.7 miles
Time: 8 hours
Elevation gain: 1,919 ft
We woke up to a beautiful morning, ate breakfast, drank coffee and then headed south on the Buena Vista Trail towards Buena Vista Lake. About a mile and a half south is a trail junction which includes an exit to the west that heads towards Wawona.

Trail Up to Buena Vista Lake

We continue south and arrive at Buena Vista Lake.

Buena Vista Lake

Buena Vista Lake is a beautiful alpine lake that sits at about 9,100 feet, surrounded by gorgeous rock cliffs and overlooked by Buena Vista Peak.

Buena Vista Lake

The trail winds its way along the north side of the Lake, and then heads up a series of switchbacks to Buena Vista Pass at a little over 9,300 feet which crosses a rock range called the Buena Vista Crest.

The trail then heads directly south again towards the southernmost east-west trail in Yosemite National Park that runs from Wawona and Chilnualna Falls to Buck Camp.  Before arriving at that trail junction, the trail winds through some gorgeous rock formations to arrive at Royal Arch Lake at about 8,700 feet.

Trail to Royal Arch Lake Royal Arch Lake

 

Royal Arch Lake gets its name from the amazing arch-shaped granite wall that borders the east side of the lake.  It’s simply breathtaking!  We stop at the lake, filter some fresh water, have a snack, take a few photos, then then we’re off again.

We arrive at the trail junction at 8,490 feet and then turn directly east towards Buck Camp.  The climb to Buck Camp is a steep, forested trail that grabs a quick 400+ vertical feet and definitely gets your heart pumping.  Our friend Mark saw a large bear run by and it was soon followed by a few hikers coming the other way.  After the quick hard climb, the trail drops back down the other side of the ridge through some gorgeous flowery meadows and water lilies to arrive at Buck Camp.

Meadow leading to Buck Camp Buck Camp Ranger Station

 

Buck Camp is the southernmost ranger station in Yosemite National Park and sits less than 3 miles from the southern border with the Sierra National Forest.  It is a very old log cabin-style building and has an old outhouse and a small corral/tie-up for horses and mules.  When we arrived, four women from the Buena Vista Lake trail camp were resting and filtering water and we chatted with them for a bit.  They were nice enough to show us the location of the Buck Creek water source and we filtered/filled up as well.

The trail now heads directly northeast towards Moraine Mountain and the Moraine Meadows trail.  After 4 miles and a vertical gain of about 500 feet, we finally arrived (tired) at the Moraine Meadows trail junction in the southeastern corner of Yosemite National Park.

Moraine Meadow Trail Junction Camp at Moraine Meadow Trail Junction

We were concerned about water, but all of my maps showed that there was a permanent tarn just East of the trail junction on the Moraine Meadows trail.  Everyone dropped their packs at the trail junction and I volunteered to go look for the tarn.  I took my water bag with me in hopes of success.  Thank you Tom Harrison!…your map was correct.  The tarn was there and FULL and we had water!  Everyone took turns going back and forth to the tarn and we filled up for the night and next morning.  While others were doing water and camp chores, I took it upon myself to build a rock fire pit so we could have a campfire.  That’s a workout in itself! We were now set with water, a good camp site, a campfire, and a perfect 8,800 foot position to attack 11,060 foot Red Peak Pass the next day!

NOTE: the Moraine Meadows trail heads directly east towards the eastern border of Yosemite National Park and the Ansel Adams Wilderness.  If you head east on this trail about 4 ½ miles, you end up crossing over the southern portion of the Clark Range at the famous Fernandez Pass.  This is part of the old Theodore Solomons Trail route that you can also read about here on the site.

Day Three – Moraine Meadows Trail Junction to Red Peak Pass and the Clark Range Basin East of Red Peak Pass

Day Three Stats
Distance: 10 miles
Time: 8 hours
Elevation gain: 3,259 ft
We woke early because we had our BIGGEST day ahead.  Today was the day we would accomplish the feature goal of our trip – crossing over Red Peak Pass, the highest Class 1 trail point in Yosemite National Park.

After breakfast and coffee, we headed north, climbing 500+ vertical feet over 1.8 miles to Merced Pass at 9,300 feet.  Merced Pass is at the eastern end of the Buena Vista Crest that we had crossed the day before.

Trail up to Merced Pass Half Dome and Starr King from Merced Pass Red Peak from Merced Pass

From the pass, the trail winds downward to the trail junction of the Illiloutte Creek trail.  We are now back at the point where the traditional Red Peak Pass Loop would arrive from Glacier Point.  The trail junction sits right between two lakes – Lower Merced Pass Lake and Upper Merced Pass Lake.  We bid goodbye to our friends Mark and Mia who decide to head back to the Valley via Illiloutte Creek, and we are now on our own to tackle Red Peak Pass!

The trail junction sits at 8,900 feet, so we have 1,200 feet of northeast climbing to do to get over the Pass.  Ready, set, GO!

The first 2 miles of climbing is steep, forested, dirt trail combined with some rock steps and switchbacks.  Once you get above the tree line, the trail turns to all granite and granite steps.  Like most of the trails in Yosemite National Park, the granite step trails are meticulously constructed and demonstrate the best of 1920s and 1930s trail building techniques.

The next landmark is Ottoway Creek, which is fed from the Ottoway Lakes above and then flows down and feeds into Illiloutte Creek below.  Some beautiful water features and small waterfalls decorate the creek on both sides.  I find a tricky rock crossing, but my wife chooses to put on her sandals and do it as a wet crossing for safety.  Always better to wade through then risk a fall.  After drying off her feet, we continue up to Lower Ottoway Lake.

Crossing Ottoway Creek

Lower Ottoway Lake is a gorgeous alpine lake at the base of the Clark Range at 9,600 feet.  The trail comes right up next to the lake on the West edge, and we find a beautiful flat granite outcropping and take off our packs for an early lunch and water refill.  The fish are swimming and jumping in the lake, and as with the entire trail, we are the only ones there.

Trail up to Lower Ottoway Lakes 3 Lower Ottoway Lakes Lower Ottoway Lakes

We could have stayed there for hours and done some swimming too – but we had a date with a PASS! And so we saddled up and headed UP!  1,500 vertical feet to go in about 2 miles.

The trail switchbacks upwards through the granite, with more incredible granite step trail building.  We were amazed at how much greenery and flowers and water were still on the trail the first week of September! It looked like the Alps in some places, and another great benefit of a big snow year.

Looking back at Lower Ottoway Lakes as we ascend towards Red Peak Pass

As you look back, you get great views of Lower Ottoway Lake.  We saw our other friends from Germany in the distance and gave them a yell and a wave as they arrived where he had just been.  As we continue to climb, Upper Ottoway Lake comes into view to the South, again surrounded by the bare peaks of the Clark Range and patches of leftover winter snow.

Trail to Red Peak Pass Trail to Red Peak Pass Upper Ottoway Lakes from Red Peak Pass Trail A bit of Snow on the Red Peak Pass Trail The Final Ascent to Red Peak Pass The Final Ascent to Red Peak Pass

The final push to Red Peak Pass is a straight up switchback trail that goes directly in between two rock spires.  It’s some of the coolest trail design and construction we’d seen yet.  We couldn’t believe THAT was where they decided to put the trail!  We arrive at the top – Red Peak Pass – and our feature goal of the trip is complete.  The views to both the south and the north are breathtaking and we quickly grab some photos and videos.

View from Red Peak Pass Looking South towards Upper Ottoway Lakes

We are surrounded by 11,000+ foot peaks including Gray Peak and Red Peak to the northwest and Ottoway Peak, Merced Peak and Triple Divide Peak to the southeast.  The north side of the pass is all above-the-tree line granite basin, making for a gorgeous hike down through the rocks.  BUT, in all our glee to reach the top, we didn’t notice the thunder clouds rolling in…until JUST NOW!

View from Red Peak Pass Looking North towards Yosemite

As we begin our decent on the north side of Red Peak Pass, the raindrops start to fall.  We quickly get our rain jackets and pack covers on.  We are hopeful that it doesn’t get too bad – and we’re also thankful that almost all the snow and ice has melted off the north side switchbacks and we don’t have to put on micro spikes.  Unfortunately, the clouds let go with FULL force including thunder and lightning, and our adventure at 11,000 feet of exposed rock just got interesting!

First came the stinging hail.  Then, as we hustled lower, the heavy rain.  The trail turned into a river in places, and we hiked as quickly and carefully as we could.  When the thunder and lightning was directly overhead, we tried to take some shelter under some big rocks, but it wasn’t very effective.  In between bursts we kept going as quickly as we could. After more than a mile from the pass, we finally reached some trees and we were no longer the tallest thing on the rocks.  We kept going until we reached the largest unnamed tarn on the map at 9,900 feet that we had targeted during map planning.  By this time, we were pretty wet.

The rain lightened up long enough for us to get our tent set up and get everything stowed.  Then the thunder clouds let go again and we hunkered down in the tent for several hours.  The tent held up, although we had water underneath which was a bit unnerving.   At 7 p.m., five hours AFTER it had started, it finally blew through and we could get out and evaluate.  Kevin and our German friends had arrived during the storm – thought about going even lower on the trail – and then decided to stay and pitch camp near us.

Our campsite in the Clark Range Basin after the 5 hour storm passes

We kept some stuff dry, while other stuff was wet.  Sleeping gear was all dry which was great. We’d be ok tomorrow – but with wet shoes which is never fun.  We ate some food, filtered some water, and went to sleep as things began to dry out.  It was our BIG day in so many ways.  Never a dull moment in the Sierra Nevada – and its baby brother the Clark Range gave us everything it had.

NOTE: once the hail and rain started coming down, I tried to take some photos and videos but my hands and my iPhone cover were so cold and wet that I couldn’t get it to activate my password and turn on.  So unfortunately I don’t have any good storm photos or videos coming down the North side of Red Peak Pass.  Better to stow my phone and keep it dry and functional anyway.  You’ll have to take my word for it.

Day Four – Clark Range Basin to Washburn Lake

Day Four Stats
Distance: 10.5 miles
Time: 7.5 hours
Elevation gain: 2,976 ft
We woke to clear and cool skies.  We began the early morning by sorting out the wet and dry clothes into piles, carefully packing our sleep systems up, and shaking out the tent and rainfly to get rid of as much water as possible before rolling them up.  Once everything was sorted and organized, we re-packed our packs in a way to keep all the wet and dry stuff completely separated.  Later this afternoon we hoped it would be warm and sunny so we could dry everything out.  After some coffee and oatmeal, we were ready to head DOWN.  Remember, we started at 7,700-foot Glacier Point, and we were now starting the long journey back to Yosemite Valley at 4,000 feet.  So that meant the next 3 days would be 6,000 feet of net descent.  We were packed and ready – off we go.

Waterfall off the Clark Range Heading East through the Clark Range Basin Wet Crossing in the Basin Snow in the Clark Range Our Bear Sighting

The trail out of the Clark Range Basin zig zags east as it makes its way into the river basin that will eventually become the Merced River.  The three miles of eastern trail was beautiful – up and down, gorgeous views of the Clark Range to the south, and some pretty water features coming down from remote Edna Lake to the south.  Up and down we zig zagged, including one wet creek crossing that gave our feet a nice morning wake-up call.  Then, as the trail drops steeply down towards the river basin, we hit the wildlife lottery and spotted a big California black bear.  He was a healthy big boy and had no tracking device or ear tags.  He was a true wild Yosemite bear.  It absolutely MADE our DAY to see him.  He was magnificent.

We soon arrived at the bottom of the trail and the trail junction that would turn us north and up the river.  This main tributary of the Merced River is called Triple Peak Fork, getting its name from Triple Divide Peak to the south.  Its source is mainly the waters of Turner Lake to the south.  It’s a beautiful river at the trail junction – wide and clear.  If you cross the river, the trail heads two miles east and over Isberg Pass and into the Ansel Adams Wilderness.  Yes – we are still in the corner of the park.

Triple Peak Fork Trail Junction Triple Peak Fork Heading North on the Triple Peak Fork Waterfalls of the Triple Peak Fork 2

We begin the six-mile, flat and downhill hike north along Triple Peak Fork.  Along the way, we encounter a solo male hiker who is headed to Isberg Pass.  It’s the first stranger we’ve seen since Buck Camp, more than 20 miles earlier.  Yes – we are truly in the backcountry.  About three miles into our northern hike, the trail drops down a series of massive granite switchbacks and Triple Peak Fork becomes an incredible series of waterfalls.

Looking down into the start of the Merced River Heading down towards the Triple Peak Fork - Merced Fork Junction Merced Peak Fork Waterfalls of the Triple Peak Fork Triple Peak Fork spilling into the Merced River Merced Peak Fork Granite Beach

We are dropping down into the next major basin where Triple Peak Fork and Merced Peak Fork meet and officially become the Merced River.  It’s an incredibly gorgeous area and the trail building is spectacular.  We cross a bridge over the Merced Peak Fork and then stop at a beautiful granite beach to snack and filter water.  It was warm and sunny and it would have been a perfect place for swimming and sunbathing.

We saddle up again and finish the last two or three miles to Washburn Lake.  Washburn Lake is about three miles before Merced Lake, but unlike its more famous brother, Washburn Lake isn’t filled with a massive High Sierra Camp and a huge backpackers camp.  It’s still pristine backcountry and an absolutely gorgeous and unspoiled place to camp.

Washburn Lake

We grab a sweet spot along the East side of the lake with a fire pit already in place and pitch camp.  We spread out all of our wet stuff to dry on hot sunny rocks and take a long foot soak in the lake.  The fish are jumping and we are happy!

Soaking our Feet in Washburn Lake Washburn Lake campsite

The Germans come by a few hours later one by one, but they continue on to Merced Lake, as they have a few extra days in their schedule to grab Sunrise High Sierra Camp, Clouds Rest and Half Dome.  We wish them safe travels and take a photo by the lake with our good friend Kevin Muschter before he heads out.  We start our campfire, fold up all of our now dry clothes, celebrate our now dry shoes, and enjoy a quiet dinner and evening alone at Washburn Lake by the fire.  We are blessed.

Day Five – Washburn Lake to Little Yosemite Valley

Day Five Stats
Distance: 11.5 miles
Time: 7 hours
Elevation gain: -1,532 ft
It’s a beautiful morning at Washburn Lake, and we get the classic “reflection of the mountains on the lake” photo off the glassy water.  Today we hike three miles north along the river to Merced Lake, then turn west and head back towards Little Yosemite Valley.

Morning Reflection on Washburn Lake

The hike along this section of the Merced River is quiet and beautiful.  We soon arrive at the Merced Lake Ranger Station and Trail Junction which are about a mile prior to Merced Lake proper.  It’s a beautiful ranger station with a big horse/mule corral, but it appears to be locked up for the season.  The trail junction heads northeast for those hikers on the Yosemite High Sierra Camp loop to Vogelsang.  We continue west to Merced Lake.

Heading down the Merced River Heading down the Merced River Big Trees before the Ranger Station Merced Lake Ranger Station Merced Lake Ranger Station Trail Junction Merced Lake High Sierra Camp

First you arrive at Merced Lake High Sierra Camp.  There are a few large wooden buildings and then dozens of concrete platforms where the High Sierra Camp tents go.  Everything is taken down for the season so we stroll through it without seeing a soul. Beyond the High Sierra Camp is the backpackers camp – a huge area with room for dozens of people / tents.  We see about a half dozen folks packing up their stuff from the night before – we are back in “hiker civilization” now.

The trail heads directly west along the north side of Merced Lake.  It’s another pretty lake – but we actually think Washburn Lake is prettier.  The fish are jumping and it’s a pretty morning.  At the western end of the lake, the Merced River exits and heads down into the granite canyon that we will follow downward for the next eight or so miles to Little Yosemite Valley.

The beautiful Merced River canyon winds its way through three distinct valleys – Echo Valley, Lost Valley and finally Little Yosemite Valley.  Echo Valley is where the trail junction is that heads north towards Sunrise High Sierra Camp.  Once you head west beyond the trail junction, the trail winds its way through gorgeous granite features, across a huge bridge, and then up up up and around the mountain and down to a beautiful waterfall called the Bunnell Cascade and the entrance to Lost Valley.

Merced River West of Merced Lake Bunnell Cascade Bridge over Merced River High Above the Merced River Trailbuilding along the Merced River Bunnell Cascade Bunnell Cascade

We stop at the cascade to take some photos and filter some water.  It’s windy so we don’t stay too long.  Then we enter Lost Valley which is the start of the fire zone left over from the 2014 Meadow Fire.  From here until Little Yosemite Valley, we walk through the burned remnants of a destroyed forest.  It’s very sad and a bit spooky, but hopefully over the next 10 or 20 years things can heal.  Ground cover is healthy, but the forest has yet to renew itself.  As we exit Lost Valley and enter Little Yosemite Valley from the East, Half Dome comes into view and we know we are close.

Lost Valley Lost Valley leading into Little Yosemite Valley - Half Dome in Sight

We finally arrive at Little Yosemite Valley campground – one of the biggest backcountry campgrounds in the Sierra – and stake out a site next to the community fire pit.  I’ll be the fire builder tonight.  After we pitch camp, we go down to the Merced River to filter water and wash/soak our feet.  It’s a beautiful afternoon and there’s a ton of people there.  We are no longer alone.  We do some firewood gathering and take a walk to the solar powered latrine.

Cleaning our Feet in the Merced River at Little Yosemite Valley Little Yosemite Valley community fire pit

Our night is tweaked a bit by a visit from a Search and Rescue staffer who asks us if we had been on Half Dome today.  We had heard a helicopter earlier…and the picture became clear.  There had been a fall on the cables earlier that day and a young woman had died.  He was simply investigating the accident at the campground.  A sad thing for sure.

We lit the fire and had a visit from a Utah family with four kids and an older couple on an overnite.  We put the fire out before the 10 p.m. campground requirement and headed off to bed.  We saw some clouds rolling in so we put up the rain fly on the tent, staked it out and stowed the backpacks in the vestibule before crashing out.  Good thing, as it started to rain at 11 p.m. for about an hour.  Then it was quiet the rest of the night. It would be our last night in the Yosemite backcountry.

Day Six – Little Yosemite Valley to Happy Isles Trailhead

Day Six Stats
Distance: 4.2 miles
Time: 2.5 hours
Elevation gain: -3,130 ft
We woke up before sunrise and started packing up.  Those who were planning on doing Half Dome from Little Yosemite Valley that morning had gotten up even earlier.  We would have a short four to five mile hike down the John Muir Trail to the Valley and then to our car so we didn’t hurry.  After coffee and breakfast, we headed out towards the top of Nevada Falls.

Sunrise at Little Yosemite Valley and Half Dome

As most of you reading this have probably hiked the JMT or the Mist Trail from Yosemite Valley to at least the top of Nevada Falls, I won’t spend too much time describing the route here.  Suffice it to say we had dozens and dozens of Half Dome day hikers passing us on their way up as we were heading down.  Another little fun experience was the fact that there was NO ONE at the top of Nevada Falls when we got there (as everyone was coming up the Mist Trail and heading straight up to Half Dome).  That was the FIRST time we had ever been at the top of Nevada Falls and on the bridge with NO ONE in sight.  Strange but fun for our last morning in Yosemite.

Yosemite Valley in sight

We took our time and walked down the JMT.  We passed a few backpackers coming up and a ranger on horseback with a mule team going to service the bathrooms at Nevada Falls and Little Yosemite Valley.  Other than that, not too many people until the bridge at the base of Vernal Falls.  From there, it was “back to civilization” until we got to the trailhead and the trailhead parking lot where our car was waiting.

And just like that our six-day adventure was over.  Next stop, Curry Village for a $5 shower and then heading home.

And we are DONE 1 gallon of trash for the entire week - LNT We've got shower tickets for Curry Village - let's get clean!

Red Peak Pass Loop Trail Map & Elevation Profile

Download file: Red_Peak_Pass_Loop_.gpx

Red Peak Pass Tips and Notes

  • Wilderness permits are required to stay overnight in the Yosemite backcountry.  All trailheads are based on a quota system, and permits can be applied for 168 days prior to departure.  For all information on Yosemite wilderness permits, trail quotas and applications, go to https://www.nps.gov/yose/planyourvisit/wildpermits.htm.
  • With the exception of Little Yosemite Valley, all of the campsites we used on the trail were backcountry sites with NO bear boxes for storage.  Therefore APPROVED bear canisters are required for this loop to store all food and items with a scent.  As you read above, there ARE bears in the park.
  • We tracked the trip via Gaia GPS for iPhone.  Our GPX track can be downloaded above.
  • Due to our late season start date, water was scarce in some spots and plentiful in others.  Lakes and major streams should be used in late season.  Earlier in the season will yield water from all seasonal creeks.
  • Although we did not fish, there were great places along this loop for Golden Trout and other species, including Buena Vista Lake, Royal Arch Lake, Washburn Lake, Merced Lake and the Merced River – so plan accordingly with proper gear and a fishing license if you choose to fish.
  • Campfires are permitted above 6,000 feet and below 9,600 feet in elevation in improved rock fire rings only.  We had campfires every day except our rainy night in the Clark Range Basin.
  • We had heavy rain on Day 3 and light rain on Day 5, so make sure you have proper rain gear, pack covers and shelters on this loop.
  • Stream crossings were easy during this time of year and micro spikes were not needed over Red Peak Pass.  Earlier in the season would have required traction on the pass and would have included more wet crossings.

Conclusions

If you are as passionate about Yosemite National Park as we are (after all, we were married at Glacier Point), then a trip to the southern half of the park should be on your bucket list.  Being able to cross the Clark Range at Red Peak Pass – the highest Class 1 trail point in the park – is a box that should be checked off.

Another benefit of this route is the complete lack of people – it is a true backcountry experience.

This loop is perfect for beginner backpackers and experienced backpackers alike.

Given the shorter option of the Illiloutte Creek trail and the longer options of extending the northern portion to include Sunrise, Clouds Rest and Half Dome, the Red Peak Pass Loop can be configured for anywhere from 4 to 8 days and from 40 to 70+ miles depending on how you want to do it.  The ability to customize the trail gives you so many options depending on your schedule, the weather and your experience level.

There’s no better way to see the southern half of Yosemite National Park than the Red Peak Pass Loop.

Yosemite National Park Weather Forecast

[forecast width=”100%” location=”95389″]

Originally hiked on September 1-6, 2019 by Greg Glass, Barbara Hale and friends. All photos by the same.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-the-red-peak-pass-loop-in-yosemite-national-park/feed/ 2
Wonderland Trail Day 13: Maple Creek to Longmire https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-13-maple-creek-to-longmire/ https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-13-maple-creek-to-longmire/#comments Sun, 18 Aug 2019 03:34:08 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=427840 Our final day required a four-mile climb out of Stevens Canyon, a stop at Reflection Lakes, the descending almost exactly the elevation we climbed to the Nisqually River and the Cougar Rock Picnic Area to complete our loop on the Wonderland Trail.

Day 13: Cougar Rock
Distance: 9.3 miles
Time: 4 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation +/-: 1,972’/1,925′
This final section of our Wonderland Trail trek began foggy and damp. It was the type of weather that wasn’t rain, but you ended up soaking wet just the same. The trail climbing up Stevens Canyon was forested, with a few clearings which may have revealed a view in better weather.

About a mile up the canyon we reached Sylvia Falls, though the forest was thick and it was difficult to get an unobstructed view of the falls.

Derek admiring Sylvia Falls Sketchy washout

We managed to navigate the washout section in Stevens Canyon — arguably the sketchiest part of the entire Wonderland Trail when we hiked it. There was a detour available that involved road walking, but we managed just fine with our trekking poles to help.

At two miles we reached Martha Falls at Unicorn Creek.

Martha Falls on the Wonderland Trail

Martha Falls

We crossed the creek and climbed another 1/2 mile to Stevens Canyon Road. The trail crosses the road (watch for cars) and continues climbing to Reflection Lakes.

Rotting Bridge on the Wonderland Trail

Rotting bridges are not uncommon

Foggy Morning at Reflection Lake on the Wonderland Trail

Foggy Morning at Reflection Lake

The “trail” skirts the parking area and then follows along the shore of the lake before crossing back over Stevens Canyon Road and starting our final downhill, dropping 1,800 feet over three miles to the Nisqually River.

Crossing the Nisqually River

Crossing the Nisqually River

There were a lot of day hikers exploring along the Nisqually. We had to wait (patiently?) to cross as a family took multiple selfies on the bridge that stood between us and the end of the trail. Once we crossed, it was all smiles and a short walk to the Cougar Rock Picnic Area parking.

Wonderland Trail - Complete Post-hike Pizza

Our 13-day thru-hike of the Wonderland Trail was complete! We experienced a little bit of everything on this trail, and after changing into some clean clothes, we headed to the nearest town for a well-earned pizza.

Maple Creek to Cougar Rock Trail Map and Elevation Profile

Download file: day-13-maple-creek-to-cougar-rock-81719-64643am(cleaned).gpx

Originally hiked on August 17, 2019 with Derek and Jason. Also note that Longmire is technically 1.5 miles further down the trail. We were thankful that we hiked that mileage on Day 1. 

Back to Day 12  |  Return to Wonderland Trail Overview

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-13-maple-creek-to-longmire/feed/ 1
Wonderland Trail Day 12: Indian Bar to Maple Creek https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-12-indian-bar-to-maple-creek/ https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-12-indian-bar-to-maple-creek/#respond Sat, 17 Aug 2019 00:07:11 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=427829 Day 12 would start with a foggy climb with no views, then take us plummeting downward 3,805 feet to camp at Maple Creek, our final campsite for the trip.
Day 11: Indian Bar
Distance: 10.6 miles
Time: 5 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation +/-: 1,220’/3,805′
Before we headed out, we took one more look at the ravine at Indian Bar, then started the climb up to Cowlitz Divide. The divide begins about a mile south on the trail, and you follow the divide for the next two miles. On a clear day, you’d have sweeping views on either side of the divide.

The Pacific Northwest said, “Not today.”

Ravine at Indian Bar Headed up Cowlitz Divide

At about the five mile mark, we reached the junction with the trail to Olallie Creek Camp. Stay right and follow the trail down into the heavily forested canyon.

Deeper into the forest

The forest grew darker as we descended lower.

Two miles further and we reached the Nickel Creek crossing. We were nearing an elevation of 3,000 feet, and the forest grew thicker and darker as we dropped through different zones.

Crossing Nickel Creek

Crossing Nickel Creek

At Box Canyon the trail on the west side of the bridge was closed for maintenance, so we crossed at the road and took the opportunity to use a civilized restroom, with a sink and everything! We hiked through the tunnel and reconnected with the trail down toward Stevens Canyon.

Once you reach Stevens Canyon, the trail begins to climb parallel to Stevens Creek. In just over a mile you reach a side trail to Maple Creek Camp. The campground is verdant green, thick with trees and undergrowth. We pitched our tents, replenished our water from the creek, and did a little exploring.

Maple Creek

Maple Creek

We hoped to work our way to Maple Falls, but there was no tread to be found, the creek banks were overgrown and the creek itself had deep sections that would require wading, scrambling and frankly, more than we had energy for. We had one final hot meal on the trail.

Tomorrow would be our final day on the Wonderland Trail.

Indian Bar to Maple Creek Trail Map and Elevation Profile

Download file: day-12-indian-bar-to-maple-creek-81619-84450am(cleaned).gpx

Originally hiked on August 16, 2019 with Derek and Jason.

Back to Day 11  |  Continue to Day 13, Maple Creek to Longmire

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-12-indian-bar-to-maple-creek/feed/ 0
Wonderland Trail Day 11: Summerland to Indian Bar https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-11-summerland-to-indian-bar/ https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-11-summerland-to-indian-bar/#respond Thu, 15 Aug 2019 23:04:52 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=427818 Two of the most-wanted camps on the Wonderland Trail are Summerland and Indian Bar. They lie just five miles apart. And our itinerary included both of them.

Day 11: Indian Bar
Distance: 5 miles
Time: 3 hours
Difficulty: Moderate
Elevation +/-: 874’/2,002′
The sunrise from our camp at Summerland was a spectacular send off for the day. We’d be climbing 874′ to the highest point on the Wonderland Trail: 6,750′ high Panhandle Gap.

The climb was just over a mile and steep.

Sunrise at Summerland Camp

Sunrise at Summerland

This section of the trail is above the timberline and the scenery very different from most of the Wonderland Trail. There are creek crossings, snow fields, and aquamarine tarns that reminded me of the Sierra Nevada mountains.

Bridge below Panhandle Gap Snowy patch approaching Panhandle Gap on the Wonderland Trail

We stopped at Panhandle Gap for a break, where the wind whipped at us, forcing us to head just downhill where we were partially sheltered.

View North from Panhandle Gap on the Wonderland Trail

Looking north from Panhandle Gap

View south from Panhandle Gap on the Wonderland Trail

Looking south from Panhandle Gap

From the gap, the trail does a bit of roller-coaster routine for the next two miles, finally reaching a ridgeline which begins the descent. The final 1.5 miles drops 1,600 feet, and you can actually pick out the Indian Bar shelter from far away.

Indian Bar in the distance

Can you spot the shelter at Indian Bar beyond the ridge?

We had a warm, bluebird day and meadows filled with wildflowers as we descended into the canyon.

Wildflowers and Derek above Indian Bar on the Wonderland Trail

We had the group site in Indian Bar as well–the nicest shelter yet! This one actually had wooden platform bunk beds. The hike took us just over three hours, leaving us plenty of time to soak our feet in the cold water of the Ohanapecosh River.

Indian Bar Shelter Soaking my feet at Indian Bar Inside the Indian Bar Shelter

Our next camp would at Maple Creek, and our final night on the Wonderland Trail. At this point, I admit I was starting to look forward to celebrating the completion with a pizza and beer.

Summerland to Indian Bar Trail Map and Elevation Profile

Download file: day-11-summerland-to-indian-bar-81519-85154am(cleaned).gpx

Originally hiked on August 15, 2019 with Derek and Jason.

Back to Day 10  |  Continue to Day 12, Indian Bar to Maple Creek

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-11-summerland-to-indian-bar/feed/ 0
Wonderland Trail Day 10: Sunrise to Summerland https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-10-sunrise-to-summerland/ https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-10-sunrise-to-summerland/#respond Wed, 14 Aug 2019 21:26:01 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=427805 For Day 10 on the Wonderland Trail, we returned to double-digit mileage after three short days. Our legs were well rested, and we were looking forward to seeing Summerland.

Day 10: Summerland
Distance: 10.8 miles
Time: 6 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation +/-: 2,326’/2,663′
The trail begins by heading along the rum of the canyon, then turns and drops 2,000 feet in two miles to White River Campground. There is a backpacker’s camp here, but I wouldn’t choose to stay there. You’re surrounded by RVs. It took a little work to find our way through the maze of campers to pickup the trail on the other side of the campground.

The trail followed cairns to a log bridge crossing the White River that was looking a little dicey. Later in the day as the river level rises, this might not have been a safe option. The optional detour took you a mile down the road, but thankfully we were able to avoid that.

Sunrise at Sunrise Camp View of Rainier as we descend to White River Cairn at White River on the Wonderland Trail Crossing White River on the Wonderland Trail

Once across the White River, the trail parallels the river down to the Frying Pan Creek Trailhead, roughly 6.25 miles in. We stopped for a break, and then started the climb.

Headed to Summerland on the Wonderland Trail

The trail parallels Frying Pan Creek for about four miles, then crosses and begins a series of switchbacks up to Summerland.

Crossing Frying Pan Creek

Crossing Frying Pan Creek

Approaching Summerland on the Wonderland Trail

Summerland is indeed stunning, and we were fortunate to have beautiful weather to enjoy it. Views, wildflowers, snowfields, babbling creeks–Summerland delivers on all counts.

Creek at Summerland

Our water source at Summerland

We were also lucky to be assigned the group site here (it was designated on our permit). The group site is a three-sided stone shelter, which meant we didn’t need to pitch tents.

It also provided a great venue for an impromptu birthday bash for a fellow Wonderland Trail hiker from Las Vegas, Brian. A few other hikers that we had met along the way including Brad and his daughter and some nice ladies from Canada joined in and we shared a beer, some awesome homemade jerky and wished a fellow hiker happy birthday.

Summerland Group Camp on the Wonderland Trail Birthday Brian Brian's Birthday Bash at Summerland

Sunrise to Summerland Trail Map and Elevation Profile

Download file: day-10-sunrise-to-summerland-81419-74857am(cleaned).gpx

Originally hiked on August 14, 2019 with Derek and Jason.

Back to Day 9  |  Continue to Day 11, Summerland to Indian Bar

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-10-sunrise-to-summerland/feed/ 0
Wonderland Trail Day 9: Granite Creek to Sunrise https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-9-granite-creek-to-sunrise/ https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-9-granite-creek-to-sunrise/#respond Wed, 14 Aug 2019 03:04:43 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=427793 Day 9 on the Wonderland Trail was our final low mileage day. We would be hiking over scenic Skyscraper Pass, through wildflower-laden Berkeley Park and down to our destination: Sunrise Camp.  
Day 9: Sunrise
Distance: 4.4 miles
Time: 2.5 hours
Difficulty: Moderate
Elevation +/-: 969’/839′
Sunrise Camp is about a mile from the Sunrise Information Center, a grill that serves cheeseburgers, a small market, and our final resupply point.

We began with an 800′ climb from Granite Creek, above the timberline to Skyscraper Pass.

Leaving Granite Creek Camp

Jason climbing up trail from Granite Creek

It was a little over one mile, and at the pass we began to run notice more hikers on the trail. Skyscraper Pass and nearby Skyscraper Mountain are popular destinations for day hikers heading out from Sunrise. The views were spectacular.

Mount Rainier from Berkeley Park

Looking back at Mount Rainier from Skyscraper Pass

Looking north from Skyscraper Pass

Looking north from Skyscraper Pass.

From the pass, we headed down to Berkeley Park, then up over the saddle to our final descent to Sunrise.

Looking back at Mount Rainier Trail towards Sunrise Headed to Sunrise Camp

We reached Sunrise early and once again, pretty much had our pick of the campsites. The sites here are closer together and feel less private, partly because there are so many day hikers wandering by.

Once we setup camp, we hiked an extra mile to the Sunrise Visitor Center to pickup our resupply packages and enjoy a meal that wasn’t rehydrated in a bag. We were also able to re-charge our devices at the visitor center and revel in our stinky backpacker mystique for the tourists. Next to the grill is a market that sells mostly souvenirs, but also some snacks, fuel canisters, sunscreen, and some food. At this point, we were growing a little weary of the lack of variety in our food bags, so it was really nice to supplement with a few different snacks.

Hiking from Sunrise Camp to the resupply Sunrise Visitor Center Rainier Beer

We ate lunch, picked up our resupply package, chatted with some other folks who just complete the Wonderland Trail, and then had dinner, too before heading back to camp.

Shadow Lake near Sunrise Camp

Shadow Lake near Sunrise Camp

Tomorrow would be our tenth day on the Wonderland Trail, and a return to more “normal” (i.e. not short) mileage as we hiked to Summerland, considered one of the most beautiful camps on the trail.

Granite Creek to Sunrise Trail Map and Elevation Profile

Note that this map does not show the hike from camp to the Sunrise Visitor Center (about a mile each way).

Download file: day-9-granite-creek-to-sunrise-81319-92024am(cleaned).gpx

Originally hiked on August 13, 2019 with Derek and Jason.

Back to Day 8  |  Continue to Day 10, Sunrise to Summerland

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-9-granite-creek-to-sunrise/feed/ 0
Wonderland Trail Day 8: Mystic to Granite Creek https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-8-mystic-to-granite-creek/ https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-8-mystic-to-granite-creek/#respond Tue, 13 Aug 2019 03:15:37 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=427771 There is a part of me that feels a certain sense of accomplishment when you cover a lot of miles with a lot of vertical gain, and that’s a common element of most days on the trail. This was not one of those days.

Day 8: Granite Creek
Distance: 4.6 miles
Time: 2.5 hours
Difficulty: Moderate
Elevation +/-: 1,502’/999′
This day was a reminder that I was where I longed to be… in the mountains. Why rush? Why not lie on your back in the afternoon, sunning on a rock next to a babbling creek? And that’s exactly what we did.

The hike from Mystic Camp to Granite Creek was short – a mere 4-1/2 miles – and took us all of two leisurely hours to complete.

We started with a descent of 1,000 feet to Winthrop Creek, and the views of Mount Rainier began to open up.

Below the Winthrop Glacier

Jason and Derek preparing to cross Winthrop Creek

The lower section of the Winthrop Glacier looks less like the snow and ice we think of when you imagine a glacier, and more like dirt and rock. Beneath that talus there is ice, moving slowly down the mountain.

Jason near Winthrop Glacier

The dirty, rocky Winthrop Glacier can be seen through the trees.

After crossing Winthrop Creek, the second half of this day’s hike was all uphill and forested. We crossed Granite Creek on a log and the camp was on the right. The camp sites were spread out nicely, and arriving before lunch, we had our pick. We chose a roomy site closest to the creek, setup our camp and proceeded to laze about for the remainder of the day.

Mushrooms on the Wonderland Trail Toilet at Granite Creek CG

We read, took photos, and generally just enjoyed the sounds of the creek and the beautiful weather.

Granite Creek

Photogenic Granite Creek

It was a day to just “be” in the wilderness–a great reminder to slow down and enjoy the peace once in a while.

Mystic to Granite Creek Trail Map and Elevation Profile

Download file: day-8-mystic-to-granite-creek-81219-91148am(cleaned).gpx

Originally hiked on August 12, 2019 with Derek and Jason.

Back to Day 7  |  Continue to Day 9, Granite Creek to Sunrise

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-8-mystic-to-granite-creek/feed/ 0
Wonderland Trail Day 7: Dick Creek to Mystic Lake https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-7-dick-creek-to-mystic-lake/ https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-7-dick-creek-to-mystic-lake/#respond Mon, 12 Aug 2019 03:23:33 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=427703 Day Seven on the Wonderland Trail began wet. It rained hard during the night, giving us the true Pacific Northwest experience. Our tents were not going to dry out before we started hiking, so they went on the outside of the pack. Thankfully the rain had stopped, but we were shrouded in a mystical fog – apros pos considering our destination: Mystic Lake. 
Day 7: Mystic Lake
Distance: 4.0 miles
Time: 2 hours
Difficulty: Moderate
Elevation +/-: 1,521’/557′
This was so short, it almost felt like a zero day, and we weren’t complaining. Leaving Dick Creek, the trail climbs steeply at first, then gradually until the 2.5 mile mark, and we had a gentle downhill to Mystic Lake.

There were no views during the hike as far as we could see, thanks to the fog. On a clear day, we should’ve had some glimpses of Carbon Glacier and Mount Rainier.

Slippery log bridge on the Wonderland Trail Mystical Wonderland Trail

The campground is about another 1/4 mile beyond the lake, so we setup camp and hung our tents and wet clothes to dry out in the sun which was peeking out through the clouds. While our gear dried out, we hiked back up to Mystic Lake for a lazy lunch and a dip in the water.

Panorama of Mystic Lake

Mineral Mountain on the far side of the lake and Mount Rainier beyond that.

The sun was warm. The water? Not so much. The cold water soothed and rejuvenated our muscles. Surprisingly, we had very few mosquitos.

Jeff, Jason and Derek in Mystic Lake

After swimming around in the lake, we headed up the hill to the Mystic Lake Patrol Cabin, which is worth the side trip for the views of Mount Rainier.

Mystic Lake Patrol Cabin History of Mystic Lake Camp Mount Rainier from the Mystic Lake Patrol Cabin

Back at camp, we napped, read and generally lazed about. Almost a zero day.

Mystic Camp has seven campsites and one big group site with it’s own pit toilet. Water is available from a nearby creek.

Dick Creek to Mystic Lake Trail Map and Elevation Profile

Download file: day-7-dick-creek-to-mystic-81119-85345am(cleaned).gpx

Originally hiked on August 11, 2019 with Derek and Jason.

Back to Day 6  |  Continue to Day 8, Mystic to Granite Creek

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-7-dick-creek-to-mystic-lake/feed/ 0
Wonderland Trail Day 6: Eagle’s Roost to Dick Creek https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-6-eagles-roost-to-dick-creek/ https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-6-eagles-roost-to-dick-creek/#respond Sun, 11 Aug 2019 03:54:12 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=427692 On Day 6 of our Wonderland Trail trek, we continued our hike on the more scenic alternate route through Spray Park.

Day 6: Dick Creek
Distance: 9.2 miles
Time: 6.75 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation +/-: 2,461’/3,221′
Spray Park is 0.7 miles shorter than the actual Wonderland Trail over Ipsut Pass, but it climbs higher on the slopes of Mount Rainier and is generally considered more scenic, rising above the timberline for big mountain views.

At 9.2 miles, this was going to be one of our longer days. It had rained overnight, and was still misty and damp when we started out in the morning. Leaving Eagle’s Roost, the trail begins with a climb that up switchbacks to the creek that feeds Spray Falls. The wildflowers and meadows grew more spectacular as we hiked through Spray Park, and the clouds parted a few times to give us a peek at the peak of Mount Rainier.

Spray Park alternate on the Wonderland Trail Spray Park alternate on the Wonderland Trail Mount Rainier peeking through the clouds at Spray Park

As we climbed above the timberline, the terrain became rocky. A few weeks earlier and we would’ve been trudging over snow fields. Now there were just a few short sections to cross. The trail here is marked with stone cairns and occasionally painted markers on rocks, including the 6,400 foot high point of the Spray Park Trail.

High Point of the Spray Park Alternate Skirting a snowfield in August

From that high point, we had a long, five-mile downhill stretch dropping over 3,000 feet to the Carbon River and our second suspension bridge on the Wonderland Trail. Once again, the Pacific Northwest weather obscured the views of the Carbon Glacier upstream, but the bridge itself is an impressive span.

Carbon River Suspension Bridge Derek on Carbon River Suspension Bridge

 

We crossed one at a time, as instructed by the signs at either end of the bridge. We were back on the “official” Wonderland Trail and had a final climb to our camp at Dick Creek: one mile and 1,000 vertical feet.

By the time we arrived at Dick Creek, the fog had turned to a driving mist soaking our waterproof layers. There are only two campsites at Dick Creek, and the larger one was already occupied. We shoe-horned our three tents into the remaining site on the edge of the ledge that supposedly overlooked the Carbon Glacier. I say supposedly because the fog was so thick and soupy, we couldn’t see it.

Dick Creek Camp on the Wonderland Trail

Crowded camp on the ledge

Heavy mist turned to rain. Derek was having trouble staking his ultralight tent in the saturated ground. Cold and wet, it was a perfect time for Derek to pull out his trail treat: three beers. We toasted to our health, and after dinner enjoyed another new trail tradition, hot apple cider that Jason had brought. Our mood had reflected the weather, and the hot, sweet cider was a perfect pick-up.

Hunkered down in our tents for the night, the rain came, at times driving hard enough to wake me up. We dreamt of drier, sunnier days ahead.

Eagle’s Roost to Dick Creek Trail Map and Elevation Profile

Download file: day-6-eagles-roost-to-dick-creek-81019-82132am(cleaned).gpx

Originally hiked on August 10, 2019 with Derek and Jason.

Back to Day 5  |  Continue to Day 7, Dick Creek to Mystic Lake

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-6-eagles-roost-to-dick-creek/feed/ 0
Wonderland Trail Day 5: South Mowich River to Eagle’s Roost https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-5-south-mowich-river-to-eagles-roost/ https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-5-south-mowich-river-to-eagles-roost/#respond Sat, 10 Aug 2019 03:14:44 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=427684 Our fifth day on the Wonderland Trail meant our first resupply at Mowich Lake!
Day 5: Eagle's Roost
Distance: 8.5 miles
Time: 5.5 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation +/-: 2,896’/604′
With nearly 3,000 feet of climbing, this was Leg Day. Well, pretty much every day on the Wonderland Trail is leg day, but this was mostly up, up and more up. That’s what you do on a thru-hike. Sleep, eat, hike and repeat.

So we broke camp, and started climbing.

Derek and Jason headed to Mowich Lake

There were no views on the trail to Mowich Lake, just forest. But there was a lovely cascade in Carter Creek, fed from Mowich Lake further uphill.

Waterfall below Mowich Lake

Lovely cascade on Carter Creek

Not far past the creek crossing we reached a junction with the Spray Park Trail, making a mental note of this for later. Our camp for the night was Eagle’s Roost along the Spray Park Trail, but first we had to pick-up our resupply packages at Mowich Lake Ranger Station.

When you emerge from the forest, you encounter the road and a series of ugly campsites at Mowich Lake. It’s not a place I would choose to stay, but there were plenty of people who had. The resupply boxes are in front of the ranger station, which is roughly 0.1 miles along the southeast shore of the lake.

Mowich Lake Panorama

We got there, found our buckets and had a little lunchtime feast. The sky cleared enough to give us a bit of blue and warm sunlight.

Resupply at Mowich Lake Ranger Station

There are trash receptacles at the Mowich Lake camp area, so we were able to empty our trash and donate our empty 5-gallon buckets.

Ready to hit the trail again, we headed back down to the junction with the Spray Park Trail, and followed it roughly 2.5 miles to Eagle’s Roost camp. This camp is set on a steep, forested hillside with peek-a-boo views of the mountains (when it’s clear).  We scoped out a decent site, setup our tents and headed out for a short side trip to Spray Falls.

Spray Falls

Spray Falls is detour-worthy

The falls are fed from the creek running through Spray Park, which we would be hiking through tomorrow. It’s a big, beautiful waterfall, even on a cloudy afternoon, and definitely worth the short hike.

Back at camp, the clouds rolled in and brought that cold, damp air with them. We had occasional rain, but were buttoned up pretty neatly and were able to enjoy dinner without getting too wet.

Damp evening at Eagles Roost Camp

Our camp at Eagle’s Roost. Photo: Derek Loranger

After dinner, the weather even gave us a glimpse of the view beyond the trees.

Early Evening at Eagles Roost

Day five was a satisfying day. We did a lot of climbing, successfully retrieved our resupply packages, had a great campsite and enjoyed a side-trip to Spray Falls. Tomorrow would be a longer day, with the high point on the Spray Park Trail and the Carbon River suspension bridge to look forward to.

South Mowich River to Eagle’s Roost Trail Map and Elevation Profile

Download file: day-5-south-mowich-to-eagles-roost-8919-80300am(cleaned).gpx

Originally hiked on August 9, 2019 with Derek and Jason.

Back to Day 4  |  Continue to Day 6, Eagle’s Roost to Dick Creek

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-5-south-mowich-river-to-eagles-roost/feed/ 0
Wonderland Trail Day 4: Golden Lakes to South Mowich River https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-4-golden-lakes-to-south-mowich-river/ https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-4-golden-lakes-to-south-mowich-river/#respond Fri, 09 Aug 2019 03:10:29 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=427669 Day 4 on the Wonderland Trail was misty and damp. We woke up with our tents wet from the moisture in the air. The hot sun from yesterday’s hike was nowhere to be found.
Day 4: South Mowich River
Distance: 7.2 miles
Time: 3.5 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation +/-: 433’/2,705′
The foggy morning did add an eery beauty to Golden Lakes as we filtered water for the day’s seven mile trek. This day was going to be the opposite of yesterday in more than just weather. Today’s hike would involve more descent than climb.

We broke camp and headed off into the fog.

Misty Morning at Golden Lakes Damp morning at Golden Lake

The dampness of the day was reflected in the trail. The undergrowth is lush and green, and everything in a state of perpetual decay and regrowth. Except for the bridges. They were just decaying.

Bridges on the Wonderland Trail are varying states of decay

The trail itself on the west side of Mount Rainier is a pleasure to hike on. Lined with ferns, mushrooms and other plants, the tread is soft and padded by a cushion of pine needles.

Trail to South Mowich River on the Wonderland Trail

The first two miles were gentile forest trail with little elevation gain or loss. And then began a steady downhill. We would drop 2,700 feet in the next 4.5 miles.

Fallen tree on the Wonderland Trail Jason on the Wonderland Trail

At the bottom of the canyon, we could hear South Mowich River before we could see it. The water is fast and the current strong enough to move bowling ball-sized stones downstream. We heard them rumble and crack as they tumbled downstream.

When you reach the river, the trail itself is ever changing, as the water winds its way through the scrabble and finds a new route. Stone cairns served a real purpose here, helping us find the “most likely” route across. We reached a point where there was no good log crossing, and we would have to wade through a couple sections.

We unbuckled our packs in case we fell in, and steadied our steps with our trekking poles, probing for hidden rocks that could turn an ankle or worse. We all made it across without incident, although I think it took most of the remainder of the trip for Derek’s camp shoes to dry out.

Cairn at South Mowich River Jeff Fjords South Mowich River on the Wonderland Trail Jeff crossing South Mowich River on the Wonderland Trail

Not far beyond the river crossing was the sign for South Mowich Camp. We were first there, and claimed the shelter, giving us a chance to get out of the damp air and maybe even dry out some of our gear.

Trail to South Mowich River Camp Attempting to dry out at South Mowich River Camp

The camp is quite near the river, but you cannot use it for a water source due to the high silt content. If you try to filter it, it will quickly clog your filter. Instead, we had to hike a few hundred yards further north on the Wonderland Trail to a calmer creek that ran clear.

Tomorrow, our first resupply at Mowich Lake. 

Golden Lakes to South Mowich River Trail Map and Elevation Profile

Download file: day-4-golden-lakes-to-south-mowich-8819-90324am(cleaned).gpx

Originally hiked on August 8, 2019 with Derek and Jason.

Back to Day 3  |  Continue to Day 5, South Mowich River to Eagle’s Roost

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-4-golden-lakes-to-south-mowich-river/feed/ 0
Wonderland Trail Day 3: North Puyallup River to Golden Lakes https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-3-north-puyallup-river-to-golden-lakes/ https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-3-north-puyallup-river-to-golden-lakes/#respond Thu, 08 Aug 2019 03:31:34 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=427658 After a long, tough second day on the Wonderland Trail, this day would feel like a walk in the park. A six mile, uphill walk in the park, but with only one steady climb. We’d be hiking half the distance and climbing half the vertical gain of the previous day.
Day 3: Golden Lakes
Distance: 6.1 miles
Time: 3.75 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation +/-: 1,836’/624′
The trail begins heading west on the north side of North Puyallup River, gradually climbing higher up the slope. This well-forested path was appreciated, especially since it was hot and humid.

There were no views on the first few miles, just beautiful forest and mushrooms.

Breaking camp at North Puyallup River Starting the climb to Golden Lakes

The Trail Provides

The well-known saying suggests that when you are feeling hot, tired, or down, there’s something around the corner to lift your spirits. On the Wonderland Trail, that something was often the stunning views. Today it was the discovery of wild blueberries. We found blueberries along the trail, bursting with juicy, tart flavor. We’d spy them as we hiked along the trail, pick a few and pop them into our mouths. They gave us a little boost each time we found them.

Wild blueberries on the Wonderland Trail Jason harvesting blueberries on the Wonderland Trail

As we passed the four mile mark on GaiaGPS, the forest began thinning, opening up views of Mount Rainier.

 

Derek on the climb to Golden Lakes

Derek on the ascent to Golden Lakes

The sun was strong, and it was muggy. The sort of heat that saps your energy, and encourages you to take any rest breaks in the shade.

The final 1.5 miles was fairly flat, with a small descent to Golden Lakes. The first sign of the lakes was a rickety wood plan walkway to the old patrol cabin perched on the best spot overlooking the biggest and prettiest of the Golden Lakes. We dropped our packs here and explored the campsites.

Golden Lakes Patrol Cabin Trail register at Golden Lakes Patrol Cabin

We ended up scoring a campsite on the far side of the lake, on a hill with a view looking down the valley to the west. We setup camp, and wandered down to the lake. Jason was first to go in.

Golden Lakes

We swam out to the little island in the middle of Golden Lake.

We learned an important rule to remember on the Wonderland Trail. Whenever you get a chance to take a dip in a lake, take it.

The shallow water was warm and the lake bottom soft mud. As we swam out to the deep section, we would come across a section that was freezing cold. We made our way out to the tiny island in the middle of the lake, and found a balance between too cold and almost warm water.

Sunset from our Golden Lakes campsite

Sunset from our Golden Lakes campsite. Photo: Jason Fitzpatrick

A pretty perfect day on the trail.

North Puyallup River to Golden Lakes Map and Elevation Profile

Download file: day-3-north-puyallup-to-golden-lakes-8719-100948am(cleaned).gpx

Originally hiked on August 7, 2019 with Derek and Jason.

Back to Day 2  |  Continue to Day 4, Golden Lakes to South Mowich River

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-3-north-puyallup-river-to-golden-lakes/feed/ 0
Wonderland Trail Day 2: Devil’s Dream to North Puyallup River https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-2-devils-dream-to-north-puyallup-river/ https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-2-devils-dream-to-north-puyallup-river/#respond Wed, 07 Aug 2019 03:24:59 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=427649 Day Two on the Wonderland Trail was going to be a long one. Ideally, we would’ve stayed at Klaptache Park Camp, renown for views of both Mount Rainier to the east and sunsets to the west. It’s popularity also meant it was fully booked when we got our permit, so we would have to hike about three miles further and descend another 2,100 feet to North Puyallup River.

Day 2: North Puyallup River
Distance: 16.7 miles
Time: 12 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation +/-: 3,927’/5,116′
It may have been long, but at least the weather was hot and humid.

As we were getting ready to break camp in the morning, a doe and two fawns wandered right through our camp, setting a great vibe for a tough day.

Deer at Devils Dream Camp Backpacking the Wonderland Trail - Day 2

At about 1.5 miles you reach an area known as Indian Henry’s Hunting Ground, an area rich in history, fields of wildflowers and jaw-dropping views.

Indian Henry's Hunting Ground on the Wonderland Trail

The patrol cabin at Indian Henry’s Hunting Ground was built in 1915.

From here, we began a 1,200 foot descent to the Tahoma Creek Suspension Bridge, one of two suspension bridges on the Wonderland Trail, spanning 150 feet and towering 200 feet above the churning grey water of Tahoma Creek.

One person at a time on the Tahoma Creek Suspension Bridge Looking north at the Tahoma Creek Suspension Bridge
Watching Jason cross the Tahoma Creek Suspension Bridge

Jason crossing the Tahoma Creek Suspension Bridge

It’s one person at a time across this span, which can get a little bouncy. The adrenaline rush from crossing the bridge gave us a boost for our next objective: Emerald Ridge. The ascent lasts about three miles, climbing 1,500 feet  to the ridgeline.

Climbing Emerald Ridge

Climbing to Emerald Ridge – Photo: Derek Loranger

When we reached the ridge, we stopped for a break to take in the views of Mount Rainier.

Rainier from Emerald Ridge

Rainier from Emerald Ridge. The Tahoma Glacier on the left is covered with rock and dirt.

 

Emerald Ridge

Is there any question why this was named Emerald Ridge?

From the ridge, the trail drops steeply down to South Puyallup River. Trekking poles came in handy, as sections of the trail had loose gravel looking for an opportunity to send you sliding. There’s a camp near the river, and though we had logged a lot of miles, we still had yet another ridge to climb.

At this point, in the day, it was heating up. Sitting in the shade would feel comfortable, but hiking exposed to the sun sapped our energy.

Climbing to St Andrews Park

Views en route to St Andrews Park

The trail to St Andrews Park climbed 1,800 feet, and by the time we reached St Andrews Lake, we were grateful for a break.

St Andrews Lake on the Wonderland Trail

St Andrews Lake

We were tired, and still had miles to cover. Thankfully, we were done with the climbing. We wandered down the trail to scenic Klapatche Park and wished we had our camp there.

Klapatche Park

Klapatche Park

From Klapatche Park we descended nearly 2,000 feet over two miles to North Puyallup River, our camp for the night.  The trail down to to North Puyallup was a grind. The group site is on the south side of the river, where the remains of a road are being reclaimed by the forest. On the north side are four campsites. They are not particularly beautiful, but we didn’t care. We setup camp, ate and crashed for the night.

That is, except for Jason. He got up in the wee hours of the morning and setup his tripod at the bridge over North Puyallup River to capture this nighttime photo of the waterfall.

North Puyallup Falls at 4am

North Puyallup Falls at night. Photo: Jason Fitzpatrick

Thankfully, our next day was going to be easier as we headed to Golden Lakes.

Devil’s Dream to North Puyallup River Map and Elevation Profile

Download file: day-2-devils-dream-to-north-puyallup-8619-80150am(cleaned).gpx

Originally hiked on August 6, 2019 with Derek and Jason.

Back to Day 1  |  Continue to Day 3, North Puyallup River to Golden Lakes

 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-2-devils-dream-to-north-puyallup-river/feed/ 0
Wonderland Trail Day 1: Longmire to Devil’s Dream https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-1-longmire-to-devils-dream/ https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-1-longmire-to-devils-dream/#respond Tue, 06 Aug 2019 03:21:02 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=427642 Your Wonderland Trail permit states where you sleep at night, but not which trailhead you start from. Rather than starting at Longmire, we opted to head up the road to the Cougar Rock Picnic Area where there was plenty of parking. It also meant that our first mile would actually be forested and downhill to Longmire, providing a nice warm-up for the day. Had we been able to start a little earlier, we might’ve even opted to park at Reflection Lake and start from there, to make that last day hike a little shorter.

Day 1: Devil's Dream
Distance: 8.7 miles
Time: 4.75 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation +/-: 2,515’/782′
The first 1.4 miles were downhill to Longmire, and the trail had plenty of day hikers. This section of the trail was forested, with peek-a-boo views of the Nisqually River on our left. Having spent enough time in Longmire already, we carefully crossed Longmire-Paradise Road and started our first uphill grind on the eastern flank of The Ramparts. The trail climbs nearly 1,000 feet in a mile, then more gradually before dipping down to cross Kautz Creek.

Looking up at Mount Rainier as we cross Kautz Creek

We are hiking around that?!

The first of about 1,000 bridges on the Wonderland Trail

Jason crosses bridge number 1 of 1000

At about mile five we passed the first camp on the trail, Pyramid Creek Camp, and after crossing the creek, began climbing in earnest again. The trail is forested and the tread perfectly padded with pine needles as you climb another 1,100 vertical feet to our destination: Devil’s Dream Camp.

Perfectly padded tread on the Wonderland Trail

Perfectly padded tread

There are seven individual camp sites and one group site, as well as an outhouse with four walls and a door (a luxury as we learned). Devil’s Dream has a reputation for having a lot of mosquitos, but luckily the weren’t bad when we were there.

Unfortunately, the closest water source is another 1/2 mile up the trail, so after setting up camp, Derek and I took our Sea-to-Summit buckets (highly recommended) up to Squaw Lake, where we discovered an intolerable number of mosquitos. We hoofed it back to camp for dinner, adding another mile to our total for the day.

Longmire to Devil’s Dream Map and Elevation Profile

Download file: day-1-cougar-rock-to-devils-dream-8519-23825pm(cleaned).gpx

Originally hiked on August 5, 2019 with Jason and Derek.

Continue to Day 2: Devil’s Dream to North Puyallup River

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/wonderland-trail-day-1-longmire-to-devils-dream/feed/ 0
Rae Lakes Loop via Kearsarge Pass https://socalhiker.net/rae-lakes-loop-via-kearsarge-pass/ https://socalhiker.net/rae-lakes-loop-via-kearsarge-pass/#comments Wed, 31 Oct 2018 22:12:00 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=406045 Backpacking the Rae Lakes Loop via Kearsarge Pass

The Rae Lakes Loop is one of the legendary backpacking routes of the Sierra Nevada.  It essentially makes a big circle around the center of Kings Canyon National Park, and features four amazing canyons and one of the epic sections of the John Muir Trail (JMT).  The beauty of this trail is considered by many to be one of the most scenic in all the Sierra.  It includes such famous sites as Mist Falls, the Woods Creek Suspension Bridge, the Sphinx, Fin Dome, Glen Pass and the Painted Lady overlooking the Rae Lakes. It is also a fantastic first-time backpacker route due to its manageable length. And, because the entire trail is horse/mule accessible, the ascents are all very reasonable. In short, it is a must do backpacking trip!

Trail Details
Distance: 54.2 miles
Time: 6 days
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 12,700 ft
Dogs: No
When to go: Mid-July to September
The traditional Rae Lakes Loop measures 42 miles from Roads End in Kings Canyon National Park.  Some hike it clockwise starting towards the north, while others hike it counter-clockwise starting towards the east.   It is typically completed in four days.  For this extended, six-day version of the Rae Lakes Loop, we chose to start outside the park at the Onion Valley trailhead in the Eastern Sierra, access the loop via Kearsarge Pass, and hike in a clockwise direction.

Why enter via Kearsarge Pass?
Several reasons:

  • We had one week available to us, so we wanted to extend the mileage and days
  • We like to have an acclimation / gear shakedown day/night prior to starting the trip, and the Onion Valley Campground at 9,500 feet of elevation gives us a great high-altitude sleep before we start
  • The Eastern Sierra is a faster and easier drive from Los Angeles than driving up into Kings Canyon National Park
  • The permitting system for Inyo National Forest is through Recreation.gov, and is much easier than the dedicated Sequoia/Kings Canyon (SEKI) permitting system

Rae Lakes Loop via Kearsarge Pass Map

Planning the Trip

We booked both our wilderness permit and our Onion Valley Campground permit on the first day possible via Recreation.gov.  The map we used to plan our route was the Tom Harrison Kearsarge Pass Rae Lakes Loop Map.  This one map shows the entire route.  We chose the following schedule for our trip:

  • Travel Day: Drive to Lone Pine, CA and pick up the backcountry permit.  Eat lunch in Lone Pine.  Drive to Onion Valley and pitch camp for the night / acclimation sleep
  • Day One – 8.5 miles: Hike Onion Valley West/up to Kearsarge Pass, then down to the JMT junction and then down to Charlotte Lake.
  • Day Two – 8.5 miles: Hike Charlotte Lake back up to JMT, then South to Vidette Meadow, turn off the JMT and on to the Bubbs Creek Trail hiking West to Junction Meadow and the Charlotte Creek junction.
  • Day Three – 11.1 miles: Hike Charlotte Creek West and down to the Kings River Bridge and then north/up the Kings River trail to Middle Paradise Valley.
  • Day Four – 7.7 miles: Hike Middle Paradise Valley to Woods Creek Bridge and then west/up Woods Creek to the Woods Creek suspension bridge and the JMT junction.
  • Day Five – 6.5 miles: Hike south on the JMT to Rae Lakes. Optional 4-mile day hike from Rae Lakes to the 60 Lakes Basin Saddle and back.
  • Day Six – 12 miles: Hike Rae Lakes Southwest up over Glen Pass then over Kearsarge Pass and then west/down back to Onion Valley.

Total Hiking: 54.3 Miles

Day One – Onion Valley Trailhead to Kearsarge Pass and Charlotte Lake

Day One Stats
Distance: 8.5 miles
Time: 6.25 hours
Elevation gain: 2,566 ft

The trail starts immediately upward on long switchbacks. Once over the first ridge, the trail ascends to a series of five lakes.  First is Little Pothole Lake, followed by Gilbert Lake – which is a very popular camping spot and fishing spot.  Then comes Flower Lake, the beautiful Heart Lake (yes, it’s shaped like a Heart) and finally Big Pothole Lake just before cresting Kearsarge Pass at 11,835 feet and the entrance to Kings Canyon National Park.

Kearsarge Pass is a very popular day-hike, as well as one of the most popular JMT re-supply outlets, so expect to have lots of company on this trail.

Once over the pass, some backpackers will head down a lower trail to the Kearsarge Lakes to camp at the base of the gorgeous peaks known as the Kearsarge Pinnacles, while others (including us) will take the standard upper trail and head on to the John Muir Trail.  The upper trail follows a high line that features great views of the Sierra and Bullfrog Lake as you head west towards the JMT.  We encountered a ranger on the trail towards the JMT, checking permits and warning everyone of multiple bear encounters.

Day 1 - Start of the Kearsarge Pass Trail Day 1 - Heart Lake Day 1 - Kearsarge Pass Day 1 - Heading into Kings Canyon NP with Bullfrog Lake in the distance

Once you reach the JMT junction, you can either go north or south on the JMT or continue west for 1.3 miles down to Charlotte Lake.  At 10,370 feet, Charlotte Lake is a gorgeous place to camp, with nice campsites, a bear box, and easy access to the lake for swimming, fishing and water filtration.  And because it’s 2.6 miles round trip off the JMT, it is not very crowded. There is a ranger station located here, manned full-time during the summer season.

Day Two – Charlotte Lake to Vidette Meadow, Junction Meadow and the Bubbs Creek Trail to Charlotte Creek

Day Two Stats
Distance: 8.5 miles
Time: 5 hours
Elevation gain: 402 ft
We woke up to a beautiful cool morning at Charlotte Lake, ate breakfast, drank coffee and then headed back up out from Charlotte Lake to the JMT junction.  Then, we turned south on the JMT and headed towards Vidette Meadow.  This would be all downhill hiking. In just over a mile, you crest the ridge that opens up onto the massive canyon of Vidette Creek. The canyon is flanked by two huge ridges called the East Spur and West Spur.  The East Spur features East Vidette Peak at 12,350 feet and the West Spur features West Vidette Peak at a similar altitude.  The view from the top as you start the switchbacks down the JMT towards Vidette Meadow is absolutely breathtaking!

After a mile of steep switchbacks you reach the junction of the JMT and the Bubbs Creek Trail.  We wave goodbye to the JMT (for a few days anyway) and head west on the Bubbs Creek Trail. Bubbs Creek is a good size river that flows all year round, with great water features and falls as you head down the canyon.  After you pass the Junction Meadow campground, the canyon opens up a bit and we found an amazing spot right off the trail to have lunch on granite slabs right at the top of a waterfall.  We ate, drank, soaked our feet and enjoyed the view.

Back on the trail, the canyon heads almost straight down to the west along the north side of the creek.  Here is where we had our first of two bear sightings.  This one was a smallish but beautiful cinnamon colored bear.  We didn’t get too close, Kevin got some photos while Barb and I made noise and asked it to leave the trail.  It moved on and so did we.

Day 2 - Leaving Charlotte Lake Day 2 - The Charlotte Lake JMT junction Day 2 - Vidette Creek Canyon Day 2 - Vidette Creek Canyon Day 2 - Vidette Meadow Day 2 - Charlotte Dome Day 2 - Charlotte Creek campground

Eventually we arrived at a large camping area right at the junction of Bubbs Creek and Charlotte Creek, with the beautiful 10,672 foot Charlotte Dome overlooking the camping area.  We chose a great campsite with logs and a fire pit very close to the Bubbs Creek water source and pitched camp. Kevin took a swim in Bubbs Creek and Barb and I filtered water and gathered firewood.  It started to rain about 4 p.m. and we put up the rainflies on the tents. Thunder passed over us but no lightning strikes.  Eventually it cleared up to a beautiful night.

Day Three – Bubbs Creek / Charlotte Creek Campground to Sphinx Junction, Kings River Bridge, Mist Falls and Middle Paradise Valley

Day Three Stats
Distance: 11.1 miles
Time: 6.25 hours
Elevation gain: 2677 ft

We started the morning continuing our hike west and down Bubbs Creek. We started at 7,200 feet at the campground, and were headed all the way down to 5,120 feet at the Kings River Bridge, before climbing up the Kings River Canyon towards Middle Paradise Valley at 6,680 feet.

The hike down Bubbs Creek would take us through an active fire zone – where a 200-acre fire had just been put out four days before we arrived!  It was on both sides of the trail and we even found several logs that were still smoldering.  But god bless the firefighters, as they got this one out before it was able to spread!

Then we arrived at Sphinx Junction – a trail that heads south towards Avalanche Pass.  As you look up and to the South/left, you see The Sphinx – an incredible rock formation that looks similar to the Sphinx from Egypt!  Needless to say, we took a lot of photos of The Sphinx. No sooner do you finish staring at The Sphinx than the trail opens up on a spectacular view looking down on the canyon that heads west towards Roads End.  And, as you look off to the north/right, you see the Kings River Canyon that you are about to start hiking up in an hour or two.  It’s another breathtaking view at the top of a set of steep switchbacks.

Once at the bottom, you cross a number of small wooden bridges on the way to a large steel bridge that crosses the Kings River.  It was in this area that the ‘little black gnats’ started flying all around our heads – and so the head nets went on!  They aren’t mosquitos so they don’t really bite, but they can fly in your nose, ears and mouth – and the head nets were a welcome accessory.

Once across the bridge, the trail turns left towards Roads End and right/north towards the Mist Falls and Paradise Valley, up the Kings River canyon. Mist Falls is a very popular day hiking destination from Roads End, and even though this was a Tuesday, there were still a few dozen people sunbathing at the falls.  We took a bunch of photos, a few videos, and met some guys on vacation from Israel.  It is a gorgeous spot.

From Mist Falls, it’s a straight up climb to Paradise Valley.  The trail features first-class granite stairway-style trail building and is very consistent in its ascent.

Day 3 - Crossing Charlotte Creek early morning Day 3 - Bubbs Creek trail fire zone Day 3 - the Sphinx Day 3 - view down to Roads End Day 3 - Kings River Bridge Day 3 - rest spot on the Kings River before Mist Falls Day 3 - looking back towards Roads End as we ascend Kings River towards Mist Falls Day 3 - Mist Falls Day 3 - above Mist Falls - thunder storm coming

Prior to arriving at Lower Paradise Valley, the thunder and lightning hit! We put on our rain jackets and pack rain covers as fast as we could. Barb said it was the loudest thunder she’d ever heard and swore that the lightning went right in front of her face!  Good thing it was over quickly.

Paradise Valley is a gorgeous flat valley featuring big trees and the Kings River.  It is about 3 miles long, and has three campgrounds – lower, middle and upper.  We decided to camp at Middle Paradise Valley and got a great spot near the river with a fire pit and logs that was somewhat sheltered from the rain so it wasn’t too muddy.  Unfortunately, the wood all around was pretty wet, but we eventually got the fire going and had a great camping night.  The next morning we would have to shake out the tents and footprints pretty well to get the water off, but nothing too nasty.

Day Four – Middle Paradise Valley to Woods Creek Junction Bridge, Castle Domes Meadow and the Woods Creek Suspension Bridge / JMT Junction

Trail Details
Distance: 7.7 miles
Time: 4.25 hours
Elevation gain: 2,444 ft

Day 4 would be our shortest day, but it would be all ascending and would include some beautiful Sierra landscapes.  We started off the morning by finishing our walk through Paradise Valley to Upper Paradise Valley campground.  Here, the trail then turns from north to east and crosses the Kings River over a bridge….but there’s just one problem…the entire bridge was washed out in the big snow year of 2017!  We had been a bit concerned about this through the spring and early summer, but by the time we got there the crossing where the bridge once stood wasn’t even knee deep and was quite easy.  The good news is that for next season – 2019 – the Forest Service expects to have a NEW bridge in place!  So I guess our photos of the bridge pedestals on each side of the river with NO bridge in between could be considered ‘collectors items’ in the future!

After the bridge crossing, the trail follows Woods Creek up the canyon and into a gorgeous meadow called Castle Domes Meadow.  On our North/left are the massive 10,000+ foot Castle Domes that overlook the meadow.  Although Woods Creek is quite a bit to the South of the trail for most of this ascent, we found one spot where the trail comes quite close and we were able to hike down a use trail to the rivers edge and have a great lunch / soak on some granite slabs.  As it was quite hot that day, we appreciated the cool break.

Ascending up to almost 8,500 feet, we then reached the junction of the JMT, where the famous Woods Creek suspension bridge takes hikers across Woods Creek.  Again, at this time of year we could have just walked through the creek at knee deep or less, but the suspension bridge is one of the highlights of the JMT!  I walked across first (one person at a time on this bridge) and took a video, then took photos of Barb coming across after me.  It swings and sways and is just another one of those epic landmarks on the JMT.

When Kevin arrived shortly after us, he had seen another bear.  This one was in a tree and Barb and I apparently walked right by it without seeing it.  When it almost dropped a pine cone on Kevin’s head, he looked up and saw it. It came down and Kevin watched is it ate its prize.  What a story that was around the campfire.

Day 4 - morning heading up to Upper Paradise Valley Day 4 - the Missing Bridge Day 4 - heading up Woods Creek Trail Day 4 - Castle Domes Meadow Day 4 - rest break on Woods Creek Woods Creek JMT suspension bridge Day 4 - the Woods Creek JMT suspension bridge Day 4 - Kevin's Bear Sighting Day 4 - the Woods Creek JMT Junction campsite

On the other side of the Woods Creek bridge are all the improved campsites. We chose a good one that had a nice water source, good fire pit and logs for sitting and spreading out gear. Again, dry wood was a challenge but we finally got a campfire going strong.  By the time dinner rolled around, this junction had no less than 20 tents pitched in it, maybe even 30!  It is definitely a busy campground for JMTers going SOBO and NOBO.  It became a tent city!  The rain never came and the clouds parted to a beautiful sunset and a gorgeous (and a bit chilly) night.

Day Five – Woods Creek Suspension Bridge / JMT Junction to Dollar Lake, Arrowhead Lake and Rae Lakes (with a day hike to the 60 Lakes Basin Saddle)

Day Five Stats
Distance: 6.5 miles
Time: 3.75 hours
Elevation gain: 2,134 ft

Day 5 began with a beautiful clear and cool morning.  We were excited, because today was the day we would get to see the Rae Lakes…and judge for ourselves if it is really one of the most beautiful places on the JMT.

The hike starts up and south as you ascend up the canyon of the South Fork of Woods Creek.  As you climb up from 8,500 feet to over 10,000 feet, you get an incredible view backwards from where we came looking down the canyon.  Soon we arrived at Dollar Lake – a gorgeous round lake teaming with Golden Trout!  We stopped and had a snack by the lake and watched the fish swim around right in front of us.  The trail then wraps around the West side of the lake and heads South again towards Arrowhead Lake.  There’s a nice campsite and bear box at Arrowhead Lake, and now you get amazing views of Fin Dome off to the right/West.  At 11,693 feet, Fin Dome towers over Arrowhead Lake and is absolutely stunning. We got a great photo of Fin Dome reflecting in the lake.

Another mile down this beautiful trail brings you to the Rae Lakes – a set of three lakes.  Middle Rae Lake is where the ranger station is located and most of the camp sites, including a bear box.  Overlooking the lakes is The Painted Lady, a 12,119-foot pyramid shaped peak that has amazing colors running through the rock, giving it its name.  We found the BEST campsite overlooking the middle lake towards the South and the Painted Lady and pitched camp.

Once our gear was secured, Barb and I headed out on a separate day hike while Kevin napped and went swimming.  Our destination: around the middle lake to the junction of the 60 Lakes Basin Trail and up the mountain South of Fin Dome to the saddle in hopes of looking down into 60 Lakes Basin.

It’s about a 2-mile ascent from 10,565 up to about 11,200 feet where you reach the saddle and the trail heads back down the other side into the less explored 60 Lakes Basin.  We had a beautiful view of 3 or 4 of the lakes to the South – and we knew right then that someday we’ll have to come back and hike all the way down into the basin and explore the lakes.

There’s another day hike out to the East from Rae Lakes that goes up to Dragon Lake at 11,076 feet.  We’d have to save that one for another trip as well.

Day 5 - morning heading south and up towards Dollar Lake Day 5 - Dollar Lake Day 5 - going around Dollar Lake Day 5 - Arrowhead Lake Day 5 - Fin Dome Day 5 - Rae Lakes

When we got back to camp, the clouds were forming really beautiful shapes that gave way to a great sunset and some fabulous photos of The Painted Lady reflected in the lake.  We took photos and prepared for a cold night.  Since Day 6 would require a 12-mile, two-pass climb (Glen Pass and Kearsarge Pass), we decided to go to bed early and set our alarms for 4 a.m. for a 6 a.m. start.  That way we could get up both passes before the heat of the day.

Day Six – Rae Lakes to Glen Pass, Kearsarge Pass and Onion Valley

Day Six Stats
Distance: 12 miles
Time: 7 hours
Elevation gain: 2,478 ft

The ascent from Rae Lakes up to Glen Pass is a 1,500 vertical foot, 2-mile hike up above the tree line and then on a series of Whitney-like switchbacks to a thin ridge.  It’s really a beautiful hike that took us to the highest point of the week at 11,978 feet. You can scramble up a bit higher and get 12,000 on the GPS if you so choose.  It’s the one part of the Rae Lakes Loop where you really feel like you’re on the moon.

There’s no sign, no trophy, no applause at the top of Glen Pass – just a thin ridge with enough room for a few people and grand views back towards Rae Lakes.  We were the first ones up on the pass that morning but were soon joined by a few other JMT SOBOers.  We all took each other’s photos, and then headed down the other side.  More steep switchbacks on the other side pass by two pothole type lakes, and then Charlotte Lake comes into view – we realize we are headed home.

The trail goes high up over the west side of Charlotte Lake, until you come to a small crossover trail that leads you back to the Kearsarge Pass trail. This is where we stopped to have a snack and say goodbye to the John Muir Trail.  We got to hike about 13 miles of the JMT on our trip, and what a great section it was!

Now it was time to climb again, up from 10,775 feet to the top of Kearsarge Pass at 11,835.  It isn’t a lot of vertical feet, but with the sun out and after already ascending Glen Pass, we had to do some work to get up and over.  The hike along the high trail gave us great views of Bullfrog Lake again, and we took some awesome photos.  We met a number of day hikers at the top of Kearsarge Pass, including another ranger.  Then it was the long 4.7 mile hike down to the car – past Big Pothole Lake, Heart Lake, Flower Lake, Gilbert Lake and Little Pothole Lake all over again.

Day 6 - Ascending to Glen Pass Day 6 - Sunrise over Glen Pass Day 6 - Almost to Glen Pass Day 6 - Glen Pass Day 6 - Descending Glen Pass Day 6 - Back to Charlotte Lake Day 6 - Back to Bullfrog Lake Day 6 - the car is in sight at Onion Valley

When the cars finally came into view, we smiled big as thoughts of beans and chips, burgers and cold beers started coming front and center!  The car was where we left it, safe and sound.  We met a few PCTers at the trailhead, and then soaked our feet in the stream before packing up and driving back to Lone Pine.

Rae Lake Loop Tips and Notes

  • Wilderness permits are required to enter via the Kearsarge Pass trailhead. Between May 1 and November 1, overnight visitors are limited to 60 people per day. Visit recreation.gov for more information.
  • All of the campsites we chose included bear boxes for storage, but we carried bear canisters anyway for flexibility.  Bears were very active during this trip, so best to be safe.
  • We tracked the trip via Gaia GPS for iPhone.
  • Water is very plentiful on this trail, as each of the main canyons it follows (Bubbs, Kings, Woods) have a large active creek.
  • Although we chose not to fish, there are great places along this trail to fish for Golden Trout and other species – so plan accordingly with the proper gear and license if you choose to fish.
  • Fires are permitted when the campsite is under 10,000 feet in elevation, so we were able to have fires on days two, three and four.
  • We had light rain several afternoons and one thunderstorm. Rain gear is advisable.
  • As this was the first week of September, stream crossings were quite low and easy and there was no snow on Glen Pass so we did not carry any sort of traction devices (micro-spikes).

Conclusions

For beginner backpackers, I can’t think of a better trail to start your adventure and hone your skills than the Rae Lakes Loop.  For experienced backpackers, if you haven’t done this loop, take 4-6 days and do it – it’s so beautiful that you don’t want to miss it. If you don’t have three weeks to do the JMT, then section hiking is the way to go, and this is a great section to start off with.

Kings Canyon National Park may not be as popular as Yosemite or Sequoia, but in many ways is just as – if not more – beautiful in its own way.  It just seems so unspoiled and so natural in its features and its views.  And there is no better way to see Kings Canyon than the Rae Lakes Loop – that’s for sure!

Originally hiked on September 2-7, 2018 by Greg Glass, Barbara Hale and Kevin Muschter. All photos by the same. 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/rae-lakes-loop-via-kearsarge-pass/feed/ 23
Muir Taco Adventure #8 https://socalhiker.net/muir-taco-adventure-8/ https://socalhiker.net/muir-taco-adventure-8/#comments Wed, 29 Aug 2018 22:21:05 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=404312 #MuirTaco Recap - Trail Magic at Muir Pass

Eight years ago, I thru-hiked the John Muir Trail (JMT) for my second time in thirty years. Anytime you are out on the trail for weeks at a time, there comes a point when you miss fresh food. It could be something as simple as a cold glass of milk, or fresh fruit, or… a taco. And sometimes you get surprised, like when we were met at Reds Meadow by one of the people I had hiked the JMT with 30 years earlier, and she and her husband treated us to lunch. That kind of “trail magic” is greatly appreciated, and I’ve long thought of ways to pay it forward.

Four years ago, I hatched a plan–hike in fresh meat, tortillas, cheese, avocados and even beer and and surprise thru-hikers on the JMT and Pacific Crest Trail (PCT) with a little backcountry trail magic. It was my way of giving back to the backpacking community. The idea is pretty crazy on paper. It means carrying back-aching loads at least two days into the wilderness–far enough to be meaningful to the thru-hikers and out of reach of the day hikers. Thus was born the #MuirTaco Adventure.

#MuirTaco stickerAt the original Muir Taco trip back in 2014, I was joined by Derek Loranger from 100peaks.com and his brother-in-law and adventure buddy, PD. We started at South Lake, west of Bishop, with the intent of reaching the Muir Hut on the third day and serving lunch to anyone who happened to be lucky enough to hike over Muir Pass while we were there. We didn’t quite make it to the pass (foot issues) but we did serve tacos and beer at the so-called Muir Monster in LeConte Canyon. And there were some very happy hikers.

In 2015, we went back again, this time, trying a shorter-but-more-challenging route over Lamarck Col. That year, we were thwarted by fires, and setup our impromptu taco stand in McClure Meadow instead.

2016 was a big year. I started out planning the now-annual trek, but life got in the way, sending me to Seoul, South Korea for a year. Thankfully my Theodore Solomons Trail buddy Curt Cragg stepped in to take over in my absence. And for the first time, there was not just one, but two Muir Taco trips.

That twice-yearly schedule has stuck, with two trips in each of the past three years. I was fortunate to join the second trip of 2017, and finally… last week, on the second trip of 2018, our eighth Muir Taco trip over the past five years, we actually served tacos at the historic Muir Hut on Muir Pass for the very first time.

Here’s a photo gallery from this five day trek. If you see yourself or someone you know in the photos, leave a comment below.

Deb, Laura, Paul, JoAnne, Curt and Jeff Neenah, Yoko, Eric and Paul Looking back down at Bishop and Saddlerock Lakes Heading down Upper Dusy Basin Thursday Night Camp in Dusy Basin Heading down Dusy Basin Dusy Branch rushing over granite Laura Dookie or a Pink Unicorn Curt Cragg Clear, cold water below Muir Pass Give'm something to taco 'bout Let's stop at the #MuirTaco Hut Beer and #MuirTaco stickers Tacos + Beer = Happy Hikers Paul Okada Saturday Night's Alright Exiting the John Muir Wilderness Resting feet

The Muir Taco Crew

You’ll have to scroll to see them all, but a BIG thanks to the rest of the crew: Curt, JoAnn, Laura, Ryan, Neenah, Eric, Deb, Paul, Yoko. Bonus points if you “look up” to see the amazing stonework of the hut.

[vr url=https://socalhiker.net//wp-content/uploads/2018/08/Muir-Hut-Taco-Crew-2018.jpg view=360]

Muir Taco Adventures #8 By the Numbers

  • 10 crew members
  • hiked 40.6 miles
  • climbing 10,583 feet of total vertical ascent
  • carrying 6 lbs of chicken and carne asada
  • 2 lbs of cheese
  • 18 avocados
  • 48 cans of beer
  • 60 flour tortillas
  • fresh bell peppers and onions
  • stoves, fuel cans, pots, pans and utensils
  • hot sauce
  • 1 jalapeño

We made it to Muir Pass, where we served sixty tacos and two cases of beer to hungry and ecstatic thru-hikers. And of course, we followed Leave No Trace principles, packing out all the trash.

2018 Muir Taco Adventure Infographic

 

It’s been immensely rewarding to see the #MuirTaco trips take on a life of their own, with new faces each year joining the cause. It’s hard work, but the response from the hikers we’ve met makes it all worthwhile. In a crazy sort of way. 😉

Want to see more? Follow Señor Muir’s Taco Hut page on Facebook. Want to support the cause? You can get stickers and shirts!

Did you get a taco from us? We want to hear from you! Leave us a comment below.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/muir-taco-adventure-8/feed/ 5
Climbing Mount Shasta via Avalanche Gulch https://socalhiker.net/climbing-mount-shasta-via-avalanche-gulch/ https://socalhiker.net/climbing-mount-shasta-via-avalanche-gulch/#comments Wed, 04 Jul 2018 22:48:49 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=403881 Overview of the Avalanche Gulch route up Mount Shasta

Last year at the SoCal Six-Pack of Peaks Challenge Finishers Party, we wrote down our adventure goals for 2018. One of my big goals for 2018?  Climbing 14,179′ Mount Shasta for the first time. There are many routes to the top of Mt Shasta, but by far the most popular and one of the least technical is via Avalanche Gulch.

Trail Details
Summit: 14,179′
Distance: 12.3 miles
Time: 2 days
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 7,411 ft
Dogs: No
When to go: May – mid-July
Make no mistake. This is not a hike. Climbing Mount Shasta requires winter mountaineering skills, avalanche awareness and sound judgement to know when it’s time to call it a day and live to climb the mountain another time. There is no “trail” to the top. There are no signposts to guide you along the way. You need to know how to navigate ever-changing conditions on snow and ice, on a mountain where the weather can be highly unpredictable. At a minimum, you should have experience traveling up and downhill with crampons and ice axe, self-arrest and glissade skills, and the ability to work together with your team.

The Team

Originally there were six of us, but as typically happens, as the date got closer, the team shrank. Ultimately, there were four of us: myself, John, Josh and Amie. We all had some winter mountaineering experience, but none of us had summited Mount Shasta before.

The Trailhead

The Avalanche Gulch route begins at the Bunny Flat Trailhead (6,920′). There are pit toilets, wag bags (required beyond Horse Camp), and self-issue summit passes ($25 per person at the time of writing). We met at 7:00 am, put on our mountaineering boots, checked our gear one last time and shouldered our backpacks for the climb.

Our destination for the day was Helen Lake, and our goal was to get there before the sun became too strong.

The Bunny Flats Trailhead leads to Horse Camp, Helen Lake and Avalanche Gulch.

There is a clear view of our route to Helen Lake from the trailhead, as well as the climb from there up to Red Banks. Mount Shasta looks incredibly steep and ominous, but also beautiful and awe-inspiring from this south-facing trailhead.

Jeff, Josh, Amie and John

Left-to-right: Jeff, Josh, Amie and John, one mile in.

The Route

We were following the “summer trail” to Horse Camp (7,800′), so-called because it’s used when the snow has melted. Earlier in the season, climbers can follow a more direct route up the snow toward Helen Lake.

The first 1.8 miles is forested and mostly shady in the morning, but we stopped for a break at the historic Horse Camp just the same. This stone lodge is in remarkable condition and kept by crew of caretakers who rotate every five days. It’s also the last reliable source of water without melting snow. Mike, the caretaker on duty called it “The Fountain of Youth” and claimed he was 140 years old. Whether the water really possessed miraculous age-defying powers or not, it sure tasted good.

Arriving at Horse Camp The fresh spring at Horse Camp Stone lodge at Horse Camp A tidy, welcome lodge Inside the lodge Little library in the lodge Old stuff in the window sill Looking up at Mount Shasta from inside the lodge

After topping off our water and checking out the lodge, we picked up the summit trail. The route is called Olberman’s Causeway, and portions of it are built of huge stones that pave the trail up into the mountain.

The beginning of the Summit Trail from Horse Camp

Following the paved trail known as Olberman's Causeway

The trees grow sparse and soon you are climbing in a lunar landscape of volcanic scree. This section of trail is usually snow-covered earlier in the season, which in some ways would be much more pleasant.

John (aka Moosefish) heading into the exposed climb

Moosefish near 50/50 Camp

The trail climbs steeply from Horse Camp. With the snow melted, we had to pick our way along the rocky switchbacks up the mountain to 50/50 Camp. It pays to turn around once in a while to see how far you’ve come.

Looking back down toward Horse Camp

We took another break and regrouped at 50/50 Camp (9,280′). This is another popular spot for folks to setup base camp, but we wanted to get further up the mountain. The snow fields began here.

The snow fields began at 50/50 Camp

The weather was warm and we were able to hike up in boots and poles — no traction devices required. Along the route there are patches of pink watermelon snow. Be sure not to eat or melt the pink snow; it’s not good for you.

Nearing Helen Lake

We reached Helen Lake (10,400′) around lunchtime on Friday. It’s called a lake, but it’s a large flat area covered with snow and commonly used as a base camp. There were many tent sites already dug out and leveled in the snow, so we picked a trio of sites near each other and setup our tents.

Our plan was to stay in the shade through the intense afternoon sun, resting and melting snow with our stoves — our only source of water until we returned to Horse Camp.

Made it to Helen Lake Josh arrives at Helen Lake Camp at Helen Lake My view from Helen Lake Late day on Helen Lake

As the sun dipped below the mountains, the temperatures quickly dropped. We were in our tents by 9pm for a 2am alarm. Saturday morning at 3am, we strapped on our crampons, helmets and headlamps and began the ascent of Avalanche Gulch.

The ascent was steep and slow going, carefully climbing and definitely feeling the effects of the thin air. As the sun began to rise, the pyramid-shaped shadow of Mount Shasta swept over the landscape, creating an awesome reminder of how prominent this volcano is.

Shadow of Mt Shasta at sunrise from Avalanche Gulch

The route up Avalanche Gulch itself was fairly easy to follow, thanks to the headlamps of the many other climbers already headed up. In general, you head to the right of The Heart and (when there is sufficient snow cover) to the right side of Red Banks, just left of The Thumb.

Pretty much everyone took a break when they reached the top of Red Banks (12,800′), rehydrating and fueling up for the next part of the climb: Misery Hill.

Taking a break at the top of Red Banks

Here we skirted the top of the Kenwakiton Glacier. The bergschrund (the crevasse seen below opening up near the left side of the glacier closest to The Thumb) often opens wider across later in the season, forcing climbers to instead climb up one of the chutes in the Red Bank. We were fortunate to have enough snow coverage to take this easier route.

The Thumb as we traverse the top of Red Banks

The climb up Misery Hill felt less dangerous than Avalanche Gulch, although the wind really picked up. We had gusts up to 40 mph that nearly knocked you off your feet.

When we reached the top of Misery Hill, there is a broad saddle between you and the final climb to the summit. We regrouped, checked with some of the climbers coming back down from the summits, and decided it was safe enough to continue.

The final climb to the summit was not bad, with well-worn tread through the snow and rock to the craggy summit of Mount Shasta. We took the obligatory summit selfies, signed the summit register, and headed back down.

Misery Hill Misery Hill At the summit of Mt Shasta Mount Shasta summit register

The Team on our way back down from the summit of Mount Shasta

The summit in some ways feels like the “goal” of this adventure, but it’s worth reiterating that this is the halfway point. We had over 7,000 feet to descend. Working our way back to Red Bank was pretty easy (much easier to catch your breath than when you’re climbing). A short distance down from Red Banks, we were able to glissade nearly 2,000 vertical feet down the mountain to Helen Lake.

We spent roughly an hour breaking camp, then began the slog down to Bunny Flat. And a slog it was. At this point, our legs and feet were tired, AND we were carrying our fully-loaded backpacks. What seemed like a short easy hike up to 50/50 Camp turned into an seemingly never-ending downhill grind. It was hot, and we were looking forward to being finished.

Back at the trailhead, I changed into fresh clothes. Josh and Amie bid adieu (they had other plans), and John and I had dinner at Yaks on the 5 in Dunsmuir — supposedly one of the top 100 restaurants in the country. My burger was good, but I could probably name 100 restaurants that are better. But at that moment, it didn’t matter. We had summited Mount Shasta, made it back down the mountain, and our bellies were full. Life is good.

Mount Shasta Avalanche Gulch Trail Map

Download file: avalanche-gulch-route-up-mount-shasta.gpx

 

Video Overview of the Climb

One of my climbing partners Josh from California Through My Lens put together a 10-minute video overview of the trip.

Mount Shasta Tips & Resources

Mount Shasta Weather Forecast

[forecast width=”100%” location=”96057″]

Originally climbed on June 23, 2018 with John Soltys, Josh and Amie McNair. 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/climbing-mount-shasta-via-avalanche-gulch/feed/ 4
The Muir Taco Adventure – 2015 Edition https://socalhiker.net/the-muir-taco-adventure-2015-edition/ https://socalhiker.net/the-muir-taco-adventure-2015-edition/#respond Thu, 14 Jun 2018 17:48:49 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=17464 The Second Annual Muir Taco Adventure

We peered up at the ridge above the cirque, straining to find Lamarck Col. Checking our maps and double-checking the GPS, we found what looked like a playground of car-sized boulders. The silhouette of a lone backpacker sitting at the top confirmed our suspicions — our route was going to involve some scrambling. Little did we know that the other side of the ridge would be even tougher. And it was only our second day on the second annual Muir Taco Adventure.

On the first Muir Taco Adventure, we packed in beer, grilled carne asada, tortillas, cheese, avocados and salsa over Bishop Pass. Our goal was to serve thru-hikers on the 211-mile John Muir Trail from Muir Hut on Muir Pass, but with one of our team members was hobbled by a nagging foot injury, so we opted instead to setup our pop-up taco stand at the Muir Monster.

This year, we had the same objective, but via a shorter but more challenging route to Muir Pass, heading over Lamarck Col. This route from the North Lake trailhead outside of Bishop begins as an established trail, but dissolves into a boulder-hopping, route finding trip over the col and down to the amazing views of Darwin Bench before finally joining the John Muir Trail near Evolution Lake. From there we planned to head south to Muir Pass, down into Le Conte Canyon, and finally up to Dusy Basin, over Bishop Pass and out to South Lake. It was a solid plan, until the wildfires came along.

There were four of us for this year’s mission. I was joined by three Muir Taco newbies: Paul, Mark and Byron. We drove up the 395 from LA to Bishop, picked up our permit, then parked one car at South Lake (our exit trailhead) and my Xterra at North Lake. With a mid-afternoon start, our plan for day one was an easy hike up to Lamarck Lake.

Left to Right: Jeff, Paul, Mark and Byron Looking back as we climb higher toward Lower Lamarck Lake Smoky skies on the east side of the Sierra Nevada divide Lower Lamarck Lake

The next morning, we arose at sunrise. After the requisite coffee and oatmeal, we broke camp and headed toward Lamarck Col. The trail to the col is less-traveled and sometimes picking the route takes some detective work. The views to the east opened up as we climbed above the tree-line, and soon we approached the cirque.

Early morning at our first camp The lunar landscape above Upper Lamarck Lake Smoke filled valley along Highway 395 Pushing up sandy loam to the cirque The col is here... somewhere Looking back down from Lamarck Col

We had some discussion about where exactly the col was. There wasn’t a clear “trail” that led up. It was going to be a boulder scramble to the crest of the col. Finally, we spied a single person standing at the divide next to the trail sign marking the entrance to Kings Canyon National Park. We began carefully climbing from boulder to boulder up to the top of the col.

Smoke from the Rough Fire made this even more difficult.

When we reached the crest, we quickly realized two things. First, the smoke from the Rough Fire was far worse than we anticipated. It was certain to be a factor in this trip. Second, getting down the west side of the col would be even more arduous than climbing the east side.

There is no “trail” down from Lamarck Col. It’s another boulder scramble. Every now and then you run across a short social trail, but it soon gives way to another boulder field and you’re stuck picking your way down to the bottom of the basin. Carrying extra heavy loads with taco ingredients (and beer) doesn’t help.

Heading down into Darwin Canyon Fragments of social trails disappear into boulder fields Our "trail" down into Darwin Canyon It's marginally easier once you reach the chain of lakes

Our goal had been to setup camp near the outlet of Evolution Lake on the JMT. Unfortunately, we got some bad news. As we neared Darwin Bench, we ran across a former ranger traveling in the opposite direction. He had just met up with rangers earlier in the day and was told that they were considering closing Muir Pass and even evacuating the ranger station in Le Conte Canyon due to wildfire danger. The Rough Fire was wreaking havoc.

Exhausted from the long, slow slog over and down the col, we decided to camp at Darwin Bench and reassess our plans.

Byron still smiling Evening light from our camp at Darwin Bench First course? Ramen.

Darwin Bench is a beautiful place to camp. Being off and above the JMT/PCT corridor, we had the place to ourselves.

After a decent night’s sleep, we considered our options around breakfast. We quickly ruled out our original plan to head over Muir Pass. The smoke had partially dissipated overnight, but we had recognized that as part of the pattern, and knew it would grow worse over the day. We could turn around and go back over Lamarck Col. With the memory of that fresh, we quickly ruled that option out as well. Our third option was to hike through Evolution Valley down to Goddard Canyon, then up Piute Creek, over Piute Pass and back to North Lake. We could still setup our “taco stand” in McClure Meadow. It was settled.

On our way down to McClure Meadow, we ran into a couple of JMT hikers who were continuing southbound in spite of the fire. We wished them well and handed them a beer for later. If nothing else, it would help clear the smoke out of their throats.

McClure Meadow had a great campsite for us to setup our taco production. We were right near the trail, so we could easily see and call out to any passing thru-hikers. Plus, we had a banner.

We setup production, heating the carne asada, making guacamole, and cooling the beer in the nearby creek. And soon we had hikers.

Mark prepping fresh guacamole Cerveza to wash down the tacos Happy JMT thru-hikers Happy campers

I’ll never get tired of the expressions of pure joy they share when they realize it’s not a joke – we really are offering them a free, freshly made taco and beer. And of course, one of the beautiful things about long distance backpacking is that you can always eat. Your body typically runs a caloric deficit, so more food just staves off the hunger.

My favorite story came when a group of college-age thru-hikers from east coast came by. One of them asked me “Are you the guy from SoCalHiker?! You’re the reason I’m hiking the JMT!” He shared how he’d spend time in class reading and re-reading my posts on the John Muir Trail. I’m hoping it didn’t stop him from graduating, but thrilled that he was inspired. “I bring fresh tacos and beer to all my readers,” I joked. It was a happy accident to run into him.

We shared a couple tacos with the ranger from McClure Meadow Station, and then packed up our gear and hit the trail again. This time, our plan was to camp along the San Joaquin River, near the northern boundary of Kings Canyon National Park.

Crossing Evolution Creek

Waking after our third night, we broke camp and soon left Kings Canyon NP. Here we parted from the JMT and PCT and headed up toward Piute Pass. I had never been up this route, and wasn’t sure what to expect. As it turns out, it’s quite beautiful!

As was the pattern, the day began with optimistically blue skies, but almost like clockwork, the afternoon sun was choked with smoke. As we climbed higher toward the pass, smoke filled the entire basin. It was like breathing a campfire. Not good.

We camped for the night just below Piute Pass. It was a long haul, and this set us up well for a short hike out to the trailhead. The smoke was so thick that you could barely make out the outlines of the jagged peaks towering around us.

Our fifth and final day, we climbed over Piute Pass and enjoyed the slightly clearer morning air as we hiked back down to North Lake.

This modified route worked well for us. It was a little longer than our original plan, but with the same number of nights, we had plenty of food. As it turns out, we came out at North Lake, near where we started five days earlier. We still had to go pickup the other car at South Lake, but we didn’t have to hitch a ride.

The Rough Fire may have wreaked havoc on our plans to serve tacos at Muir Pass, but it didn’t stop us from our core mission: bringing a little trail magic to hungry and thirsty thru-hikers, deep in the backcountry. And that is priceless.

Postscript

Señor Muir’s Taco Hut has it’s own Facebook page. Follow along for more photos from other Muir Taco adventures.

Originally hiked on August 20-24, 2015. Thanks to Paul, Mark and Byron for joining me on this bodacious boondoggle! 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/the-muir-taco-adventure-2015-edition/feed/ 0
Hiking to Rose Peak from Del Valle Regional Park https://socalhiker.net/hiking-to-rose-peak-via-del-valle-regional-park/ https://socalhiker.net/hiking-to-rose-peak-via-del-valle-regional-park/#comments Mon, 16 Apr 2018 00:20:06 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=402238 Hike Rose Peak from Del Valle Regional Park

Rose Peak. The name evokes thoughts of gentle beauty. But this Rose is guarded not by thorns, but by a relentless series of climbs and descents. In total, nearly 20 miles for the round trip, and 5,000 vertical feet. This is one tough hike.

Trail Details
Distance: 19.5 miles
Time: 7-10 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 5,000 ft
Dogs: No
When to go: Year-round
This out-and-back route can be hiked as a long day hike, or as an overnight backpacking trip. It begins and ends at Del Valle Regional Park on the outskirts of Livermore. The terrain consists of green, rolling hills spotted with the occasional grazing cow.

Getting to the Trailhead

From Livermore, head south on North Livermore Avenue. This becomes Tesla Road outside of Livermore. Turn right at Mines Road, then continue straight onto Del Valle Road, following it all the way to the park entrance. There is a vehicle entry fee, and (if camping overnight) daily campground fee.

We camped overnight at Del Valle, and started on the Vallecitos Trail. Here’s the location of our trailhead on Google Maps. If you’re hiking this as a day hike, park near the Rocky Ridge Visitor Center and start on the Sailor Camp Trail.

You’ll also need an Ohlone Wilderness Regional Trail Permit for each person in your party. They must possess and carry the permit, which actually doubles as a detailed map and is good for one year. You can get a permit at the Del Valle Regional Park, but your best bet is to order it in advance online. Backpacking permits are not available at Del Valle Regional Park.

Vallecito Trailhead Trailhead Signpost

Hiking to Rose Peak via Del Valle

We hiked from the Vallecitos Trail near the family campground, but the Sailor Camp Trail near the Rocky Ridge Visitor Center meets up at the boundary of the Ohlone Wilderness.

The trail starts out with a gradual climb along a shady ravine.

Heading up the Vallecito Trail

At 0.8 miles, you reach the junction with the Sailor Camp Trail and the check-in board for the Ohlone Trail. Check the information here for the latest warnings and bulletins, and sign the registry before continuing.

Check-in at the Ohlone Wilderness Boundary.

From here, the double-track trail climbs steeply. Trekking poles are highly recommended. 

Pass through Gate RK4. As with all gates you encounter in the wilderness, be sure to close them behind you.

Be sure to close gates behind you.

The first water source is marked by trail marker #39. As with most of the water sources on this trail, they require a detour to the spring, and water must still be filtered or treated before drinking.

This trail signpost is typical throughout the park. They are well marked and numbered, making cross-referencing on your Ohlone Wilderness permit (map) a breeze.

Heading toward Rose Peak

At about 2.3 miles you pass through a saddle and begin the first big descent into Williams Gulch. At the bottom, a season creek gurgles and cascades over moss-covered rocks. It’s a good place to collect and get ready for another big climb.

Water crossing

After climbing 1.8 miles up, you encounter an interesting rock outcrop. If you look closely, you’ll find a plaque identifying the point as Schlieper Rock. And you’re not done schlepping uphill quite yet.

Schlieper Rock Plaque Looking toward Mt Diablo Deceptively gently trail Ridges, bloody ridges Trail marker 36

At the 5.2 mile mark you reach the ridgeline. From here the climb tapers off for a bit, with gently rolling hills replacing the relentless uphill grind.

Climbing yet another hill

At about 7.5 miles, the trail turns right at marker #32 begins another descent. Skirting La Costa Creek and climbing another ridge, the south San Francisco Bay comes into view in the hazy distance.

First glimpse of south San Francisco Bay

At marker #31, the trail turns left and descends to Indian Creek. We refilled our water here, filtering it with a Katadyn BeFree water filtration bottle.

We refilled our water here

After Indian Creek, we had one last climb. At trail marker #29, we beared right toward Maggies Half Acre Camp – our destination for the night.

Left heads directly to Rose Peak. We turned right toward Maggies Half Acre Camp.

Trail toward Maggies Half Acre Home for the night Almost a full moon

Maggies Half Acre sits on a bench just north and below Rose Peak. There are several campsites, a pit toilet and spring-fed water source (again, filter before drinking).

In the morning, we broke camp before dawn and hiked west to trail junction #28, then turned back east and up to Rose Peak. We made some coffee and enjoyed the sunrise from the summit.

Sunrise on Rose Peak Panoramic sunrise at Rose Peak Coffee on the summit of Rose Peak

Fully-caffeinated and ready to head home, we followed the trail east back to trail marker #29, rejoining the trail we came in on the day before. From here it was just a matter of retracing our steps back to Del Valle.

Man-made pond for grazing cattle Early morning light on the trail back A view of the ridges to climb

Our fresh legs carried us all the way to Williams Gulch, where we took our only break for the day and refilled our water one last time.

The climb out of the gulch felt much easier and shorter than we expected, and from the ridge, it was mostly downhill the remainder of the way.

When Del Valle Regional Park came into view, we knew we’d be on our way home soon.

Last downhill to Del Valle

We saw only a few other people on the trail on our weekday trip. The quiet and the solitude was peaceful. The terrain is deceptively gentle looking, and surprisingly challenging.

Without a doubt, this was the toughest hike in the NorCal Six-Pack of Peaks.

Rose Peak via Del Valle Trail Map & Elevation Profile

Download file: del-valle-to-rose-peak-12918-104457am.gpx

 

Ohlone Regional Wilderness Tips & Resources

  • This route begins in the Del Valle Regional Park. There is an entrance fee of $6 per vehicle, and additional fees for overnight camping in Del Valle. Park hours vary by season, so check the website for the latest information.
  • If you are day hiking, you will park in the Rocky Ridge Visitor Center parking area and begin on the Sailor Camp Trail. If you camp overnight at Del Valle at the family campground (as we did) you begin at the Vallecitos Trail. Both trails converge at the junction with the Ohlone Trail at the wilderness boundary. Be sure to sign-in on the register at the boundary.
  • You must order a permit and carry it on this hike. It’s only $4 bucks at the time of writing, it’s good for a year, and includes a detailed map, trail descriptions, rules and other useful data. Each person in the party needs their own permit. This is probably the best idea I’ve seen for a permit. As long as you’re carrying a permit, you’ve got a map and all the details on the park.
  • Overnight camping is at designated campsites only, and requires a reservation. Call 1-888-EBPARKS or 1-888-327-2757, press option 2 to reserve a campsite.
  • Visit the official Ohlone Regional Wilderness website for the latest info on trail conditions, water availability, and regulations.
  • Cell coverage via AT&T was limited on this hike. The best signal was near Rose Peak, where there is a line of sight with the south bay.
  • As always, carry the ten essentials and practice the seven Leave No Trace principles.

Rose Peak is part of the NorCal Six-Pack of Peaks Challenge. Join today!

Ohlone Regional Wilderness Weather Forecast

[forecast width=”100%” location=”94551″]

Originally hiked on January 29 & 30, 2018 with Jason Fitzpatrick.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/hiking-to-rose-peak-via-del-valle-regional-park/feed/ 3
Backpacking San Bernardino and San Gorgonio Peaks https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-san-bernardino-san-gorgonio-peaks/ https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-san-bernardino-san-gorgonio-peaks/#comments Wed, 28 Mar 2018 17:17:30 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=402275 Overnight backpack trip up both San Bernardino Peak and San Gorgonio Peak.

One of the best way to enjoy the mountains of Southern California is on an overnight backpacking trip. I have hiked both San Bernardino Peak and San Gorgonio Peak both as day hikes and as overnight trips, but since many of the trailheads closed by the Lake Fire were reopened in 2017, I wanted to explore other options. These two peaks were the last two I needed to finish out my SoCal Six-Pack of Peaks Challenge, and with only two days on my schedule to hike, I knew it would be a challenge.

Trail Details
Distance: 30.2 miles
Time: 2 days
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 5,770 ft
Dogs: Yes
When to go: June to November
This route is an “open” loop that requires a shuttle. To get an early start, I suggest car camping the night before at Barton Flats. In the morning, drop one car off at the nicely paved South Fork trailhead, then drive your other car to the Forsee/John’s Meadow trailhead a few miles west.

In a nutshell, the plan was to follow the John’s Meadow Trail up to the junction with the main San Bernardino Trail that begins at Angelus Oaks, follow that to the summit of San Bernardino, then continue on the San Bernardino Divide Trail to camp. Early the next day, continue on to the summit of San Gorgonio, then descend via the South Fork Trail.

Getting to the Trailheads

You’ll need to either have a friend drop you off or, more ideally, have two vehicles. In our case, there were three of us, each coming from different places and arriving at different times, so we ended up with three vehicles. We parked the nicer two cars at South Fork, and the rental car at Forsee Creek. Why? South Park has nice, paved parking. Forsee requires about a 1/2 mile drive up a very bumpy, rutted dirt and gravel road. I was able to drive my sedan back there without incident, but if you have a Mini Cooper or a BMW sedan, you might not want to risk it. 😉

Both trailheads are located off Jenks Lake Road, which is a partial loop that connects to Highway 38 on both ends. Driving up the mountain from Redlands, you’ll continue past Angelus Oaks, reaching Jenks Lake Road West on your right. The east end of  this windy, paved road reconnects with Highway 38 miles away.

The closest trailhead is Forsee Creek Trail. There is a sign for the turn-off to the right (south)  from Jenks Lake Road onto Forsee Creek Road. Note that this unpaved road is gated and may be closed during snow season. The dirt section is only about a 1/2 mile, so it could be walked. Get turn-by-turn directions via Google Maps.

The South Fork trailhead is on Jenks Lake Road East. There is a paved parking lot on the north side of the road, with the trail itself beginning on the south side. Get turn-by-turn directions via Google Maps.

The distance between the two trailheads is less than three miles, so if you only have one car, you could hike between the two.

South Fork trailhead to Forsee Creek Trailhead

Day 1: Forsee Creek Trailhead to San Bernardino Peak

At the Forsee Creek Trailhead, there’s a sign with a somber reminder that portions of this hike travels through area scarred by the Lake Fire in 2015. Dead trees still standing represent a hazard, as does hillsides with little vegetation to hold them together in a rain storm. Be aware of the weather and your surroundings, and be prepared to change your plans if conditions do not allow safe passage.

A welcome sign with rules for the trail. Read it. Areas ahead burned by the 2015 Lake Fire. This to-the-point sign shows the way up the Forsee Creek Trail.

The trail climbs gradually for the first 0.5 miles, reaching the junction with the Johns Meadow Trail. Turn right (west) here. You’ll follow this trail for the next 5.7 miles with no other junctions.

Turn right at the junction to Johns Meadow.

The trail climbs gently for the first four miles of this hike, following the contours of the mountain while gradually climbing.

Johns Meadow Camp would be a good place for a first night camp if you started in the afternoon. Water source near Johns Meadow Camp

There are several small creeks near Johns Meadow Camp, so this would be a good camp option to do this route as a 2-night trip. Hike the easy 4 miles to Johns Meadow late on day one, and you’re well positioned for an early start on day two.

Creek crossing and view of what we will climb

Once you pass Johns Meadow Camp the trail begins climbing quite steeply. The incline felt even steeper since we were carrying gear for overnight.

The trail from Johns Meadow Camp up to the main San Bernardino Trail is STEEP!

There are many places where the trail would be slippery with loose rock–easier to climb with trekking poles and much easier than going down. We all agreed that even though it was a steep climb, we were glad were weren’t coming back down this route.

At the 6.2 mile mark, you reach the junction with the main trail up San Bernardino, just a few yards from the rusted wheelbarrow that those who have hiked that route are no doubt familiar with.

From here, we followed a trail we had hiked before up to Limber Pines Spring, where we refilled all our water bottles and bladders. The water would need to last us up to San Bernardino, for cooking dinner and breakfast, getting us up to San Gorgonio in the morning and down to the next water at South Fork.

Junction with the main San Bernardino Trail Refill your water bottles at Limber Pine Springs. Be sure to filter and/or treat the water.
Note
There are a couple of springs downhill from the San Bernardino Divide Trail, but we didn’t relish the thought of going down to climb back up if we didn’t have to, and we had enough water storage to get us through.

As we neared the summit of our first peak, we took the short detour to checkout Washington Monument. We’ve been there before, but this historic point was used by surveyors in laying out many of the streets of Southern California back in the 1800s. To this day, it’s covered with benchmarks datum points, and an assortment of odd pins added by hikers.

Take time to visit Washington Monument.

After roughly 11 miles of hiking, we reached San Bernardino Peak. This was the perfect spot for a lunch break and socializing with other hikers, many of whom were hiking the Six-Pack of Peaks Challenge.

Chilling at the summit of San Bernardino Peak

From here, we followed the San Bernardino Divide Trail as it makes it’s way east along the ridge. The trail dips and climbs, but stays above 10,000 feet. There are several trail junctions along the way, all well signed.

The landscape is fairly desolate, but we still saw patches of wildflowers even late in September.

First junction on the San Bernardino Divide Trail The San Bernardino Divide Trail has some up and down, but is generally pretty gentle. Most of the San Bernardino Divide Trail is pretty desolate and rocky, but wildflowers to spring up, even in September. The burn scarred area from the 2015 Lake Fire are eerie. Easy-to-miss sign for the Red Rock Flat Camp, our home for the night.

We considered hiking all the way to the San Gorgonio Summit Camp (our original plan), and we could have, but the spring in our step was gone and that goal didn’t sound so appealing any longer. We opted to camp at Red Rock Flat Camp, an ugly area at the edge of the fire-scarred forest, but with a beautiful view of the sunset to the west.

Sunset from Red Rock Camp on the San Bernardino Divide Trail

Day 1: Forsee Creek Trailhead to San Bernardino Peak Trail Map & Elevation Profile

Download file: san-bernardino-peak-91617-75426am.gpx

Day 2: San Bernardino Divide to San Gorgonio and Down South Fork

On the second day, we hit the trail just as the first rays of sunlight hit our campsite. From Red Rock Flat Camp, the San Bernardino Divide Trail descends to Dollar Lake Saddle at 10,000 feet.

I love these old iron trail signs. It reminds me of the ones I've often seen in Yosemite National Park.

Several trails converge at this saddle, so be sure to follow the sign for San Gorgonio Mountain. The trail climbs the west-facing slope of the ridge with spectacular views.

The trail from Dollar Lake Saddle to San Gorgonio has a gentle grade and great views.

Rounding the corner, Mount San Jacinto comes into view across the valley to the south. I was standing at the top of that just two days earlier.

Our first, early morning view of Mount San Jacinto

Soon we reached the trail coming up from High Creek. This is one of the more popular routes, heading up Vivian Creek to High Creek, then up to the ridge and across to the summit. It was still early, so we didn’t run into any day hikers, but we did see several who had camped at High Creek Camp and were making their way to the summit.

Greeting fellow hikers who came up from High Creek Camp

It’s a great feeling to reach the ridgeline to the summit, and this route made it feel really easy. The skies were cloudless and we enjoyed a rare, windless day atop San Gorgonio Mountain.

San Gorgonio on a rare, windless day!

On the way back down, we took the Sky High Trail towards Mine Shaft Saddle. This wraps around the east side of San Gorgonio and is used for both the Fish Creek Trailhead (still closed at the time of this writing) and to our destination – the South Fork Trailhead.

Junction with Fish Creek Trail (still closed at the time of writing) The trail skirts Dry Lake

The trail skirts the aptly named Dry Lake, then begins a steep descent toward South Fork.

This area had the most burn damage for the 2015 Lake Fire. While there were still some trees that survived, the area won’t look the same in my lifetime.

The South Fork crossing is a good place to refill your water bottles on your way down

Thankfully, there was still plenty of water running at South Fork, even in late September. We filtered water and refilled our bottles and continued the descent.

We descended over 4,400 feet on day two, logging 15.5 miles.

Trees burned in the 2015 Lake Fire pose a potential falling hazard The new sign at the boundary of the San Gorgonio Wilderness on the South Fork Trail Back at the South Fork Trailhead

Day 2: San Bernardino Divide to San Gorgonio Peak Trail Map & Elevation Profile

Download file: san-gorgonio-91717-72503am.gpx

Tips & Tricks for Overnight Trips in the San Gorgonio Wilderness

  • Wilderness permits are required for both day hikes and overnight trips in the San Gorgonio Wilderness. At the time of writing, there are no quotas for day hike permits, and you can even fill out your own at the Mill Creek Ranger Station. For all overnight trips, there are quotas based on the camp site(s) and days you choose. For details, visit the San Gorgonio Wilderness Association.
  • Water can be tricky. the camps at higher elevations typically do not have a nearby water source, so plan to either carry enough to get you through the night and next day until you reach South Fork, or taking a detour downhill to a spring (adding one or more miles and additional vertical gain).
  • Cell coverage is unreliable on this route. There may be places where you can pick up a weak signal, but don’t rely on this.
  • Carry the Ten Essentials, and practice the Seven Leave No Trace Principles.
  • The San Bernardino Divide Trail is also the route for the Nine Peak Challenge. Instead of taking the trail alongside the various peaks, you scramble up to the top of nine peaks.

Alternate Routes

You can hike in and exit from any number of trailheads. The most popular alternate route would be the San Bernardino Peak Trailhead in Angelus Oaks, exiting either via South Fork or the Vivian Creek Trailhead.

You can also stretch this out into a 3- or 4-day trip to cut down the daily mileage and enjoy the journey a bit longer.

For example, camp at Johns Meadow, then Limber Pine, then San Gorgonio Summit for a four day trip that includes summit sunset and sunrise atop Old Greyback.

Be prepared for extreme fluctuations in weather. Mountain weather can be very different than what you experience in the valley. Check Mountain Forecast for a summit forecast on San Gorgonio.

Originally hiked on September 16 & 17, 2017 with Jason Fitzpatrick and Ric Serena of The Muir Project.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-san-bernardino-san-gorgonio-peaks/feed/ 10
Backpacking the North/South Lake Loop: Upper Dusy Basin to South Lake https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-the-northsouth-lake-loop-upper-dusy-basin-to-south-lake/ https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-the-northsouth-lake-loop-upper-dusy-basin-to-south-lake/#comments Mon, 13 Nov 2017 15:32:17 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=399545 Day 6 - Upper Dusy Basin to South Lake

DAY SIX on the North Lake/South Lake Loop

We would celebrate completing the North Lake South Lake Loop today with another short day – up and over Bishop Pass and then down to the trailhead.  We woke up to another COLD morning with ice on the rain fly – and we would take our time getting warmed up as we only had a short hike to finish.

Bishop Loop Day 6 Details
Distance: 6.9 miles
Time: 4-6 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Gain/Loss: +658’/-2,119′
Dogs: No
When to go: Late July-Early October
The sun was out and it would be a gorgeous day for our sixth and final day.

Before we left Upper Dusy Basin, we took some sunrise photos.  The ascent up to Bishop Pass would be about 650 vertical feet and pretty easy.  There were a couple of small snow fields to cross on the way up – and then we were there!  Bishop Pass – 11,972 feet – the entrance/exit to Kings Canyon National Park.

Upper Dusy Basin

We took a few photos with the sign, and chatted with some rock climbers who were getting ready to climb Mt. Agassiz.  They asked us if we saw any snow in the western facing chutes, and I showed them my photos from the night before.  They were happy to see that it was clear, and we wished them luck on their climb.

Approaching Bishop Pass from the west Looking back at Dusy Basin Photo op at the Bishop Pass sign

The hike down the east side of Bishop Pass started with a few snow fields – similar to those on the east side of Muir Pass but not as steep.  We hiked down carefully and saw some HUGE bear paw prints in the snow!  We had heard of bear sightings in Dusy Basin, but had gone six days without even seeing a print.  Now, on our last day, in a snow field at 11,800 feet – there they were!  Crazy!

snow field on east side of Bishop Pass

After the snow fields, the Bishop Pass trail goes straight down a granite face via a series of steep switchbacks that are VERY similar to the structure of the 99 switchbacks on the Whitney trail…except here there aren’t 99 of them.

Switchbacks on the east side of Bishop Pass

Once down the steep switchies, the trail flattens into the beautiful basin that houses Bishop Lake.  Unlike the Piute Pass trail, this upper section of the Bishop Pass trail has a lot of brown/red clay soil – making the contrast with the gray granite, white snow, blue water, green grass and trees even more stunning.

The Bishop Pass trail winds downward past a series of huge gorgeous lakes – one after the other.  First Bishop Lake, then Saddlerock Lake, then Spearhead Lake, then Long Lake.  And yes, Long Lake is really LONG!

At this point, I wasn’t that excited about trying my hand at fishing again – but I should have been, because this is where all the fish were!  We passed one guy at Long Lake that had already caught three and thrown a few back.  We passed others that were on their way up to various lakes for fishing – and all of them said that the fishing was excellent.  Oh well – next year.

Above Bishop Lake Bishop Pass from Bishop Lake Above Saddlerock Lake Long Lake with Bishop Pass in the background

As it was Friday, there were a lot of backpackers starting their journey on the Bishop Pass Trail.  Many of them were looking for beta on Muir Pass conditions – and we were glad to give them the good news that everything is doable and they would be good to go.  It’s fun to create smiles and relief for hikers on their first day out.

Finally, we arrived at South Lake – the same place we had parked our car seven days earlier.  South Lake is as full as it’s been EVER – they were even letting water out of the spillway. It was just another function of this incredible winter that made the trail so green, so wet, so snowy and so wonderful for the past week.

South Lake

As we took our finishing photos at the trailhead and looked back at the Eastern Sierra and Bishop Pass, we celebrated another epic adventure in these majestic mountains that we are so lucky to live near.

If you want to see some of the John Muir Trail’s most prized gems – like Evolution Valley and Muir Pass – but don’t have 2-3 weeks to complete the entire JMT, the North Lake–South Lake Loop provides an amazing one week option and 55 miles of absolutely spectacular Sierra scenery.

Get out there!

Upper Dusy Basin to South Lake Trail Map & Elevation Profile

Download file: NL-SL-Loop-Day-6.gpx

 

Originally hiked on Friday, August 25, 2017.

 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-the-northsouth-lake-loop-upper-dusy-basin-to-south-lake/feed/ 15
Backpacking the North/South Lake Loop: Little Pete Meadow to Upper Dusy Basin https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-northsouth-lake-loop-little-pete-meadow-upper-dusy-basin/ https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-northsouth-lake-loop-little-pete-meadow-upper-dusy-basin/#respond Sun, 12 Nov 2017 22:48:22 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=399529 Lower Dusy Basin panorama

DAY FIVE on the North Lake/South Lake Loop

For our fifth day on the trail we had a very short hiking day up to Upper Dusy Basin. We also knew it would be a pretty good 2,500 foot ascent over a pretty short distance.

Bishop Loop Day 5 Details
Distance: 6.3 miles
Time: 4-7 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Gain/Loss: +2,571’/-115′
Dogs: No
When to go: Late July-Early October
We didn’t know a lot about Dusy Basin or what it would look like – but boy were we happily surprised – it’s absolutely beautiful!

From the Le Conte Canyon Ranger Station trail junction, the switchbacks head straight up the mountain to the east.  There are two long sets of steep switchbacks with a sort of semi-flat section in the middle of the canyon.  The first section is in the trees and the second section is much more exposed.  The trail is extremely well engineered, with lots and lots of granite steps.

Leaving Little Pete Meadow JMT Bishop Pass Trail junction

This is the eastern edge of Kings Canyon National Park – and its beauty and trail building are consistent with the rest of this majestic park.  The second set of switchbacks crosses over a waterfall with a small wooden footbridge – certainly the coolest landmark on the ascent!

Switchbacks on the ascent to Dusy Basin Waterfall and footbridge on the climb to Dusy Basin LeConte Canyon panorama

Finally you top out at a series of small streams and tarns at the western edge of Lower Dusy Basin at about 10,700 feet.  The views to the north, east and south as you look east are absolutely breathtaking.  In the distance you can see the four peaks that make up the Palisades and Bishop pass to the north.  The high country green grasses and water that are a function of this epic winter snowfall turned Dusy Basin into a paradise!

Lower Dusy Basin

As it was a short day, I thought it would be great to go up as far as we could into Upper Dusy Basin to the last tarns / water sources so that we could be right at the base of Bishop Pass for the morning.  This turned out to be a great idea.

Off the trail about two to three hundred yards to the south were some beautiful tarns and streams at about 11,200 feet that made the perfect campsite for our last night.  Mark and Brian even found a little granite ‘island’ to camp on.

Campsite in Upper Dusy Basin

We took some amazing photos, pitched camp, had dinner, and then bundled up as it got really cold at high altitude again.  The close up views of the Palisades – Mt. Agassiz (13,893′), Mt. Winchell (13,775′), Thunderbolt Peak (14,003′) and North Palisade (14,242′) – were absolutely breathtaking!  It was like you could just reach out and touch them!  Any time you get to be that close to California’s 14ers it’s a good day!

The Palisades, as seen from Dusy Basin

It was our last night in Kings Canyon National Park and our last night in the Sierra – happy and sad. Tomorrow we would hike over Bishop Pass and out to the South Lake trailhead.

Little Pete Meadow to Upper Dusy Basin Trail Map & Elevation Profile

Download file: NL-SL-Loop-Day-5.gpx

 

Originally hiked Thursday, August 24, 2017.

Continue to Day Six: Upper Dusy Basin to South Lake

 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-northsouth-lake-loop-little-pete-meadow-upper-dusy-basin/feed/ 0
Backpacking the North/South Lake Loop: Sapphire Lake to Little Pete Meadow https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-the-northsouth-lake-loop-sapphire-lake-to-little-pete-meadow/ https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-the-northsouth-lake-loop-sapphire-lake-to-little-pete-meadow/#comments Sat, 11 Nov 2017 18:54:21 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=399502 Day 4 - Sapphire Lake to Little Pete Meadow

DAY FOUR on the North Lake/South Lake Loop

We woke early and it was cold at Sapphire Lake.  There was ice all over the outside of the rain fly and it took a few minutes for me to warm my clothes inside my sleeping bag before I wanted to put them on.

Bishop Loop Day 4 Details
Distance: 11.1 miles
Time: 6-9 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Gain/Loss: +936’/-3,104′
Dogs: No
When to go: Late July-Early October
The skies were clear and soon the sun would rise and warm us.  We ate a hot bowl of oatmeal and drank some hot coffee and slowly packed everything up.  It was our first high altitude night and we were feeling good and ready to go.

The gentle 500 vertical foot ascent to Wanda Lake was beautiful – the only thing slowing us down was a long wet crossing where we had to change shoes just below Wanda Lake.

Beautiful Wanda Lake

At 11,426 feet in elevation, Wanda Lake is high and massive!  And, coming off this big winter made it even more so!  The peaks surrounding Wanda Lake were still spotted with snow, and the trail at the east end of the lake heading up past Lake McDermand to Muir Pass had several nice snow fields to cross, although the sun cups weren’t as big and high as they probably were a month earlier.

Ascending Muir Pass from the north

The anticipation of seeing Muir Hut for the first time doesn’t drag on – you can see it from a long ways a way as you slowly ascend from Wanda Lake.  It’s pretty cool to see it that far away and have it as an ascent target as you slowly make your way up the bowl and across the snow.

And just like that, there we were!!  Muir Hut at 11,955 feet!  Mountain pass #2 accomplished!  There were about 8 to 10 other people hanging out at the hut, and we got a nice girl to take our picture together.  We checked out the inside of the hut – and you would definitely appreciate having it if you got stuck on the pass in bad weather.

Iconic Muir Hut at Muir Pass

After a snack and some photos, we decided to chat with a few other folks as they got set to head down the east side towards Helen Lake.  There was a pretty large snow field and we wanted to make sure that we checked for the safest way down.  There was a good set of footprints well to the right of the main trail, and that appeared to be the snow path that everyone was taking.

The descent was pretty steep, but slushy enough to make microspikes not particularly helpful.  My wife put hers on – and it seemed to give her some good confidence.  We slowly made our way down the steep snowfield until it married up with the trail at the bottom after a bit of boulder hopping.  It was nice to get that out of the way!

The trail down to and past Helen Lake would be off and on snow fields and some partial route finding.  We used our GPS and kept our eyes open and slowly and safely made our way down and around.  We also encountered several wet crossings – some of which could be avoided with some bouldering, but for us it was easier just to put on the Tevas and plow right through.

Heading down the south side of Muir Pass in snow Descent to Helen Lake Helen Lake on the JMT More snowfields descending from Helen Lake Snow bridges below Helen Lake Cascading water above LeConte Canyon

A dozen or so hikers were coming up the other way, and we were glad to share our beta on the snow fields and Muir Pass.  As they were all going up, they would certainly have no problems with the snow.  As we continued down the trail, there were some amazing shots of the runoff melting away the snow – areas that were snow bridges and snow crossings a few weeks ago were now washing away fast.

Looking south into LeConte Canyon

Eventually we hit the tree line and started the long winding descent down into the gorgeous Le Conte Canyon.  It is really quite a spectacular and beautiful canyon, surrounded by majestic and jagged Sierra peaks on both sides.  Incredible waterfalls and water features – along with a few more wet crossings – followed us all the way down.

The first campsite at the north end of Le Conte Canyon features the famous Monster Rock – and so of course I had to take the obligatory photo in the mouth of the beast!

JMT Monster in LeConte Canyon

The next campground is Big Pete Meadow – but a group of backpackers had beat us to it, so we kept going in hopes that Little Pete Meadow would be empty.  Minutes later, we arrived at Little Pete – and it was all ours!  It was a great campsite with a great water source, a fire ring, and another family of deer to keep us company.

Deer in our campsite at Little Pete Meadow

Little Pete is also just a short hike from the Le Conte Canyon Ranger station and the Dusy Basin / Bishop Pass trail junction – so again we had positioned ourselves perfectly for a morning ascent the next day up to Dusy Basin.

Our friends Mark and Brian arrived not long after us – and we shared a fire and dinner.  They were looking pretty beat up, and weren’t sure if they wanted to keep going all the way to Kearsarge and then Whitney.  We invited them to go out with us at Bishop Pass and they happily agreed.  Eleven days would be enough for them on their first backpacking adventure – and we were glad that we could help them exit safely and give them a ride back to Bishop.

Sapphire Lake to Little Pete Meadow Trail Map & Elevation Profile

Download file: NL-SL-Loop-Day-4.gpx

 

Originally hiked on Wednesday, August 23, 2017.

Continue to Day Five: Little Pete Meadow to Upper Dusy Basin

 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-the-northsouth-lake-loop-sapphire-lake-to-little-pete-meadow/feed/ 1
Backpacking the North/South Lake Loop: Goddard Canyon to Sapphire Lake https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-northsouth-lake-loop-goddard-canyon-sapphire-lake/ https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-northsouth-lake-loop-goddard-canyon-sapphire-lake/#respond Sat, 11 Nov 2017 00:19:24 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=399471 Day 3 - North Lake / South Lake Loop

DAY THREE on the North Lake/South Lake Loop

The trail up to Evolution Valley starts off with a 1,000 feet of switchbacks that dig in right away!  The switchbacks follow the waterfall that is Evolution Creek flowing out of the valley – and some of the views are breathtaking.  As you top out, you then hike along the creek – watching your map to see how close you are to the famous “Evolution Creek Crossing”.

Bishop Loop Day 3 Details
Distance: 10.9 miles
Time: 5-8 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Gain/Loss: +2,696’/-135′
Dogs: No
When to go: Late July-Early October
In a normal summer, it’s a semi-wet rock hop across the creek.  Earlier this year in 2017, there were JMTers and PCTers going in chest and even NECK deep across.  We had read and heard beta that it was now knee deep – so we were hopeful that was true.

After hiking about two miles, we reached the crossing. The creek didn’t look too deep, but it was running a bit faster than we’d like.  There was a solo hiker camped about 25 years upstream, and where he was camped looked like a perfect place to cross.  We walked over and started to change our shoes, and had a nice chat with our new friend – he agreed it was a good spot.  Knee deep at the outset, and then quite easy after that – we were across in seconds!  Evolution Creek, done!

Evolution Creek Crossing

As the trail opens up and enters Evolution Meadow, it’s an incredible view!  And, the views just keep getting better and better as you approach McClure Meadow.  It’s hard to believe this hidden gem of a valley sits right in the middle of the High Sierra.  Absolutely breathtaking!

McClure Meadow

After you pass the McClure Meadow ranger station, the valley opens up to Colby Meadow – another spectacular view.  Evolution Creek continues to wind through the valley and our anticipation grows as we know that the climb up to Evolution Lake is coming – and that the views looking back as we climb will be incredible!

McClure Meadow

A series of switchbacks take you up and out the West end of Evolution Valley – and you have to stop every few minutes and look back over the expanse of the Valley.  It’s simply amazing.

Looking back on Evolution Valley

Finally, you top out above the tree line at the west end of Evolution Basin and the huge expanse of Evolution Lake.

At 10,852 feet, this giant lake has a short round section on the northwest end and a long center section that runs west to east – the trail goes all the way around the north side of the lake – and it’s quite a distance.

Panorama of Evolution Lake

This north side trail had several snow fields to cross and the beautiful blue sky began to give way to some pretty ominous monsoonal storm clouds.  At the southeast end of the lake is a great water crossing with large rocks that is really fun.

 

Snow on the north side of Evolution Lake

The trail continues to climb gently to Sapphire Lake at 10,966 feet.  By this time, we were feeling rain drops and small hail – so we felt that the additional 500 vertical foot ascent to Wanda Lake was out of the question for today.  It was time to pitch camp at Sapphire Lake before the big rain or hail would hit.

Sapphire Lake

We found a flat spot off the trail with close access to lake water and we set the tent up quickly.  I wanted to try a few fishing casts, but the wind was too strong.  Soon after, the hail started to pelt us and we took shelter in the tent.

When the hail finally stopped, we hopped out and had a quick dinner. We layered up as it was pretty cold, and invited a couple of other hikers to join us at the camp spot we had found.  Mark and Brian were childhood friends from SoCal on their first backpacking adventure!  They were already 9 days in from Mammoth and looked happy to find some other folks to get them off the trail before the weather hit.

Sapphire Lake camp

By the time we finished eating, the rain arrived.  We hunkered down in our tent for about an hour of pretty decent rain.  Everything stayed dry and soon it would be a calm, clear and cold night at Sapphire Lake.

In the morning, we would make our ascent of the iconic Muir Pass!

Goddard Canyon to Sapphire Lake Trail Map & Elevation Profile

Download file: NL-SL-Loop-Day-3.gpx

 

Originally hiked Tuesday, August 22, 2017.

Continue to Day Four: Sapphire Lake to Little Pete Meadow

 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-northsouth-lake-loop-goddard-canyon-sapphire-lake/feed/ 0
Backpacking the North/South Lake Loop: Hutchinson Meadow to Goddard Canyon https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-northsouth-lake-loop-hutchinson-meadow-goddard-canyon/ https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-northsouth-lake-loop-hutchinson-meadow-goddard-canyon/#comments Thu, 09 Nov 2017 18:45:19 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=399333 Day 2 on the North Lake/South Lake Loop

DAY TWO on the North Lake/South Lake Loop

Our second day on the trail would be relatively short, and connect us with the John Muir Trail and the Pacific Crest Trail with the Goddard Canyon Junction our destination. We awoke to another beautiful, clear morning and we headed southwest along Piute Creek towards the JMT junction.

Bishop Loop Day 2 Details
Distance: 8.8 miles
Time: 5-7 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Gain/Loss: +498’/-1,537′
Dogs: No
When to go: Late July-Early October
It may be called a ‘creek’, but Piute Creek was raging! There were several wet crossings during the first three or four miles.

The trail turned south and down a series of switchbacks, through manzanitas, and all the way down to 8,000 feet and the bridge that crosses over the creek and marks the junction of the John Muir Trail and the entrance to Kings Canyon National Park.

Piute Creek

Piute Creek

This just happened to be the morning of the full solar eclipse, but unfortunately cloudy skies rolled in and obscured our view and we never got to see it.

We took a few quick pics at the bridge, then crossed over and took a break in the campground on the other side.  Here it started to rain, so after a snack, we put on our rain jackets and covered our packs and headed southwest along the JMT.

Bridge over Piute Creek into Kings Canyon NP Kings Canyon National Park

This section of the JMT follows the powerful San Joaquin River southwest – past Muir Rock, then through Aspen Meadow, and then across another large bridge with some beautiful campsites on the other side.

Another bridge over the San Joaquin

We continued along the trail until just before the Goddard Canyon trail junction and bridge – where there was a great campsite along the trail with great access to water and a nice fire pit.  That was ours! The rain had stopped and it was camping time.

Our campsite at Goddard Canyon Junction

Although this was a relatively short 8.8 mile hiking day, it positioned us perfectly to climb up into Evolution Valley first thing the next morning – and that is always our strategy…try and set up the climbs for first thing each morning!  Climbing late in the day after a long day on the trail is no fun…at least for us.

Another family of deer joined us at the campsite, and we enjoyed their company by the fire during dinner until it was time for bed.  I suspect they slept nearby, as they were up and ready to greeting us first thing the next morning.

Hutchinson Meadow to Goddard Canyon Trail Map & Elevation Profile

Download file: NL-SL-Loop-Day-2.gpx

 

Originally hiked on Monday, August 21, 2017.

Continue to Day Three: Goddard Canyon to Sapphire Lake

 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-northsouth-lake-loop-hutchinson-meadow-goddard-canyon/feed/ 2
Backpacking the North/South Lake Loop: Piute Pass to Hutchinson Meadow https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-the-north-south-lake-loop-piute-pass-to-hutchinson-meadow/ https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-the-north-south-lake-loop-piute-pass-to-hutchinson-meadow/#comments Wed, 08 Nov 2017 16:53:03 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=399330 East down Piute Creek Canyon

DAY ONE on the North Lake/South Lake Loop

Bishop Loop Day 1 Details
Distance: 12.1 miles
Time: 6-9 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 2,056 ft
Dogs: No
When to go: Late July-Early October
The Piute Pass Trail is a gentle 2,000 ascent up a gorgeous canyon over five miles.  We woke at sunrise at the North Lake Campground, had breakfast and coffee, and broke camp.  We hit the trailhead at approximately 7:30 a.m.  The weather was sunny and perfect. Our goal? Head over Piute Pass, through Humphreys Basin and down to Hutchinson Meadow.

There are several early stream crossings using large logs, but nothing that required getting our feet wet.

About half way up to Piute Pass you reach Loch Leven, a beautiful lake at 10,743 feet.

Our campsite at North Lake Campground All geared up for the trek Loch Leven on our way to Piute Pass

After a series of gorgeous waterfalls and water features, you climb up to Piute Lake at 10,958 feet.

Author at Piute Lake Beautiful Piute Lake

Finally, it’s a short ascent to Piute Pass at 11,423 feet.

There was one remaining snow field across the trail approaching Piute Pass, with some parts of the snow breaking away – so we used caution and took the safest route across the snow.

Snow bridges approaching Piute Pass Snow field on the way up Piute Pass

From Piute Pass, the views are spectacular to both the East and the West.  To the east, it’s back down Piute Pass trail from where you came.  To the west, it’s the vastness of Humphreys Basin.  We sat, ate lunch and enjoyed the gorgeous views.  There is also a side trail here that heads southwest towards Muriel Lake.

Panorama of Humphreys Basin from Piute Pass

We then continued to head west down and through Humphreys Basin.  The expanse of the basin is truly beautiful.  After passing Summit Lake, there were a few wet crossings and some use trails heading south towards Upper and Lower Golden Trout Lakes.

Humphreys Basin had several water crossings

Once below 10,800 feet the tree line starts again and you head through the forest towards Hutchinson Meadow.  On the west edge of Hutchinson Meadow are a series of wet stream crossings – about six to be exact – that come one after the other…so we left our water shoes on and banged them all out in order.

After the last one, there is a beautiful meadow on the south side of the trail, with gorgeous flat granite rock features – the perfect place to camp for night one.  We pitched our tent directly on the granite and the water source was super close and clean.

Piute Creek Canyon

We got some beta on this campsite from a pair of backpackers coming the other way on the trail a few hours earlier – and their beta was spot on!  We pitched camp, and then I tried my hand at some fishing in Piute Creek.  No bites, but a beautiful place to cast a line and I had a family of deer as my audience. The bugs were probably the worst here of any night on the trail – so we used the head nets for a bit in the evening before climbing into the tent.

The elevation at Hutchinson Meadow is 9,500 feet – so campfires are allowed.  There was one camp site in the trees with a fire pit, but we chose to camp in the open meadow on the granite and forego a fire for this first night.

Piute Pass Trailhead to Hutchinson Meadow Trail Map & Elevation Profile

Download file: NL-SL-Loop-Day-1.gpx

Originally hiked on Sunday, August 20, 2017.

 

Continue to Day Two: Hutchinson Meadow to the Goddard Canyon Bridge Junction

 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-the-north-south-lake-loop-piute-pass-to-hutchinson-meadow/feed/ 3
Backpacking the North/South Lake Loop in Six Days: An Overview https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-northsouth-lake-loop-six-days-overview/ https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-northsouth-lake-loop-six-days-overview/#comments Wed, 08 Nov 2017 01:30:18 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=399312 6 Nights Backpacking the North Lake South Lake Loop

For those who have backpacked the famous John Muir Trail, Evolution Valley is often mentioned as one of the most beautiful and memorable spots along the trail.  But is there a way to get to Evolution Valley on just a one-week backpacking adventure?  The answer is YES – and the most popular of these routes is the North Lake – South Lake Loop.

The North Lake South Lake Loop is a 55-mile trail that begins and ends in the Eastern Sierra in the Inyo National Forest.  The trailheads – one at the North Lake Campground and the other at the South Lake day use parking lot – are just a 10-mile drive apart – and it is equally popular to start at either end.  If hiking as a group, it is very efficient to leave a car at both ends.  If hiking with just one car, there are various local shuttle services that can drop you off at either end.  There is also a public shuttle bus that runs from South Lake to Bishop multiple times a day during the summer months.

Trail Details
Distance: 55 miles
Time: 4-6 days
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 9,418 ft
Dogs: No
When to go: Late July-Early October
We chose to start at North Lake for several reasons:  First, it has a self-service campground, allowing us to camp there the night before we began…giving us both a gear shakedown and an acclimation sleep at 9,400 feet.  The campground is $24 a night and you just put your money in an envelope and drop it in a slot.  The camp host comes by later to pick up the money and mark your spot.  There is plenty of water at the campground, fire rings and bear boxes.

The 55-mile route is epic!  It starts from the North Lake campground and heads west and up, climbing 2,000 vertical feet over five fairly gentle miles to the summit of Piute Pass.  Then the trail heads across Humphreys Basin and down along Piute Creek until it reaches the San Joaquin River and the bridge that crosses you into Kings Canyon National Park and the John Muir Trail.

Beautiful Piute Creek

Piute Creek

You then head south on the JMT, along the river until you reach the junction with the Goddard Canyon Trail.  From there, you head back west and up up up to Evolution Valley and then Evolution Basin – finally topping out at the summit of Muir Pass. From here, it’s west and south down and into the epic Le Conte Canyon.

Muir Hut at Muir Pass

Muir Pass

Then, its west and up up up as you depart the JMT and head back via Dusy Basin and the summit of Bishop Pass.  Finally, it’s down along the Bishop Pass trail, passed a half a dozen gorgeous lakes to the South Lake trailhead and done!

On the Bishop Pass Trail

Three legendary mountain passes and a journey through Evolution Valley and Evolution Basin – it’s about as perfect as a 5-6 day backpacking trip in the Sierra can get!

North Lake/South Lake Loop Trail Map & Elevation Profile

Download file: North_Lake_South_Lake_Loop.gpx

Permits

Whether you start at North Lake or South Lake, the permitting process is the same.  You apply online at Recreation.gov for either the Piute Pass-North Lake trailhead or the Bishop Pass-South Lake trailhead as your entry point – up to 6-months before your entry date.  You will pick up your permit for either one at the White Mountain Ranger Station in Bishop, CA.  They will ask you how you are storing your food and they will remind you NO fires above 10,000 feet.

Once you have your permit – you’re ready to go!  AND, if you have time, don’t forget to stop at the world famous Burger Barn as you head out of town on Highway 168 – it’s worth the trip!

Six-Day North Lake–South Lake Loop Backpacking Itinerary

We decided on a pre-trip overnight at North Lake Campground followed by a 6-day trip – as we don’t like to hurry and LOVE to camp!  Our schedule would be:

  • Day Zero – Travel day. Pick up permit, eat at Burger Barn, head to North Lake Campground and spend the night
  • Day One – Piute Pass trailhead – over Piute Pass – down through Humphreys Basin to Hutchinson Meadow
  • Day Two – Hutchinson Meadow – down Piute Creek to the JMT junction – down along the San Joaquin River to the Goddard Canyon Bridge Junction
  • Day Three – Goddard Canyon Bridge Junction – Up to Evolution Valley – then into Evolution Basin and camp at Sapphire Lake
  • Day Four – Sapphire Lake – up to Wanda Lake then summit Muir Pass – then down into Le Conte Canyon and camp at Little Pete Meadow
  • Day Five – Little Pete Meadow up to Dusy Basin and camp at the highest tarns below Bishop Pass at 11,200 feet
  • Day Six – Up over Bishop Pass and down to South Lake – Finished!

NOTE: We originally had planned this trip for July, but changed it to August due to the snow and water challenges that the 2017 winter had created.  We were glad we did!  Our conditions were near perfect!

Key Things to Bring

  • Bug spray, head nets and Permethrin treated clothes – the mosquitos were still challenging in certain spots
  • Microspikes – not really needed, but brought – my wife used them on Muir Pass and Bishop Pass
  • Water shoes – we had no less than 14 wet crossings – we used Teva sandals with water socks
  • Rain gear – we did have rain on three separate occasions – one night pretty hard with hail
  • Map, compass and GPS – We used GaiaGPS for iPhone and the Tom Harrison “Bishop Pass North Lake South Lake Loop” map.

Bishop Weather Forecast

[forecast width=”100%” location=”93514″]

Note that this trail begins much higher than Bishop, and climbs. Compare with the forecast at 11,484′ on Mt Agassiz (near Bishop Pass) .

Originally hiked August 19-25, 2017.

Continue to Day One: Piute Pass Trailhead to Hutchinson Meadow

 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-northsouth-lake-loop-six-days-overview/feed/ 40
Backpacking to the Confluence Overlook in Canyonlands National Park https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-confluence-overlook-canyonlands-national-park/ https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-confluence-overlook-canyonlands-national-park/#comments Thu, 13 Apr 2017 13:50:45 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=338952 Hiking the Confluence Overlook Trail in Canyonlands NP

The Confluence Overlook Trail in the Needles District of Canyonlands National Park takes you away from the crowds and through a maze of slick-rock canyons to the confluence of the Green and Colorado Rivers.

Trail Details
Distance: 11 miles
Time: 5-6 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 50 ft
Dogs: No
When to go: Spring or Fall
I hadn’t planned to hike this trail. I had just been to Arches National Park to hike the Devil’s Garden Loop. I was slowly working my way from Wyoming, through Utah, Arizona, and back to Southern California as part of a 2,900 mile road trip last October. I knew that I wanted to do some sort of overnight backpack trip in the Needles District of Canyonlands, but wasn’t sure what or where. I showed up at the visitor center and chatted with the ranger about availability.

As it turns out, there are no established campsites along the Confluence Overlook Trail, and only one permit is issued per day for an overnight group. Because there are no established campsites, you are required to camp off-trail on slick-rock, where your impact is minimized. In other words, I would have the whole place to myself. I told her to sign me up!

Getting There

This route is in the North Needles area of the Needles District of Canyonlands National Park. The nearest town is Moab–about 75 miles away. You’ll stop at the Needles District Visitors Center to pickup your permit–$30 at the time. Follow the main road from the visitor’s center to it’s end and you’ll be at the trailhead.

The Trail

This out-and-back route requires careful attention to cairns for navigation. The “trail” often crosses slickrock, climbs up and down improbable ledges that require some scrambling, and can be tricky to follow when you happen to miss a cairn. You could easily get lost back here if you aren’t mindful. It is a quiet, special place.

The trailhead begins just past the Slickrock Loop Trail–at the end of the paved road–and runs 5.5 miles to the edge of the canyon where you have a spectacular view of the confluence.

A large sign provides an overview of the trail and marks the start of the trail, which begins by winding down into a small canyon, following cairn to cairn. No sooner do you reach the bottom than you begin climbing, quite literally. Sections of this trail require careful hand-over-foot scrambling that make it unsuitable for small children or anyone squeamish about heights.

Trailhead sign for the Confluence Overlook Trail Descending into the first canyon

Climbing up the opposite side of the first canyon, you reach this window-like view over Canyonlands.

Here's where we are headed

The trail continues in this same manner, climbing down, across, and up out of one canyon, then another. Sometimes you’ll have a ladder to assist you. Cairns are carefully placed along the entire route to help keep you on track. In many places, the trail is difficult to see without them.

One of the sections where a ladder is really handy Look closely and you'll see the cairns Be careful not to step on the crust.

At the 1.5 mile mark, you enter a sandy wash that you follow for almost a mile before climbing again over slickrock.

Climbing up and down can be tricky. Some of the sections are steep with rock-hopping and light scrambling required. At the 4 mile mark, you reach a meadow. The trail crosses a jeep trail and continues through the meadow for a mile, reaching a junction with Cyclone Canyon Trail. Keep right to rejoin the jeep trail, which you follow to the left (west) for 1/2 mile. At the end of the jeep trail you’ll find a rare bit of shade, a pit toilet and a picnic table. And you’re almost to the overlook.

Climbing the final 1/2 mile to the overlook the terrain began to fall away and the views open up.

And finally, you find yourself standing 1,000 feet above the Colorado River.

[vr url=https://socalhiker.net//wp-content/uploads/2017/04/Confluence-Overlook-360.jpg view=360]

1000' above the Colorado River Above the Colorado River

Soak in the views and the energy, and prepare for the trip back. In my case, I was going to be sleeping out here. I had to  backtrack across the jeep trail and at least another 1/2 mile past that. As there are no established campsites (thankfully!),  you find a flat space atop the slickrock where you are less likely to cause harm to the fragile environment. I ended up hiking about nine miles to a section of slickrock, then climbed up and off trail. The views extended for miles in every direction.

My "campsite"

Pitching my tent, boiling water for dinner (vegetable korma from Good To-Go; highly recommended). Watching the sun set, and the stars pop out.

[vr url=https://socalhiker.net//wp-content/uploads/2017/04/Camp-on-Slickrock-360.jpg view=360]

I awoke before sunrise, and the sky was already light. It was cold, but not freezing, and I sat in my sleeping bag and watched the light show, purple and pink, yellow and blue hues changing by the minute.

Sunrise in Canyonlands NP Looking south to the Needles

I fired up the Jetboil and heated water for Starbucks Via and drank it all in.

The 2-mile hike back to the trailhead went quickly in the cooler morning air with a lighter pack (with less food and water).

This was a short trip as far as backpack trips go, and could have easily been hiked as a day hike. But experiencing this place in the afternoon, evening, stillness of night, and the first light of morning, was well worth the time.

Confluence Overlook Trail Map & Elevation Profile

Download file: confluence-overlook-trail.gpx

Confluence Overlook Trail Tips

  • This trail has no shade to speak of. Wear sun protection and be mindful of the weather forecast.
  • There is no water on the trail. I carried four liters, for both drinking and cooking, with another two gallons in my car.

More Canyonlands National Park Resources

Canyonlands National Park Weather Forecast

[forecast width=”100%” location=”84532″]

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-confluence-overlook-canyonlands-national-park/feed/ 4
Hiking to Berry Creek Falls in Big Basin Redwoods State Park https://socalhiker.net/hiking-to-berry-creek-falls-in-big-basin-redwoods-state-park/ https://socalhiker.net/hiking-to-berry-creek-falls-in-big-basin-redwoods-state-park/#comments Tue, 29 Nov 2016 15:17:29 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=86335 Hiking to Berry Creek Falls in Big Basin Redwoods State Park

Giant old-growth redwood trees, lush forest, babbling creeks and beautiful waterfalls–there is plenty to love about this nearly 11 mile loop hike to Berry Creek Falls in Big Basin Redwoods State Park. Big Basin Redwoods is California’s oldest state park, and features the largest stand of coastal redwoods south of San Francisco. These are tall trees–some more than 300 feet tall and 50 feet in circumference–and they date back 1,000 to 2,500 years old.

Trail Details
Distance: 11 miles
Time: 5-6 hours
Difficulty: Moderately strenuous
Elevation gain: 2,364 ft
Dogs: No
When to go: Year-round
Trailhead Directions
Big Basin Redwoods State Park itself is only 65 miles south of San Francisco, but the windy roads you must take to reach the park make it seem much further. It has been on my radar for a long while, and I finally paid a visit on a recent road trip. It was well worth the drive.

Berry Creek Falls is actually a series of four waterfalls deep in the park. This route will take you down a section of the Skyline-to-the-Sea Trail to the Berry Creek Falls Trail, then return via the higher Sunset Trail to complete the loop. You’ll start and finish at the park headquarters.

From the parking area, I took the Redwood Loop Trail past the amphitheater and took the bridge over Opal Creek, where it joins the Skyline-to-the-Sea Trail.

Heading to the Skyline to Sea Trail

On the Skyline-to-the-Sea Trail, the trail climbs about 400 feet to Middle Ridge Road−a dirt fire road. The trail crosses the road and from here nearly all the way to Berry Creek Falls it’s all downhill. Of course means that you’ll be doing a lot of climbing to get back. Be sure you save some energy for the return trip!

Skyline to the Sea Trailhead sign Looking at the trail through the redwoods Low clearance on the Skyline to Sea trail

The basin is lush, with mossy trees, soaring redwoods,  ferns and clover carpeting the forest floor.

Lush redwood forest

It had rained the previous night, and moisture clung to every leaf. The trail itself was in great condition, though there were a few slick patches where trekking poles would have been handy.

As the trail descended the canyon along Kelly Creek, I spied a variety of flora and fauna, including my first sighting of a banana slug in the wild!

Banana slugs are brilliant yellow and rather large slugs that are quite common in the Santa Cruz Mountains. In fact, the lowly banana slug is the official mascot of US Santa Cruz. On this hike, I ended up counting twenty-four banana slugs in total.

A newt on the Skyline to Sea Trail I saw 24 banana slugs on this loop to Berry Falls Mushrooms growing on an overhanging branch

Given the lush foliage, it’s easy to imagine how quickly these trails could be lost if they weren’t maintained. Fortunately, that’s not a problem. The trail is easy to follow with great tread, well marked signage and steep sections like this cut with steps to curb erosion.

Steps down to the seasonal Kelly Creek crossing

Four miles into the hike I reached the double bridge over Waddell Creek. These are considered seasonal bridges that are removed when the creek runs high, but there was no issue for me at the end of October.

This bridge is removed when Waddell Creek swells in winter storms

Another 100 yards further and the trail reaches a junction with the Berry Creek Falls Trail toward the right. I took it, and was soon rewarded with an amazing view of the biggest of the falls on Berry Creek.

Berry Creek Falls

There is a great viewing deck near the base of this waterfall, with benches that make a perfect spot for a break. I chatted with the first two hikers I had seen on this Monday morning−a pair of backpackers that had spent the night up the trail at Sunset Camp. We swapped hello’s and shared a bit about our respective adventures, and I continued up the trail.

The Berry Creek Falls Trail is a real gem, with a series of beautiful and different waterfalls as you ascend. The trail climbs about 500 feet in a mile, finally terminating at the junction to Sunset Camp and the Sunset Trail−the final trail in this loop.

Looking down on the deck from the trail near the top of Berry Creek Falls Berry Creek The next tier up Berry Creek These steps remind me a bit of the Mist Trail in Yosemite The steps climb right beside the cascade Bottom of a multi-tiered waterfall on Berry Creek

Junction to Sunset Camp

The Sunset Trail is 5.3 miles of rollercoaster trail; lots of up and down. It runs well above the canyons in sections, giving you views out over the redwoods.

Views above the redwoods on the Sunset Trail

Along the way you’ll pass junctions with the Timm’s Creek Trail and a connector with the Skyline-to-the-Sea Trail before finally crossing the Middle Ridge Road and the final descent to finish the loop.

Timms Creek Trail junction Wood bridge over Timms Creek Sleepy Timms Creek Hiking the Sunset Trail

Take your time as you walk through these ancient groves. Think about the centuries of history they have lived through. You and I and the others who have passed these trees through the millennia are connected through this shared experience.

The Walter W. Boardman Grove Skyline to the Sea Trailhead Model of the park in the museum

Back at the trailhead, stop by the museum for a look at the history and the research that continues at the park. Be sure to check out the intricate wood model of the park that shows the topology and the distribution of the various kinds of trees in the park.

Skyline to the Sea/Sunset Trail Map and Elevation Profile

Download file: skyline-to-sunset-loop-big-basin-redwoods.gpx

Berry Creek Falls Tips

  • The bridge crossing Waddell Creek is removed when the creek is running high. Check with the ranger for current conditions. You can call the park to check before you go at (831) 338-8860.
  • Hike this loop in a clockwise direction (as described) for the best views.
  • The trail can be slippery. Wear trail shoes with good traction.
  • There is a $10 per car day use fee, but no permits are required for day hikes. You will be given a slip of paper to note your planned route and time of return and leave on your car dashboard. Fill it out. The day before I hiked this, a mother and her two young children got lost in the park. They huddled under a redwood in the rain until (fortunately) the rangers found them.
  • You can also backpack this loop, camping overnight at Sunset Camp (near the midpoint). Permits are required.

More Big Basin Redwoods State Park Resources

Big Basin Redwoods State Park Weather Forecast

[forecast width=”100%” location=”95006″]

Hike to Berry Creek Falls in Big Basin Redwoods State Park

I hiked this trail solo on October 31, 2016. 

 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/hiking-to-berry-creek-falls-in-big-basin-redwoods-state-park/feed/ 13
Photo Gallery: Backpacking in Grand Teton National Park https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-grand-teton-national-park/ https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-grand-teton-national-park/#comments Sat, 22 Oct 2016 06:01:51 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=84852 Panorama of the Teton Range

Grand Teton National Park frequently shows up on lists of favorite backpacking treks, and in particular the 32-mile Teton Crest Trail. Last week I traveled to Jackson, Wyoming for a conference, but before the work — I met up with another attendee who travelled from Germany and together we spent four days backpacking this beautiful national park.

We had originally planned to hike the Teton Crest Trail, which most people start from the top of the tram above the Jackson Hole Ski Resort, then loops around the west side of the range, crossing four passes and exiting east through Paintbrush Canyon. We knew that there had been snow the week before, but as you can see from the view above, the snow didn’t look too bad.

Monday morning, I met my hiking partner Carsten for breakfast, made a stop at Teton Mountaineering to pickup bear spray (there are grizzlies up here) and a fuel canister, then headed to the visitor center in Moose, WY to pickup our permit. Right off the bat, the ranger informed us that the tram which whisk us to the top of the mountain and give us an easy, mostly downhill first day had stopped running the day before, shutting down until ski season started up in December.

Granite Canyon Trailhead

So we went with Plan B. Starting at Granite Canyon and hiking up from the bottom. The ranger warned us that the snow was “probably” deep, but we figured we’d see for ourselves. And so we did.

Heading up Granite Canyon

The creek in Granite Canyon

The trail started out as we expected–pretty dry. The creek running down Granite Canyon had plenty of water, the forest shaded us from the bright sun. And then we ran into a bear. 

Bear scare

It may not show clearly in the photo above, but there were berries on those bushes. The ranger had warned us that bears were especially active, looking to load up on calories before going into hibernation for winter. I was leading the way, and hear the quick rustling in the brush. Carsten saw the blur of fur, and we both turned and quickly headed back down the trail to put a bit of distance between us. We didn’t run (never run from a bear) but we did get out of the way.

After retreating about 50 yards, we stopped and listened. Apparently the bear was as startled as we were, because after we waited about five minutes and made our way back up the trail, the bear was gone.

Animal tracks

As we continued climbing up the canyon, we encountered more snow. There was plenty of evidence of wildlife, but only one set of footprints.

Big animal tracks

Snow in Granite Canyon

By 8000 feet, we were hiking through about 12″ of snow. Travel was not bad, and we hoped for the best. As we reached 9,000 feet, the snow was 24″ deep, and we were post-holing and breaking the trail. We knew that we had several passes over 10,000 feet. It wasn’t going to get better. We had set an aggressive schedule for the Teton Crest Trail, and with the snow level, there was no way we’d be able to make that mileage.

Hiking through the snow in Granite Canyon

So we went from Plan B to Plan C. We camped our first night on the snow (my first time) and hiked back down Granite Canyon the next morning. Instead of the Teton Crest Trail, we’d be backpacking on the Valley Trail.

Heading back down Granite Canyon on Day 2

Autumn colors

Being the shoulder season, the crowds were non-existent. We saw occasional day hikers (being not-too-far from the trailheads) but only a few other backpackers. We had our pick of campsites, including our Tuesday night camp at Phelps Lake and Wednesday night at Bradley Lake.

Moose near Phelps Lake inlet

Phelps Lake campsite view

Sunrise at Phelps Lake

Taggart Lake

Sunrise at Bradley Lake 2

Day four and the end of our trek

We finished at Jenny Lake. The skies had cleared and Grand Teton towered majestic above us. Plan C worked out pretty well. Though I’ll be back to hike the Teton Crest Trail another time.

Carsten "Sauerkraut"

Hiking with Carston was a pleasure. You never know when you hike with someone for the first time. All I knew about him was that he was into ultralight backpacking and had hiked the PCT. As we talked about our hiking background, I asked him if he had seen “Tell It On The Mountain” — the documentary about the Pacific Crest Trail that I reviewed here on SoCalHiker a few years ago. As it turns out, “Sauerkraut” (his trail name) was featured prominently in the documentary, and I had even written about his story! No wonder it sounded familiar.

I’ll be sharing detailed trail information in November, but wanted to give you a sense of what the trip was like.

Originally hiked October 10-13, 2016. 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-grand-teton-national-park/feed/ 6
Essential Planning Resources for the High Sierra Trail https://socalhiker.net/essential-planning-resources-for-the-high-sierra-trail/ https://socalhiker.net/essential-planning-resources-for-the-high-sierra-trail/#comments Mon, 03 Oct 2016 07:31:34 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=84436 Essential Planning Resources for the High Sierra Trail

Backpacking the High Sierra Trail takes months of planning and preparation, but it’s also a lot of fun. Reviewing the maps, planning your itinerary, plotting your campsites and filling out your gear helps build the anticipation. Here are a few essential resources that will help make your thru-hike on the High Sierra Trail a success.

Plan & Go | High Sierra Trail guidebook  Tom Harrison Mineral King Map  Tom Harrison Mt Whitney High Country Map

A good guidebook can be a great start to your planning. Plan & Go | High Sierra Trail provides great details on how to get permits, how long it takes to hike, when to get a permit and the tricky transportation options. It’s available in both paperback and a Kindle version.

You should also get these two Tom Harrison maps:

The Tom Harrison maps are waterproof and durable, and provide mileage between junctions and major landmarks. Between these two maps, you’ve got what you need to hike the High Sierra Trail as well as plenty of interesting side trips.

Even though I carry a GPS device, a paper map never runs out of power and shows you a much bigger area, much faster. You should always have a paper map when you’re in the wilderness.

That being said, I highly recommend GaiaGPS. I use it on my iPhone–it’s also available for Android–and it’s indispensable. With GaiaGPS, you can download the GPX files for any of our hikes here on SoCalHiker–including the High Sierra Trail–and the associated maps for the area you are hiking. With your phone in Airplane Mode, the GPS will still track and GaiaGPS will show you exactly where you are and which direction you’re heading.

These are the planning and navigation resources that I recommend for thru-hiking the High Sierra Trail. If you’ve discovered other resources that you think should be included here, please leave a comment and let me know.

Essential Planning Resources for the High Sierra Trail -- Share me!

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/essential-planning-resources-for-the-high-sierra-trail/feed/ 5
Finishing the High Sierra Trail – Outpost Camp to Whitney Portal https://socalhiker.net/finishing-the-high-sierra-trail-outpost-camp-to-whitney-portal/ https://socalhiker.net/finishing-the-high-sierra-trail-outpost-camp-to-whitney-portal/#comments Wed, 28 Sep 2016 08:38:30 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=84161 Nearing the end of the High Sierra Trail

We were in no hurry to get up and do this last 5 miles or so down to the portal – but when you’ve got Whitney hikers coming up all night long with headlamps blasting, you tend to not get the week’s best sleep. We finally got going at 8am and headed down.

HST Day 8 Details
Distance: 3.8 miles
Time: 2 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 0 ft
Dogs: No
When to go: July-Sept.
It’s quite a nice hike back to the portal, although there isn’t anything on the Inyo side of Whitney that can compare to the beauty of what we had experienced all week in SNP.

By 10:30 or so we were down – and the trip was over.

There was only one thing left to do – and that was to sample the food at the Whitney Portal Store. If that wasn’t the best Bacon and Eggs I’ve ever had, I don’t know when I’d had better!

Whitney Portal log crossing Greg at Whitney Portal Breakfast at Whitney Portal

High Sierra Trail: Outpost Camp to Whitney Portal
Trail Map & Elevation Profile

Download file: HST Day 8 of 8 (7:16:16, 9:03:20AM).gpx

High Sierra Trail – A Recap

A week on the High Sierra Trail really felt like we were stepping back in time – experiencing the park the way Ranger Stewart and all of those from the 1920s and 1930s wanted us to see it. That is why they decided on no roads way back them – the park was to be seen on foot, from West to East, using a trail purposely built for just that. They had put 5 long years into creating that trail, and all I wanted to do was go back in time and thank each and everyone one of those hard working men who built that trail so we could enjoy the park still today.

From our ascent of the Great Western Divide and into the Big Arroyo, to our journey up the mighty Kern River, to our summit of the Eastern Sierra and the highest point in the lower 48, the High Sierra Trail packs an incredible Sierra journey into one epic week. The John Muir Trail? Epic, no doubt. The baby brother High Sierra Trail – shorter but still epic in its own way.

Hike the High Sierra Trail. You won’t regret it.

Greg and Barbara at the end of the High Sierra Trail

Next up?

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/finishing-the-high-sierra-trail-outpost-camp-to-whitney-portal/feed/ 23
Hiking the High Sierra Trail – Guitar Lake to Mt Whitney and Outpost Camp https://socalhiker.net/hiking-the-high-sierra-trail-guitar-lake-to-mt-whitney-and-outpost-camp/ https://socalhiker.net/hiking-the-high-sierra-trail-guitar-lake-to-mt-whitney-and-outpost-camp/#comments Tue, 27 Sep 2016 08:09:45 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=84127 Early start at Guitar Lake

DAY SEVEN on the High Sierra Trail –We decided to get up at 4:30 a.m. and begin hiking between 5:30 and 6 a.m. at sunrise. We had no interest in hiking in the dark and trying for the summit at sunrise – for our first time up, we wanted to see everything. We hit the trail at 5:40 a.m. We had heard the boy scouts leaving in groups earlier, and had seen many headlamps going up from midnight until we got up.

HST Day 7 Details
Distance: 9.8 miles
Time: 9 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 2,842 ft
Dogs: No
When to go: July-Sept
While we were packing up, we could see the headlamps all across the Whitney ridge with folks going for a summit sunrise. We had been told it would take us 4 or 5 hours to summit from the tarn. I thought we could do better. We had hiked and climbed fast all week – and now these 53 and 56 year old bodies were going to prove their worth.

The first mile out of the tarn is actually quite steep and you gain a ton of altitude getting to the actual switchbacks that lead to Trail Crest. Once up that steep section, the Hitchcock Lakes come into clear view.

Looking down toward Guitar Lake en route to Mt Whitney

There are essentially seven long switchbacks that take you up the face of the Sierra to Trail Crest–and from the tarn at 11,600 to Trail Crest at 13,500 is just those long rocky switchbacks. All of it–like the rest of the High Sierra Trail–is incredibly well engineered – in fact, we would often stop and look down and around and just think wow–how did they build this? Again, time to watch that documentary video again.

As we climbed, we passed two of the three groups of boy scouts who were taking their time and resting quite a bit. How good did that make our old bones feel? We were killing it!

When we arrived at Trail Crest, there were already 20 or so backpacks lined up from those who had gone for sunrise or early ascents. We dropped our packs and pulled out a day pack and loaded it up with lunch, jackets and water.

Then it was time to take on the ridge – 1.9 miles that would test my fear of heights even more than the Hamilton Gorge did. We took it slow and steady, and I didn’t spend too much time hanging out in the “windows” – those spots on the trail between jagged peaks where you can see straight down on both sides! My wife had no pack, I had the day pack – boy did we feel like Supermen!

The sign at Trail Crest Packs lined up at Trail Crest Trail to Mt Whitney Windows on Lone Pine

As the hut at the top of Whitney came into view, we encountered a snow field. The trail had been mostly plowed down but it was slippery and we used caution – and had to climb over some boulders in a few spots to avoid ice. After the snowfield, we followed the trail east to the summit.

Snow in July? Yes, on Mt Whitney

We made the summit in 3 hours 20 minutes from the tarn at Guitar Lake, which I was very satisfied with for our first time. The wind was calm, the weather warm, and we never had more than a long sleeve shirt on the entire time at the summit. The rest day at 11,600 feet had empowered us and the ascent was really pretty easy – no problem at all. Great views, great photos, signed the book – mission accomplished.

Western panorama from Mt Whitney Eastern panorama from Mt Whitney The hut on the summit of Mt Whitney

After about 25 mins on the top, we headed back down. I thought the ridge going down might impact my heights fears more, but in fact it was quite easy and we got back to Trail Crest quickly.

We strapped back into our heavy loads and did the quick climb up to the other side for our first trip down the infamous 99 switchbacks. Like the Kern River descent a few days earlier, going down is just not our favorite gig – and this one with heavy packs is a long slog.

Mt Whitney's famous 99 switchbacks

We thought we might stay at Trail Camp, but the things we had read about it were sort of correct. The water source looked sketchy and there were a lot of people and it was sort of loud and not especially pretty. We opted to keep going down a few more miles to Outpost Camp.

That last two or three miles from Trail Camp to Outpost Camp was hard on the legs – I won’t lie. My wife was getting pretty miserable – and the sight of Outpost Camp was a welcome one. It’s a really nice spot and the waterfall was going full tilt. We found a spot, pitched our tent – and just sat and relaxed with a dose of ibuprofen and a cold drink!

Waterfall viewed from Outpost Camp

This would be our last night in the forest with just a short walk out to Whitney Portal the next day.

High Sierra Trail: Guitar Lake to Mt Whitney and Outpost Camp
Trail Map & Elevation Profile

Download file: HST Day 7 of 8 (7:15:16, 9:03:20AM).gpx

Next up?

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/hiking-the-high-sierra-trail-guitar-lake-to-mt-whitney-and-outpost-camp/feed/ 2
Hiking the High Sierra Trail – Crabtree Meadow to Guitar Lake https://socalhiker.net/hiking-the-high-sierra-trail-crabtree-meadow-to-guitar-lake/ https://socalhiker.net/hiking-the-high-sierra-trail-crabtree-meadow-to-guitar-lake/#comments Mon, 26 Sep 2016 07:43:24 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=84079 View from our campsite at the tarn above Guitar Lake

HST Day 6 Details
Distance: 3.3 miles
Time: 2-3 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 1,023 ft
Dogs: No
When to go: July-Sept
DAY SIX on the High Sierra Trail — This was a short, easy day to prepare for summiting Mt Whitney. The hike from Crabtree Meadow to Guitar Lake is a little over three miles and about 1000 vertical feet.

The trail meanders up a canyon and then past a beautiful fish-filled lake called Timberline Lake. That morning the fish were literally jumping out of the water all around the lake.

Timberline Lake

There’s no camping there, so it’s super clean and beautiful. As you continue towards Guitar Lake, you realize you are now truly at the base of the Eastern Sierra with Mt. Whitney looming over you – what a sight!

The trail towards Guitar Lake

Above the treeline

Guitar Lake was rumored to sometimes be a bit ‘ghetto’, but we thought it was very clean and nice. We had also heard that the little tarn above the lake was a good place to camp, with great views of Guitar Lake, Mt. Hitchcock, Whitney, Mt. Hale etc. And those facts were correct – that little tarn was an awesome place to spend the day.

There is Guitar Lake

We got the sweet spot right in front overlooking Guitar Lake, with the little stream that runs out of the tarn and down giving us a super fresh water source. We did laundry, lounged around on the rocks, chatted with hikers going up and down Mt. Whitney, and just had an amazing day from 10 a.m. to 8 p.m. doing nothing but relaxing at 11,600 feet – the byproduct of which was a nice little acclimation period at our highest altitude yet! That extra day would most certainly make our assault on Mt. Whitney the next day easier.

We met a great military vet and professor from Branson, MO who was on the PCT. We met a retired man in his 70s who remembered camping at that very same tarn with him family 50 years earlier! We helped him re-create the photo he still has of his mom there. We met people going up and down – giving us their round trip times and words of encouragement for the next day. We were invaded by three different groups of boy scouts who all intended to get up before sunrise and try for the summit early.

Guitar Lake

If you decide to hike the HST (or the JMT for that matter), I highly recommend a long day at the tarn above Guitar Lake – just a great place to camp and enjoy your last day in Sequoia National Park.

Guitar Lake Camp

High Sierra Trail: Crabtree Meadow to Guitar Lake
Trail Map & Elevation Profile

Download file: HST Day 6 of 8 (7:14:16, 9:03:20AM).gpx

Next up?

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/hiking-the-high-sierra-trail-crabtree-meadow-to-guitar-lake/feed/ 6
Hiking the High Sierra Trail – Junction Meadow to Crabtree Meadow https://socalhiker.net/hiking-high-sierra-trail-junction-meadow-crabtree-meadow/ https://socalhiker.net/hiking-high-sierra-trail-junction-meadow-crabtree-meadow/#respond Thu, 22 Sep 2016 14:59:19 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=83867 Upper Kern River

DAY FIVE on the High Sierra Trail

The 9+ mile climb from Junction Meadow to Crabtree is really gorgeous! All five of us hiked together, which was the first day my wife and I had company on our hiking day. It was fun to have one day to hike as a group.

HST Day 5 Details
Distance: 10 miles
Time: 5 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 3,795 ft
Dogs: No
When to go: July-Sept.
First, you climb out of the Kern River valley to the north – then turn east, crossing first Wright Creek and then Wallace Creek – both pretty challenging crossings.

It’s a gorgeous hike up the canyon to the East, with the Kaweah’s and the Great Western Divide to the West. It was great to look back and see where we had come from and what we had accomplished over the past 45 miles.

Looking back at the Great Western Divide

Once at Wallace Creek, we immediately saw more people than we had seen in the previous five days, as we were now sharing the HST with the John Muir Trail. The solitude was gone, but it was sort of fun to meet some new people.

Crossing Wallace Creek

From Wallace Creek, you climb up to about 10,900 feet – the highest we had been so far – before descending a bit into the Crabtree Meadow and Crabtree Ranger Station area. We even passed a man-made rock marker that said “200” – denoting mile 200 of the JMT.

Southbound JMT hikers are close to the end of their journey

Crabtree is a huge meadow – known to be a major camping spot for thru-hikers on the Pacific Crest Trail (PCT). Of course, being mid-July most of the PCTers were long gone – but there still ended up being about twelve tents there by dark. There’s a beautiful creek that runs past it – and because we arrived early, it was a great place to hang out.

Entrance to Crabtree

Most hikers on the High Sierra Trail will go on to Guitar Lake, and then summit Whitney the next day. We decided to turn what could be a six-day trip into an eight-day trip by relaxing at Crabtree all afternoon and following up with another easy day to Guitar Lake the next day. My wife and I love “camping” – so we felt no reason to rush over the Eastern Sierra with all this beauty surrounding us and a Saturday-to-Saturday schedule. We had hiked hard the first three days on a six-day completion schedule so we could ‘earn’ these wonderful camping days – and now we were enjoying the payoff!

Crabtree Creek

We lunched by the creek with some JMTers and then walked up to the Crabtree Ranger Station to introduce ourselves to the ranger. Nice guy again – everyone in Sequoia NP is great!

Crabtree Meadow

We crashed early after dark and didn’t hurry the next morning as we only had about three miles and change to Guitar Lake for another easy day with rest before climbing Mt Whitney.

High Sierra Trail:  Junction Meadow to Crabtree Meadow
Trail Map & Elevation Profile

Download file: HST Day 5 of 8 (7:13:16, 9:03:20AM).gpx

Next up?

 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/hiking-high-sierra-trail-junction-meadow-crabtree-meadow/feed/ 0
Hiking the High Sierra Trail – Upper Funston Meadow to Junction Meadow https://socalhiker.net/hiking-high-sierra-trail-upper-funston-meadow-junction-meadow/ https://socalhiker.net/hiking-high-sierra-trail-upper-funston-meadow-junction-meadow/#comments Wed, 21 Sep 2016 23:38:30 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=83828 Crossing the Kern River

DAY FOUR on the High Sierra Trail we hiked straight north up the Kern River – a gorgeous 10 mile, 2,000 vertical foot,  gentle-but-steady ascent from 6,000 feet to 8,000 feet.

HST Day 4 Details
Distance: 10 miles
Time: 4-6 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 2,169 ft
Dogs: No
When to go: July-Sept.
We got an early start so that we could hike in the shade of the canyon all morning, as it can get hot in the Kern River valley. First, coming out of Upper Funston, you reach a gorgeous bridge to cross from the west to the east side of the Kern River.

Heading up the east side about two miles up the trail you arrive at Kern Hot Springs – an actual hot spring with a concrete tub that allows for 110-120 degree bathing! When we arrived early morning, the campground was pretty full with a big group of fly fishermen. The tub was occupied and there was a waiting list – so no hot bath today. Kevin and his gang stopped there later and said it was marvelous!

Kern Hot Springs

The hike up the Kern valley was gorgeous, varying from rocks and sand to heavy ferns and big trees. As we got higher and closer to Junction Meadow, there were a number of challenging stream crossings. I slipped and got a shoe wet on one, and then we both had to cross with shoes on during another deep and fast one. Good thing it was a warm day, where we could dry the shoes out later at Junction Meadow. We always took the ‘better safe than sorry’ approach with stream crossings. If it looks hairy, plow straight through!

Heading up the Kern River

HST Day 4 - Up Kern Canyon

We arrived at Junction Meadow about 1:30 p.m., and the campground sits right on the junction of the Kern River and another stream (Wright Creek I think). Anyway, gorgeous spot – we even had a solo hiker come in and do some fly fishing there. The early arrival gave us a chance to do some clothes washing (4-day stink was getting noticeable) and dry out our shoes.

Junction Meadow on the High Sierra Trail

Kevin, Amber and Bart arrived around 4:30.  We made a fire, ate dinner together and entertained visiting deer. The sound of the Kern was a great way to doze off later that night.

Kern River Panorama

Spending the day hiking up the Kern River valley was a great reminder of how big and important that river is – and how much water it pushes through the park to eventually become Lake Isabella and hydrate a big chunk of California.

Back at 8,000 feet, we prepared to do another almost 3,000 feet of climbing and join the John Muir Trail and the Pacific Crest Trail the next day.

High Sierra Trail:  Upper Funston Meadow to Junction Meadow
Trail Map & Elevation Profile

Download file: HST Day 4 of 8 (7:12:16, 9:03:20AM).gpx

Next up?

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/hiking-high-sierra-trail-upper-funston-meadow-junction-meadow/feed/ 1
Hiking the High Sierra Trail – Big Arroyo to Upper Funston Meadow via Moraine Lake https://socalhiker.net/hiking-high-sierra-trail-big-arroyo-upper-funston-meadow-via-moraine-lake/ https://socalhiker.net/hiking-high-sierra-trail-big-arroyo-upper-funston-meadow-via-moraine-lake/#comments Wed, 21 Sep 2016 03:14:52 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=83767 Alpine MeadowDay Three on the High Sierra Trail. Yesterday, we hiked to Big Arroyo. Today, another big 13+ mile day awaited us, as we intended to hike down and out of the Big Arroyo, up the ridge, across high alpine meadows at the base of Mt. Kaweah, take a detour to remote Moraine Lake, and then drop down over 3,000 feet into the Kern River canyon to camp at Upper Funston Meadow.

HST Day 3 Details
Distance: 13.5 miles / 21.7 km
Time: 6-7 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 1027 ft / 313 m
Dogs: No
When to go: July-Sept.
It was a cold morning, and it took about 30 minutes for our drinking reservoirs to thaw out.

We ascended up over 10,000 along the ridge as we made our way South and East towards Moraine Lake – a beautiful and large alpine lake with a nice campground on a spur trail off the High Sierra Trail.

High Sierra Trail - Day 3 Day 3 on the HST: Out of the Big Arroyo Moraine Lake is a worthy detour off the official High Sierra Trail

Moraine Lake is a short detour off the official High Sierra Trail, but a worthwhile one.

Day 3 on the HST: Moraine Lake

When we arrived there, there was nobody there and we enjoyed a beautiful lunch on a warm sunny day. The trail out from Moraine Lake back to the HST hadn’t had any maintenance in a while, and we were forced to climb over and under a number of fallen trees and get a bit dirty in the process.

Day 3 on the HST: Old Cabin Near Moraine Lake Moraine Lake panorama

Once back on the HST, the trail begins its steady descent into the Kern River valley – first with gentle switchbacks and then the last section with relentless switchies that really take their toll. This, other than coming down from Whitney to Whitney Portal, is the only big descent on the trip – and not our favorite day – but still beautiful in every way.

Day 3 on the HST: Descending into Kern Canyon Day 3 on the HST: Descending into Kern River Canyon

At the bottom, the mighty Kern River reveals itself. Upper Funston Meadow is not the most well developed camp site on the trip – in fact, most people choose to go another 2 miles north up the Kern to the Kern River Hot Springs site. But we were tired and like the solitude, so it was Upper Funston for us.

Upper Funston campground is mainly for people with stock – it has a fence to keep stock in, and a beautiful meadow. There were a couple of testy water crossings to get down to the campground. The water source is a bit more challenging to dip into, but no problem really. More bugs than other spots, but a campfire helped chase them away.

We met up with Kevin Muschter, his girlfriend Amber and their friend Bart. Kevin is the publisher of the Plan & Go | High Sierra Trail – a must have book if you intend to do this hike. It was great to camp with them after three big days and about 35 miles of trail. After that long descent, we were ready for a good night’s sleep.

High Sierra Trail:  Big Arroyo to Upper Funston Meadow via Moraine Lake
Trail Map & Elevation Profile

Download file: HST Day 3 of 8 (7:11:16, 9:03:20AM).gpx

Next up?

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/hiking-high-sierra-trail-big-arroyo-upper-funston-meadow-via-moraine-lake/feed/ 3
Hiking the High Sierra Trail – Bearpaw Meadow to Big Arroyo Junction https://socalhiker.net/hiking-high-sierra-trail-bearpaw-meadow-big-arroyo-junction/ https://socalhiker.net/hiking-high-sierra-trail-bearpaw-meadow-big-arroyo-junction/#comments Mon, 19 Sep 2016 15:24:28 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=83725 Day 2 on the High Sierra Trail - Bearpaw to Big Arroyo

Day Two on the High Sierra Trail is an epic adventure that includes some of the most legendary sights and sounds of Sequoia National Park. It’s a solid 12-13 mile journey, but worth every single step.

HST Day 2 Details
Distance: 12.5 miles
Time: 6-7 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 3,654 ft
Dogs: No
When to go: July-Sept.
We began at Bearpaw Meadow,  heading north along the ridge with the deep Kaweah River canyon to the east. On this day, the trail was quite wet and muddy with water running off the ridge to our left – they were not formal stream crossings, but water had essentially engulfed larger parts of the trail itself with runoff.

The HST drops down a set of switchbacks to a crazy bridge over Lone Pine Creek that gets you to the other side of the canyon. Below the bridge are the ruins of a previous bridge long since washed out via an avalanche.

Crossing Lone Pine Creek on the High Sierra Trail Lone Pine Creek on the HST The old bridge was mangled by an avalanche years ago

Once across Lone Pine Creek, then you begin the long ascent over the Great Western Divide.

The first target is the Hamilton Lakes basin – a gorgeous lake surrounded by the mountains of the GWD. Crystal clear water and incredible scenery make this first ascent very worth it! On the way hike along several waterfalls and water crossings – some reasonably large. It’s good stream-crossing practice for more to come later.

Big Hamilton Lake is a great place for a quick rest – and even a swim if you’re so inclined. The campground there is quite popular – both for HSTs on a slower schedule or folks who are just doing an out-and-back from Crescent Meadow. Just simply a gorgeous alpine lake!

Big Hamilton Lake

After a brief rest and photos, the time had come to ascend the Great Western Divide – our target, Precipice Lake followed by the Kaweah Gap at 10,700 feet. The next 2,000 vertical feet would be challenging and awesome! First, switchbacks up the Northern side of Hamilton Lake – very well constructed and very fair in their ascent degrees.

The first epic landmark on the ascent is the Hamilton Gorge – an incredibly steep gorge that runs down into Hamilton Lake. From the YouTube documentary on the HST overview, we were looking for the left over steel cable and cement pedestals that once held a crazy suspension bridge.

Today, a tunnel is blasted through solid rock and a thin single track leads you around the gorge. We were lucky that all the snow and ice had melted off just a few weeks before – as this gorge is impassable if the ice is still covering the trail–unless you are equipped for mountaineering.

Hamilton Gorge Tunnel on the HST

Once across the gorge, the trail heads east and up, up, up…until you finally reach the epic Precipice Lake. This lake – made famous in Ansel Adams photos – sits at about 10,400 feet and creates an incredible two-way reflection.

On our day, a few clouds and remaining ice/snow didn’t give us the “Adams” view, but it was still gorgeous and a perfect lunch spot. And it was fun to navigate through some snow that covered parts of the trail – soft enough to not need microspikes but deep enough to warrant just a bit of caution while navigating. We even got to see some melting ice over the lake drop off and explode into the water!

Snow and ice at Precipice Lake on the HST

After lunch and a break, we ascended the last 300 or so vertical feet to Kaweah Gap – the official pass over the Great Western Divide. That last bit of trail included quite a bit of water-on-trail runoff and another nice snow field. We even encountered three trail runners who had left Whitney Portal the night before and were already 50 miles in to a 40 hour HST East to West run – WOW!

Just below Kaweah Gap on the High Sierra Trail Kaweah Gap plaque on the HST Kaweah Gap on the HST

When we reached the gap, it was truly one of the most epic views in all of Sequoia National Park – and perhaps the Sierras! The Big Arroyo opens up to this incredible view to the South – like something out of a grand Western Hollywood film. On the base of Mt. Stewart to the North is a plaque commemorating the first director of Sequoia National Park and the driving force behind the creation of the HST.

Big Arroyo on the High Sierra Trail

From Kaweah Gap the trail gently descends through the Big Arroyo for approximately 3 miles – one of the most beautiful descents of the entire trip. Nothing but gorgeous scenery, grass, rocks and trees in every direction – with an incredible stream and beautiful water features all the way down. There are several small crossings, but as you get close to the Big Arroyo campground, there was one large crossing – one where we simply couldn’t figure out a safe place to cross. It was deep, there were few rocks to step on, and the water was moving pretty rapidly. So, we headed down stream another 50-100 yards or so and found a much flatter, calmer flat rock area to cross – where by simply taking off our shoes and switching to sandals we could shuffle across safely and rejoin the trail on the other side.

From there, it was a short hike to Big Arroyo campground – a nice spot next to the river with a bear box, near an old ranger cabin that has been preserved as a historical landmark.

Big Arroyo on the HST

A northern wind dropped the temperature down to below freezing that night – so we got a bit of frost on the rain fly and our backpack drinking reservoirs froze up! But in the tent we were warm and toasty.

High Sierra Trail: Bearpaw Meadow to Big Arroyo Junction
Trail Map & Elevation Profile

Download file: HST Day 2 of 8 (7:10:16, 9:03:20AM).gpx

Next up?

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/hiking-high-sierra-trail-bearpaw-meadow-big-arroyo-junction/feed/ 1
Hiking the High Sierra Trail: Crescent Meadow to Bearpaw Meadow https://socalhiker.net/hiking-the-high-sierra-trail-crescent-meadow-to-bearpaw-meadow/ https://socalhiker.net/hiking-the-high-sierra-trail-crescent-meadow-to-bearpaw-meadow/#comments Mon, 19 Sep 2016 01:49:38 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=83699 Eagle View Panorama on the High Sierra Trail

Day One on the High Sierra Trail we hiked 11.5 miles east-bound, from Crescent Meadow to Bearpaw. Starting at the giant forest, we followed the edge of the Middle Fork of the Kaweah River – a super deep canyon with stunning views to the south, west and east towards the Great Western Divide. This section of the High Sierra Trail only gains about 1,000 vertical feet from start to finish, there is actually about 1,700′ total vertical climbing as the trail climbs up and down over the 11+ miles.

HST Day 1 Details
Distance: 11.5 miles / 18.2 km
Time: 7.5 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 1,692 ft / 516 m
Dogs: No
When to go: July-Sept.
We took the first shuttle from Lodgepole to the trailhead at Crescent Meadow and started our High Sierra Trail adventure.

There are several campground sites along the way to Bearpaw Meadow, including Mehrten Creek, Nine Mile Creek and Buck Creek. Each presents a water crossing, along with some smaller crossings. Rangers warn that some of these creek crossings may be hazardous early in the summer, but none were problematic for us in mid-July, and all were fun to navigate.

Take the shuttle from Lodgepole to Crescent Meadow The western trailhead for the High Sierra Trail

Our one and only bear sighting the entire trip came just 10 minutes into our trip – right off the side of the trail spotting a mother and two cubs. We were glad they were a safe distance from the trail!

Bear sighting on the High Sierra Trail

About one mile in, you reach Eagle’s View, our first great view of the 7,000 foot deep canyon that is the Kaweah River’s middle fork and the Great Western Divide – our eastern ascent target for day two.

Our first epic view on the HST Eagle View Panorama on the High Sierra Trail

We lunched at Mehrten Creek – a beautiful rock formation with water and a wonderful rest spot halfway to Bearpaw Meadow.

Mehrten Creek on the High Sierra Trail

Buck Creek on the High Sierra Trail Bridge over Buck Creek

After crossing the Buck Creek bridge, there is one final steep set of switchbacks to get up to the ridge where Bearpaw Meadow High Sierra Camp and Campground are located. They even have t-shirts that say “Bearpaw High Sierra Camp – The Last Mile” – and they aren’t kidding – it’s a slog at the end of a long day.

The campground is situated off the ridge from the high sierra camp, and has lots of campsites, several bear boxes, water spigots and fire rings. It’s not the most picturesque of campgrounds on the High Sierra Trail, but serviceable for our first night.

We were the first group into the campground that day, and met Ranger Matt there. He was super nice and even showed us the best camp spot. And there were plenty of local deer coming to visit throughout the evening and the following morning.

Be sure to walk up the hill and check out the Bearpaw High Sierra Camp, a $200-$300/night tent resort with fancy meals and a gorgeous deck overlooking the canyon and the Great Western Divide. Unfortunately by the time we rolled in (after setting our camp) they had sold all the backpacker beer and brownies – oh well!

Bearpaw Camp on the High Sierra Trail

High Sierra Trail: Crescent Meadow to Bearpaw Meadow
Trail Map & Elevation Profile

Download file: HST Day 1 of 8 (7:9:16, 9:03:20AM).gpx

Next up?

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/hiking-the-high-sierra-trail-crescent-meadow-to-bearpaw-meadow/feed/ 6
Hiking the High Sierra Trail – An Overview https://socalhiker.net/overview-of-the-high-sierra-trail/ https://socalhiker.net/overview-of-the-high-sierra-trail/#comments Sat, 17 Sep 2016 22:32:22 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=83195 Hiking the High Sierra Trail

Lesser known than the famous John Muir Trail, the High Sierra Trail (HST) is in many ways just as historically significant as it’s longer and more famous brother. In 1928, Sequoia National Park was expanded from the western section famous for the giant Sequoia Grove all the way to the Eastern Sierra and Mt. Whitney. At that point, park officials had to decide how to travel from West to East, as there were currently no trails or roads. The decision was made not to build roads, but instead to build a trail. This project – the High Sierra Trail – would be a grand five-year national project of incredible engineering and trail building…one of the last such projects ever.

It is incredibly well documented in a short video done by a retired Sequoia National Park Ranger:

If after watching this video, you don’t want to immediately go backpack this trail, watch it again!

Trail Details
Distance: 72.2 miles
Time: 6-8 days
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 13,303 ft
Dogs: No
When to go: July-Sept
The High Sierra Trail has two great ascents – the first one over Kaweah Gap and the Great Western Divide, and the second over the Eastern Sierra and Trail Crest at Mt. Whitney. From the grandeur of Hamilton Lakes Basin and Precipice Lake, to the awe inspiring Big Arroyo and Kern River Valley, the High Sierra Trail is some of the best that Sequoia National Park has to offer. Then, the big finish where the High Sierra Trail, JMT and PCT all connect on the route up from Wallace Creek to Guitar Lake and Mt. Whitney gives all of the backpacking community a chance to come together in one grand finale!

Why hike the High Sierra Trail? It’s a great way to get views like these!

Big Arroyo on the High Sierra Trail

Expansive Big Arroyo

Stunning alpine meadows on the High Sierra Trail

High Alpine Meadow

Camping under Mt Whitney

Guitar Lake

Near the summit of Mt Whitney on the High Sierra Trail

Climbing Mt Whitney, the highest mountain in the contiguous 48 states.

High Sierra Trail Map & Elevation Profile

Here’s what the route looks like. You can click and zoom or expand the map to full-screen to see additional detail. You can download the GPX file for use with your GPS app.

Download file: HST Complete (Optimized).gpx

Getting to the Trail

As with all Sierra thru-hikes, the first challenge is figuring out transportation. With the High Sierra Trail, you start at Crescent Meadow on the Western edge of Sequoia National Park in the giant tree grove. You finish at Whitney Portal. The two locations are a six-hour drive apart.

Here was our solution:

  • Rent a car from Enterprise – one-way rental – to Visalia, CA airport.
  • Take the Sequoia Shuttle ($15 for two people/one-way) to Sequoia National Park.
  • Pickup our permits at the Lodgepole Visitor Center (open 7am to 3:30pm daily) and stay the night in Lodgepole Campground. Reservations are recommended and campsites run $22 per night.
  • Take the free in-park shuttle the next morning from Lodgepole to the trailhead at Crescent Meadow (the first shuttle leaves at 8 a.m.).
  • Use Eastern Sierra Shuttle to take us from Whitney Portal to Lone Pine hotel upon completion.
  • Get our son to come pick us up in Lone Pine and drive us home to Los Angeles (the KEY element).

We departed on a Friday, spending the night in Lodgepole. On Saturday morning at approximately 9 a.m.we began our 72-mile adventure to Mt. Whitney across the entire width of Sequoia National Park.

Eight Day Itinerary for the High Sierra Trail

The HST is the perfect length for a week-long trip with nine days (five weekdays and two weekends). Here is our itinerary:

Editor’s Note: Detailed photos, maps and narrative for each day will be published, one-per-day. As each day goes “live” the itinerary below will link to it. 

When to Hike the High Sierra Trail

The high passes on the High Sierra Trail hold snow sometimes even year round. In the spring, they can be practically impassable. Most HST trips are taken in July and August, but you’ll find smaller crowds in September after school starts.

Getting Permits for the HST

About 75% of the permits can be reserved in advance, with the remainder reserved for walk-in permits. You can check for permit availability here. Permits cost $10 plus $5 per person (so a permit for two people would cost $20). It’s important to remember that your permit reservation is not a permit. You’ll still need to pick it up at the Lodgepole Visitor Center either the day before you begin your hike (after 1:00 pm) or on the morning you begin your hike (before 10:00 am). To get a permit reservation, you will need to fax your application following these instructions.

High Sierra Trail Weather

Weather on the High Sierra Trail can be difficult to predict. If you’re hiking in the summer months, expect some cold nights and warm days. Afternoon thunderstorms are common in the Sierra Nevada, and you can even get a surprise snowstorm.

Your best bet is to check with the ranger before you pack for your trip for the latest forecast and conditions. For planning purposes, use Mountain Forecast. The high point on this trek is Mt. Whitney, so it’s a good reference point for the weather extremes.

Ready for More?

Next up: Day One on the High Sierra Trail.

Got questions about the High Sierra Trail? Join our HST discussion forum.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/overview-of-the-high-sierra-trail/feed/ 31
10 Overnight Backpack Trips in Southern California https://socalhiker.net/10-overnight-backpack-trips-southern-california/ https://socalhiker.net/10-overnight-backpack-trips-southern-california/#comments Thu, 14 Apr 2016 06:38:59 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=80138 The word is out. Southern California has a veritable plethora of hiking trails. And a plethora and a half of hikers exploring them. 99.9% of hikers are firmly in the day-hike only camp, and usually it’s just a matter of not knowing how to start and where to go to gain some backpacking experience.

With this in mind, I’ve come up with a list of ten great overnight backpacking trips. Most of these trips can be modified to make them easier or more challenging, depending on what you’re after. But they all provide a taste of outdoor adventure that can be enjoyed by anyone with a free night.

1. Crystal Cove State Park

Photo: teakwood

Most people don’t realize this, but Crystal Cove State Park in Orange County has several backcountry camps that you can use — and they have sweeping ocean views! The trails are busy during the day, but you can hike up and setup your camp after work and still have time to cook dinner and watch the sunset. And as the sun goes down, the day-hiker (and mountain biker) crowds go with it, leaving you with a pretty sweet view.

Why this trip rocks? My friend Tracy uses this park for what she calls a “gear shakedown” before any bigger trips, testing new gear in a relatively low-risk situation. It’s a great way to dip your toes into backpacking without traveling far.

2. Santa Cruz Trail

Spring wildflowers in the Santa Barbara backcountry

This is a longer, more strenuous out-and-back trip in the Santa Barbara backcountry that’s best done in the spring (it gets a bit too hot in the summer). Hike 10 miles in with 2,500′ vertical gain, setup camp by a stream under the shade of 100-year old oaks, and hike back the next day.

Why backpack this? The distance and elevation gain are an almost perfect match for a typical day on the John Muir Trail (although at a much lower altitude). It’s a good way to see how your body responds to the climb and the distance. Time it right, and you’ll be rewarded with a spectacular wildflower show.

3. Barker Valley in the Palomar Mountains

Fellow hiking blogger Scott Turner has a super guide to this great little overnight trip to Barker Valley in the Palomar Mountains in northeast San Diego County. It’s what I call an “upside-down” hike, meaning you go down 1000′ feet to the river, camp overnight, then hike up 1000′ to get back to the trailhead. But at 6.5 miles round trip, it makes a gentler introduction to backpacking.

Backpack this for… meadows, a river and a waterfall. And it’s dog-friendly. Woof!

4. Santa Anita Canyon

 

Rising out of the valley

You can stay at Hogee’s on Winter Creek, or Spruce Grove on the Gabrieleño Trail. And if you’re feeling ambition in the morning, you can bag Mt Wilson — one of the Six-Pack of Peaks. Here’s a guide to a grand loop up Gabrieleño to the summit and down via Winter Creek. You can hike it either direction, or modify it to suit you time and energy.

I love this overnighter for… a healthy dose of LA’s hiking history. Hoagie’s and Spruce Grove campgrounds date back a hundred years. And these lush canyons feel like a world away from the freeways and traffic jams.

5. Cucamonga Peak

Joan on the Approach to Cucamonga Peak

Joan and I backpacked to Cucamonga Peak and spent the night for our Six-Pack of Peaks Challenge (that’s her silhouetted in the setting sun en route to the summit. Pack in all your water (I took six liters).

Hike this for… the sunset. And the sunrise. And the stars and city lights in-between. We even saw the Disneyland fireworks from the summit! Did I mention this hike is also dog friendly? Woof!

6. Mt Baldy

 

Full Moon hike up Mt Baldy

Full Moon hike up Mt Baldy

Camping on the top of Mt Baldy is an experience. You have to pack in all your water. It’s cold, windy and exposed. But oh those sunrise and sunsets! And it’s dog friendly.

7. San Bernardino Peak

 

Photo: Mitch Barrie

Photo: Mitch Barrie

The San Bernardino Trail goes all the way up to San Bernardino Peak (and beyond). But you can stop at Limber Pine Flat and camp overnight.

Why on earth? For views like the one shown above. Says it all.

8. Catalina Island

Camp at Parsons Landing

Camp at Parsons Landing

You don’t have to hike the entire Trans-Catalina Trail to enjoy overnight backpacking on Catalina. Take the ferry from San Pedro into Two Harbors, and you can day hike to either Little Harbor or Two Harbors to Parsons Landing. Each is on a different side of the island, and each has it’s own distinct vibe.

Why backpack here? Are you serious? If you live in SoCal, you must do this at least once!

9. San Gorgonio

Sunset from our campsite at High Creek

Most people hike up San Gorgonio — the highest peak in Southern California — in a single day hike. But they would be missing out on views like this one, from my High Creek campsite in 2013. Another great option is Halfway Camp (supposedly halfway to the summit from the trailhead). And once you’ve spent the night, you don’t have to continue to San Gorgonio. But you probably will.

Why backpack San Gorgonio? Because it’s the tallest damn mountain in SoCal, and you should make the journey last as long as you can.

10. San Jacinto

First Look at Round Valley

San Jacinto is my personal favorite! I’ve been backpacking on this mountain since I was a teenager, and I’ll never tire of it. You can hike in from Idyllwild or take the tram up. I took my daughter up there on an overnight backpack trip before she even was walking!

Why is San Jacinto my favorite? Options to bag San Jacinto, or just go check out Wellman’s Divide. Beautiful alpine meadows, and peaks that remind me of the Sierra Nevada mountains. Here’s a peek at our overnight trip from the Tram to the summit of San Jacinto.

Wrapping Up

All of these overnight these overnight trips include some bureaucracy, usually in the form of a wilderness permit obtainable from the local ranger station.

Those are some of my top picks for short overnight backpack trips all over Southern California. Leave a comment to share your favorites. 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/10-overnight-backpack-trips-southern-california/feed/ 29
Hiking the Theodore Solomons Trail: Illilouette Creek to Merced River https://socalhiker.net/hiking-the-theodore-solomons-trail-illilouette-creek-to-merced-river/ https://socalhiker.net/hiking-the-theodore-solomons-trail-illilouette-creek-to-merced-river/#comments Tue, 21 Jul 2015 00:58:54 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=16237 Start Here

After starting the trail yesterday with a short 4.5 mile early evening hike, I woke up early to make breakfast–Oatmeal Unleashed washed down with Starbucks Via–and broke camp. We were hoping to potentially meet our friends Craig and Joanne who were hiking the same route but in the opposite direction.

Trail Details
Distance: 14.5 miles
Time: 5-7 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain (loss): 3,673′ (1,373′)
Dogs: No
When to go: July-September
They had started a day earlier, and had taken our car to the trailhead, while we drove theirs. Swapping this way, we would hike to our own vehicle and could just drive home when we finished. It’s a great way to hike sections of a long trail like the Theodore Solomons Trail without back-tracking.

We started off from our junction and headed up the trail. The grade was fairly easy, but climbed steadily. We soon discovered that this section of the trail had quite a few trees downed in winter, and no trail crews had been through here to clear the trail. I counted roughly 16 downed trees on this stretch of trail. In spite of that, the trail was well marked and easy to follow.

There were about 16 downed trees on this section of trail

Early on we ran across a group of six college-age backpackers headed to the Clark Range, but once we passed them, we saw no one else the entire day. We were right in Yosemite National Park, and yet it felt like we had the place to ourselves.

The gradual climb grew a bit steeper, and we stopped at mile 7.4 to take a break beside a scenic stretch of Illilouette Creek. We had already climbed over 1,700′.

We took a break next to a scenic cascade on Illilouette Creek.

Our original goal was to reach Upper Merced Lake, then reassess. If we felt good and the weather cooperated, we would press on over Merced Pass, getting as close as we could for tomorrow’s climb over 10,175′ Fernandez Pass.

At 8.1 miles, we had another boots-off creek crossing. The blue skies were turning cloudy, and those clouds were turning ominous.

We had a number of crossing where we had to take our boots off

We pressed on, stopping to don our rain shells and finally reached the junction with an unsigned use trail to Upper Merced Pass Lake. This was a short side trip to a scenic little lake.

Secluded Upper Merced Pass Lake

We found one poorly chosen campsite that looked like it had been flooded by rain and hail recently. You could see areas where someone had pitched a tent in the past. Today’s storm had turned it into a small creek.

We stopped here for lunch and decided that the weather was looking better. We continued on.

Merced Pass is the epitome of anti-climactic passes. At 9,295′, we had gained over 3,000 feet in elevation and hiked 10.8 miles, but there is no sign or marker, nor even a view to reward the accomplishment. The “pass” felt more like a saddle, but it made no difference.

Anti-climactic Merced Pass

This pass was a non-event. No views.

Being at the pass meant one thing: we had some downhill ahead of us.

Two miles downhill we reached the junction to Buck Camp, but stayed left toward Fernandez Pass. This section of trail was pretty dry. There were some small pools of water and a few rivulets trickling across the path, but no really good water sources for several miles.

We resolved to stop at the first promising camp area with good water.

At 14.5 miles, we came across a beautiful site along the Middle Fork of the Merced River. There weren’t any established campsites that we could find, but we found spots to setup camp not far from some beautiful cascades with pools filled with trout. A fisherman’s dream, no doubt. Too bad I don’t fish.

Middle Fork of the Merced River

We camped near here on the Merced River, with deep, trout-filled pools and roaring cascades. And other than us, absolutely no people.

Day Two By the Numbers

This was a long day for me. We hiked 14.5 miles, and climbed a total of 3,673′ vertically. Much of the trail was shaded, and the weather was perfect for hiking — a bit on the cool side. When we finally found a place to camp, we ate, filtered water, and went to bed early.

Tomorrow we would be climbing over Fernandez Pass. It would be my friend Will’s first time climbing above 10,000 feet.

Theodore Solomons Trail Map – Miles 4.5 to 19

Download file: tst-illilouette-to-middle-fork-merced-71115-74830am.gpx

Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Start Here There were about 16 downed trees on this section of trail We took a break next to a scenic cascade on Illilouette Creek. We had a number of crossing where we had to take our boots off Secluded Upper Merced Pass Lake Hail on the trail Anti-climactic Merced Pass Middle Fork of the Merced River

Tips for Miles 4.5-19

  • Up to Merced Pass, there were fairly regular creek crossing and opportunities to refill our water bottles. After Merced Pass, there was a stretch of nearly four miles with only a few trickles that might dry up. Be sure you’ve got at least a liter of water before you hit the pass.
  • Established camp sites are few and far between. Don’t setup a campfire unless it’s in an established fire ring.
  • Prepare for solitude. After we passed the one party of backpackers early on, we saw no one else all day.

More Resources

Yosemite National Park Weather Forecast

[forecast width=”100%” location=”95389″]

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/hiking-the-theodore-solomons-trail-illilouette-creek-to-merced-river/feed/ 2
Hiking the Theodore Solomons Trail: Glacier Point to Illilouette Creek https://socalhiker.net/hiking-the-theodore-solomons-trail-glacier-point-to-illilouette-creek/ https://socalhiker.net/hiking-the-theodore-solomons-trail-glacier-point-to-illilouette-creek/#comments Wed, 15 Jul 2015 03:56:08 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=16139 View of Half Dome, Nevada and Vernal Falls from near Glacier Point

The Theodore Solomons Trail is an epic alternative to the immensely popular John Muir Trail. It’s roughly 270 miles in length, and runs largely parallel to–and west of–the JMT. The TST was conceived back in 1974 to help alleviate the crowding on the JMT (yes, even back then). Unlike the JMT, the TST is not an official trail, but a route stitched together from existing trails. Some of those trails are no longer maintained, and many of them are rarely travelled. My goal is to hike the entire trail in sections and assess the viability of the route as an alternate to the JMT.

Trail Details
Distance: 4.5 miles
Time: 2 hours
Difficulty: Moderate
Elevation gain (loss): 652 ft (1,448 ft)
Dogs: No
When to go: June-October
I’ll be sharing my hikes as I experience them, like I did with my JMT trail guide, I’m reporting southbound. And that brings me to this post. This segment of the Theodore Solomons Trail begins at the northern terminus: Glacier Point in Yosemite National Park. Over three days, my friend Will Cronan and I hiked roughly 30 miles south to Clover Meadows, just outside the Ansel Adams Wilderness on the western side of the Sierra Mountains.

This hike was a short, sweet start to the first section of the Theodore Solomons Trail. We had swapped cars with friends who were starting at Clover Meadows and hiking north. Our permit was for a Saturday start, but we arrived at the Wawona Ranger Station around 3:30 PM Friday and were lucky enough to get a walk-in permit for Friday. Permit in hand, we drove to Glacier Point, took the requisite photos of Half Dome, Nevada and Vernal Falls, and at exactly 5:06pm we started hiking down the Panorama Trail.

Trailhead for the Panorama Trail

The trail here is difficult to detect, because it actually starts over the granite directly next to this sign.

The Panorama Trail is a beautiful route that leads down to the top of Nevada Falls. We followed it down to the junction towards Illilouette Falls, and then stayed right to follow Illilouette Creek upstream.

Illilouette Falls, and the basin we would be traveling in for the next two days in the distance

Look closely and you can see a glimpse of Illilouette Falls. Our destination was in the distance.

Our trail descended nearly 1,000 feet over the first 2.5 miles, stopping only when we reached the granite channel which Illilouette rushes through. Here we followed the gentle ascent along the creek, with beautiful views and the sounds of cascade.

A typical cascade as we hiked along Illilouette Creek

At 3.8 miles we crossed a tributary feeding Illilouette from the north, and promptly began our first decent climb. We ascended over section of forest scarred by a past wildfire, with new growth sprouting everywhere among the charred and branch-less trunks standing watch over the mountainside.

We climbed up through an area scarred by a past wildfire

Up until this point, we had only passed a few day hikers heading up toward Glacier Point. We didn’t encounter any other backpackers on the trail. Finally, at 4.2 miles, we reached a junction with a trail from Mono Meadows in the north, and saw several small groups of backpackers camped near the creek. This was the general area where we planned to camp on this short day — having started late.

Almost to Camp

We took our boots off to wade across Illilouette Creek — the first of many such “boots off” crossings — and hunted for a suitable campsite. Up the bluff on the south side of Illilouette was another junction, and not far upstream an established campsite that we would call home for the night.

Crossing the Illilouette

Will crossing the Illilouette

A few notes — the area of these two junctions (one on either side of the creek) is the first place where you can camp when backpacking. It’s also the last place on this trip that we saw other backpackers camped. The remainder of the 25.5 miles did not see a single occupied camp, and we saw a few people. It felt “busy” here at our first night’s camp (even though our campsite was far away from the others), but the remainder of the route felt very “wild” and highly travelled.

Also, the National Park trail signs claimed it was 3.5 miles, but my GPS clocked it at 4.5 (even after cleaning up the noise on the route). As with most things in life, the truth probably lies somewhere between.

There was plenty of water in Illilouette Creek, though the ranger warned us not to rely on small tributaries. We didn’t see any problem there, either, but there had been thunderstorms for two days prior to our trip.

We built a campfire and unwound. Today’s mileage was a bonus. Miles in the bank, so to speak. We effectively had a 4.5 mile head start on tomorrow’s hike towards Fernandez Pass.

Glacier Point to Illilouette Creek Trail Map

Download file: Theodore_Solomons_Trail_SOBO_Mile_1-4.gpx

Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

We were the first people this year to head over Fernandez Pass (according to our ranger) View of Half Dome, Nevada and Vernal Falls from near Glacier Point Trailhead for the Panorama Trail Illilouette Falls, and the basin we would be traveling in for the next two days in the distance A typical cascade as we hiked along Illilouette Creek We climbed up through an area scarred by a past wildfire

Additional Tips

  • If you hike this as a shuttle, note it is a LONG drive from Clover Meadows to Glacier Point including many miles on a bumpy gravel road.  Allow sufficient time and fuel.
  • When parking at the trailhead, do not leave anything with any scent in your car (including air fresheners, toothpaste, deodorant, etc.). This is bear country, and they have ways of “opening” your car that you might not appreciate.
  • Trail conditions where great throughout this section, which was not surprising given the number of occupied camps seen that night near the creek.

More Resources

Yosemite National Park Weather Forecast

[forecast width=”100%” location=”95389″]

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/hiking-the-theodore-solomons-trail-glacier-point-to-illilouette-creek/feed/ 2
SoCalHiker Tech: DeLorme inReach Explorer Review https://socalhiker.net/socalhiker-tech-delorme-inreach-explorer-review/ https://socalhiker.net/socalhiker-tech-delorme-inreach-explorer-review/#comments Tue, 09 Jun 2015 22:35:46 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=15697 DeLorme InReach Explorer review

My first experience using the DeLorme inReach Explorer was along the John Muir Trail last summer. Not only was it reassuring to know that if I needed emergency care or evacuation, I would have dependable communication with search-and-rescue (SAR) but it proved useful in many other ways.

The DeLorme inReach Explorer can provide you with real time weather reports. Last summer was a little wet in the Sierra, to say the least. Storms cropped up almost every afternoon, but with the inReach Explorer, I was able to send a text to a specific address, and the free service sent back the weather forecast for the current time as well as for the next few days. That proved to be exceptionally helpful as we tried to plan our days around rain, sleet, hail and lightning storms. You can send an unlimited number of any of the three pre-set messages with any plan (Safety, Recreation, Expedition, Extreme). So by defining “wx now” to “+17204632647” as oDeLorme inReach Explorerne of your pre-set messages, these messages will never count against your message quota.

There were also a few fires last summer engulfing sections of the the JMT in smoke. It was a little worrisome because we didn’t know if the fire posed a viable threat or if it was a safe distance away. With the DeLorme inReach Explorer, I was able to use the two way texting capability to text friends and family to find out if we needed to turn back or keep going. This information was also helpful to other hikers we met along the way who didn’t have any means of communication outside of the trail. Needless to say, everyone was greatly relieved to hear that there was no real risk of fire crossing our path and that the fire was many miles away and relatively under control.

The DeLorme InReach requires that you enroll in a subscription plan in order to receive service however, you can suspend your service at any time. Suspending your service simply puts your service on hold until you choose to reactivate it. This allows you to use the InReach for either a month at a time or year round. Plans range in price from the Safety Plan at $11.95 per month to The Extreme plan at $99.00 per month.

For the latest details on subscription plan options, check the DeLorme website.

Of course there are other excellent satellite rescue devices on the market including the SPOT Gen3 and the ACR Personal Locator Beacon, but I chose the inReach because of its two way texting capability. The SPOT is a great device if two way texting is not a priority for you and it can track your hike. It also follows a subscription model. The ACR Personal Locator Beacon is probably one of the best rescue devices out there. It does not provide tracking points or any other bells and whistles, but if you need rescuing, it does that flawlessly without having to pay for a monthly subscription.

There are a couple of things to be aware of with the remote possibility that the DeLorme inReach Explorer stops working. Fear not, there are a couple of solutions to this problem. First you can reset the device, and most of the time this rectifies the situation and you will be back on trail. If an inReach exhibits an issue powering on, pairing to a companion Android or iOS smartphone, or acquiring a GPS fix, you can perform a soft reset to attempt to resolve the issue.

Performing a Soft Reset

  1. Power off the inReach and disconnect it from any power source.
  2. Press and hold down both the X button and the Down button of the directional pad simultaneously for 60 seconds.
  3. Release the X button and Down button and power the device on normally.
  4. Test the inReach Explorer to confirm the issue has been resolved.

Also, make sure that you use the original cable that came with the inReach. I made the mistake of substituting a longer usb cable that I had lying around the house, but the quality of the cable didn’t carry enough bandwidth to power or charge the device. I had to have the original cable shipped to a resupply location and lost days of tracking, and peace of mind.

Although I didn’t use the GPS features, the inReach Explorer keeps the primary inReach function set, adding a full suite of navigation features to eliminate the need for a separate GPS unit (in theory). Let me note that the GPS functionality is not delivered on a large screen and lacks a lot of detail due to the small screen, but it does include a very simple map view that allows users to navigate with routes, waypoints and tracks. This is great functionality if you are hiking off-trail. The unit also includes a digital compass, barometric altimeter and accelerometer, adding extra navigational functionality while tracking speed, elevation, distance and more.

The Bottom Line

Overall I’m very happy with the DeLorme inReach Explorer. It has provided me, my family and friends with assurance that all is well on the trail as well as the peace of mind that help is just a button press away, if necessary.

The DeLorme inReach Explorer lists for $379.95 and the inReach (without navigation) lists for $299.95. You can find them for less on Amazon.

Thru-hiking the JMT

The author on her thru-hike of the John Muir Trail

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/socalhiker-tech-delorme-inreach-explorer-review/feed/ 8
Backpacking over Bishop Pass to LeConte Canyon https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-bishop-pass-to-leconte-canyon/ https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-bishop-pass-to-leconte-canyon/#comments Wed, 31 Dec 2014 06:50:27 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=13769 Muir Taco Adventure - Bishop Pass to LeConte Canyon

I admit it. I have a soft spot in my heart for the Sierras.

I fell in love with the Sierras on my first backpack trip there back in 1978. The first time I thru-hiked the John Muir Trail in 1980, it was official. I was hooked.

Earlier this spring I attended the first ever JMT JAM event in the Santa Barbara backcountry. There were a number of people who were JMT alumni as well as folks getting ready for their first trip this summer, and dreamers looking forward to hiking it in the next few years. And while I knew I couldn’t do a third thru-hike this year, I did start thinking about a way to stay connected — by bringing some trail magic to JMT thru-hikers.

Trail Details
Distance: 43 miles
Time: 4 days
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 7,650 ft
Dogs: Yes, outside of Kings Canyon NP
When to go: July-September
Thus was born the #MuirTaco Adventure. Our goal was simple. Hike in to the John Muir Trail, carrying fresh carne asada, avocados, cheese, tortillas, cilantro — all the fixings for tacos — AND some cold brews to wash it down. Thru-hikers call it trail magic — that welcome gift of something you thought you wouldn’t see for another week or two, in the most unexpected of places. 

Our plan was to hike in over Bishop Pass, down into LeConte Canyon in Kings Canyon National Park. If all went well, we’d hike up to Muir Pass and cook up some tacos at the Muir Hut, then hike back down to camp and back out over Bishop Pass the next day. It was a tall order. 

Day One – South Lake to Bishop Lake

The first day, I drove up the 395 to Bishop and picked up the permit. My co-horts in this adventure, Derek and PD, arrived the night before and struck out earlier in the day, so I would be hiking solo until I caught up with them.

I was starting out with a much heavier-than-normal pack weight. With water and food, it weighed about 50 pounds. Ugh.

I started out at the South Lake trailhead west of Bishop. South Lake itself is a water source for Bishop, and due to drought conditions was shockingly low. Fortunately the other lakes upstream are not drained for water and still looked healthy.

I was climbing in the heat of the day, but there were some spots of shade along the way. When I reached Long Lake, I dropped my pack for a short break and a snack.

Taking a Short Break on Long Lake

Recharged, I hit the trail. There are a lot of beautiful lakes along this trail and some interesting spur trails to places like Treasure Lakes and Chocolate Lake. I made a note that this would be a great place to explore in more depth sometime in the future.

After 5.5 miles, I reached Bishop Lake. Now to see if I could find Derek and PD. I dropped my pack and clambered up the highest nearby hill to get a better view, and saw the campsite they had found on the south side of the lake.

Not a Bad View

The view from my tent was not too shabby.

The sun soon dropped below the mountains, casting long shadows and a golden glow across the way.

Bishop Lake Camp

Day Two – Bishop Lake to Little Pete Meadow

In the morning, I setup my GoPro to record a little time-lapse video of the sunrise as we cooked breakfast and fueled up for the day.

PD making his way across the inlet to Bishop Lake

PD making his way across the inlet to Bishop Lake

From Bishop Lake, we had a fairly short (but steep) climb to Bishop Pass.

Bishop Pass is just under 12,000 feet, but we weren’t feeling any ill effects of the altitude. In some years, there can be snow up year through the summer, but this was a dry year with low snowfall. It looked more like a moonscape.

From the pass, it was all downhill to LeConte Canyon. We cruised through Dusy Basin.

Looking Down on Dusy Basin

Like an amphitheater for giants, Dusy Basin is dotted with lakes and a few clumps of trees, but ringed with rugged, craggy peaks.

Dusy Basin Panorama

Finally we dropped down below 10,000 feet and under the tree line, and began the final series of switchbacks into LeConte Canyon.

LeConte Canyon Panorama

At the bottom, we finally reached the junction with the John Muir Trail. We had descended nearly 3,600′ — and Derek’s feet were feeling it.

Down in LeConte Canyon, we followed a relatively gentle trail up the Kings River to Little Pete Meadow — just a mile, mile and a half further. Our campsite? Pretty perfect. We were able to take a cold plunge in the snow-fed river to wash away the grime and sweat from a long, hot day on the trail, as deer meandered through our campsite, paying no attention to us whatsoever.

Deer at Little Pete Meadow

The best part? Being below 10,000 feet, we were able to have a campfire to keep us warm through dinner and well into the night.

Day Three: Tacos y Cerveza

Our plan for day three was to hike 7 miles and over 3,000 vertical feet up to Muir Pass, where we would cook up some carne asada tacos, share some beer and then hike 7 miles back down to camp. We wouldn’t have to carry all our gear, but it would still be fairly heavy (in case you’re wondering, a single six-pack weighs in just over 5 pounds).

Early morning light in LeConte Canyon

Derek’s foot was still a little touch-and-go, so we played it by ear. We headed out, knowing that we would have to stop and turn back by 11am.

As it turned out, we made it within about a mile of Muir Pass. Derek’s foot was hurting. He offered to hang out while PD and I continued on, but we did the smart thing and stayed together. What was originally a #MuirTacoHut adventure was now simply the #MuirTaco adventure.

We headed back down toward Little Pete Meadow, keeping a eye out for the “Whale” we had heard and seen photos of.

The JMT Whale in LeConte Canyon

We had been looking for it on our way up, but somehow hiked right by it. It’s clearly visible from the trail, and in fact there’s a nice campsite at the spot. Fortunately, we spied in on our return and decided that this would be our kitchen for our pop-up taco stand.

I brought out 3 lbs of marinated carne asada, corn tortillas, fresh cilantro, fresh grated cheddar cheese, two ripe avocados and hot sauce. After cooking up the meat, I used a little olive oil in a fry pan to soften the tortillas. Derek and PD took our cans of beer and found a clever way to cool them in the ice-cold stream.

Pop-up Taco Stand

Soon, we were handing out hot tacos and cold beer to ecstatic JMT thru-hikers.

Happy Thru-Hikers

Thankfully, we had enough for ourselves, too.

Tacos on the JMT

After cleaning up, we headed back down to our camp. We had decided that rather than hike a long 14 miles out on the fourth day, we’d make our way up towards Dusy Basin as far as we could.

We ended up camping just below 10,000 feet — allowing us to enjoy a campfire again but cutting Day Four’s climb to just 2,000 vertical feet.

Day Four: Back Over Bishop Pass and Home Again

Our final day was a long, slow climb up Bishop Pass. We had to climb over Bishop Pass, hike down to our cars, and make the drive back to SoCal — all in one day.

Morning on Day 4

Most of the trail through Dusy Basin was exposed, and the sun was shining brightly.

We stopped for a snack at Bishop Pass, where another hiker suggested we try the Burger Barn in Bishop.

Our appetites properly whet, we hoofed it back to our cars at the trailhead.

Post Script

The first #MuirTaco Adventure was an experience I’ll never forget. Was it a little crazy to carry all the tacos and beer so many miles? Maybe. But it was worth it. In fact, I’m already at work planning the 2015 #MuirTaco Adventure.

Who’s in?

Bishop Pass to Little Pete Meadow Trail Map

Download file: bishop-pass-to-le-conte-canyon-9414-120130pm.gpx

Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

More Bishop Pass to LeConte Canyon Resources

  • I hiked this trail with Derek from 100Peaks.com and his friend PD. Be sure to check out Derek’s trip report for a different perspective on the trip.
  • A lot of people like to stop at Schatt’s Bakery in Bishop, but I have to say, Burger Barn really hit the spot — and we didn’t feel out of place even with a couple days of trail grime.

South Lake Trailhead Weather Forecast

[forecast width=”100%” location=”SOUTH LAKE CABIN NEAR BISHOP 16S CA US”]

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-bishop-pass-to-leconte-canyon/feed/ 8
Mt San Jacinto via the Palm Springs Aerial Tram https://socalhiker.net/hiking-mt-san-jacinto-via-the-palm-springs-aerial-tram/ https://socalhiker.net/hiking-mt-san-jacinto-via-the-palm-springs-aerial-tram/#comments Fri, 29 Aug 2014 02:13:24 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=13141 Backpacking to Mt San Jacinto via the Palm Springs Aerial Tram

Mt. San Jacinto was one of the first big peaks I bagged as a teenager and I’m still drawn to it many years later. This route starts at the top of the Palm Springs Aerial Tram — a treat in itself — and although it’s the “easiest” route it’s by no means easy. This out-and-back trail travels 11 miles round trip with 3000 feet of vertical elevation climbed. At an elevation of 10,834 feet above sea level, Mt. San Jacinto offers amazing 360-degree views and an alpine environment that surprises first-time visitors.

Trail Details
Distance: 11 miles
Time: 5-6 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 3020 ft
Dogs: No
When to go: Summer
I’ve hiked this trail many times as a day hike, but it’s also makes a great overnight backpack. As far as backpacking trips go, it’s an easy one. Hike a gently climbing 2.3 miles from the tram station to Round Valley, where there is water and a number of beautiful campsites situated on the hills surrounding an idyllic meadow. From your campsite, you can slack pack to the summit, then swing back by camp for a second night, or break camp and hike back to the tram.

Why bother backpacking this what you could hike in a day? Why not!?  It’s a beautiful setting for sleeping under the stars, and gives you a chance for an early morning start to the summit of San Jacinto. And it’s a great way to dip your toes in the waters if you’re new to backpacking, or just trying out some new gear.

Getting to the Trail

Start by driving to the Palm Springs Aerial Tram, about a two-hour drive from Los Angeles. There is free parking at the tram station. Buy your tram ticket and get ready to ride to the top!

The tram itself is pretty cool. It’s one of the largest rotating trams in the world, and climbs nearly 8,000 feet in the short 20 minute ride. At the top is the Mountain Station, replete with gift shop, cafe, restaurant, lockers, restrooms and yes, tourists aplenty. Many people ride the tram just for the experience or to escape the heat of Palm Springs below. Most of them don’t go far from the tram station.

Trail Description

Exit the tram station, walking down the concrete switchbacks to Long Valley and follow the signs for Round Valley. If you’re here for a day hike, you can stop at the seasonal Long Valley ranger station and get your self-issued permit. If you’re here overnight, you’ve already got your permit in hand, right? Yep, you’ll need to apply in advance, and by snail-mail. Here’s the details (PDF).

Continue past the ranger station, paying close attention to the trail signs. The trail mainly follows a seasonal creek up the valley. In the spring, it’s lively and bubbling. With the current low rain levels this year the creek was bone dry.

The Creek is Dry

A few weeks after we backpacked here, some friends were hiking this as a day hike. As shown here, it was bone dry on their way up (and the skies were blue and cloudless). Before they reached the summit, the weather had changed with a vicious monsoon thunderstorm. Not only were they forced to cut their hike short, but this creek had become a raging torrent. The lesson? Be prepared for changes to the weather, including cold, rain and (depending on the month) even snow.

Continuing on the trail, you’ll pass a couple of junctions, but the trail is well-marked. Stick to the signs towards Round Valley (or the summit) and you’ll be in good shape. Soon, we got our first glimpse of the meadow in Round Valley.

First Look at Round Valley

At 2.3 miles, you’ll reach the far end of the Round Valley meadow. There is a seasonal ranger station as well as a water source. Be sure to filter or purify the water from this source.

Round Valley

The campsites in Round Valley are well spaced to provide a sense of privacy, but you’ll see and hear other people. It’s not complete solitude. There are also several pit toilets that serve the area, but BYOTP (bring your own toilet paper).

Setting up Camp

Why backpack this trail that most people hike as a day hike. Because we were able to sit back and enjoy the quiet beauty of this wonderful valley. We enjoyed a leisurely dinner, drank some boxed wine, and gazed at the stars above. And in the morning, we had a great breakfast and still were on the trail before the first tram reached Mountain Station, giving us fewer people and cooler temperatures for the climb to the summit.

Round Valley to the Summit of San Jacinto

We left our campsite setup and slack-packed to the summit. Start by retracing your steps to the trail junction at the Round Valley water source, then take the trail up the valley towards Wellman’s Divide. This trail climbs steadily on a well-engineered trail for a mile, finally reaching the stunning southern vistas of the divide.

View from Wellman's Divide

There is a junction at the divide marked by a trail sign. Be sure you head north towards San Jacinto Peak.

The trail runs diagonally across the east flank of Jean Peak, pausing briefly at a flat cleft at 10,000 feet before continuing north on the east side of San Jacinto. The trail have very little shade and direct sun all morning. Sun protection is essential.

Side of Jean Mountain

One more mile in this direction and the trail switches back, heading south west for .3 miles to Saddle Junction. Here the trail meets up with the Marion Mountain Trail that starts outside of Idyllwild, and turns north again for the final push to the summit.

Saddle Junction

We paid a visit to the hut on San Jacinto, then boulder-hopped the remaining 100 yards or so to the 10,834′ summit of San Jacinto. Distance from the tram to the summit: 5.5 miles. But because we had backpacked to Round Valley first, it was only 3.5 miles for us.

San Jacinto Hut Selfie

We were one of the first groups of hikers to reach the summit, but soon after the first hikers off the tram started arriving, and a steady stream began to arrive.

From here, we retraced our steps down to Round Valley. On our way down, we were stopped by SoCal Hiker reader Josh — who thanked us for the site and shared how he was in the process of completing the Six-Pack of Peaks.

A bit further still we ran into Oshie (@purpleosh— another friend of SoCal Hiker that we knew through Twitter. She was training for a big Sierra backpack trip.

We reached our camp, packed up and headed to the tram. By the time we got there, the day had warmed up considerably. We were thankful for our early start.

This route up San Jacinto from the tram is a very popular hike, both as a day hike or as an overnight backpack. I’ve done it both ways, many times, and really encourage you to give the backpacking option a try.

Overview of the Trail from the Tram to Round Valley to San Jacinto Peak

Overview of the trail from the tram to San Jacinto Peak

Mount San Jacinto via the Tram Trail Map

PRO TIP: I track all my hikes using GaiaGPS. It’s the best solution for staying on the right trail, it works even when you don’t have cell service, and there are versions for iOS and Android. The app is free, and you can get a discounted membership for maps here.

Mt San Jacinto Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Mt San Jacinto Hiking & Backpacking Tips

  • If you want to camp overnight, you’ll need to get a permit in advance from the ranger station in Idyllwild. Call the station with the dates you’re interested in, fill in the the downloadable permit application, then mail in your check with a self-addressed, stamped envelope. Yes, it’s all done by mail, so allow sufficient time.

More Mt San Jacinto Resources

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/hiking-mt-san-jacinto-via-the-palm-springs-aerial-tram/feed/ 41
Cooper Canyon Falls https://socalhiker.net/hiking-cooper-canyon-falls/ https://socalhiker.net/hiking-cooper-canyon-falls/#comments Wed, 27 Aug 2014 15:14:28 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=13078 Backpacking to Cooper Canyon

Cooper Canyon Falls is a beautiful waterfall that flows almost year round, but roars in April-May as the spring snow melts. The falls can be spectacular when you time your hike right, and I’m surprise more people don’t talk about this trail.

This hike includes a side trip to Cooper Canyon Campground — a wilderness campsite right on the Pacific Crest Trail — making this an easy hike to modify for an overnight backpacking trip. It’s not long, but it it has some great features and makes a great shake-down trip for testing your gear and getting comfortable with your pack weight before a longer trip.

Trail Details
Distance: 6 miles
Time: 2-3 hours
Difficulty: Moderate
Elevation gain: 907 ft
Dogs: Yes
When to go: Spring to Fall
Although we hiked this as a day hike, you could shorten the journey by heading straight Cooper Canyon Falls and back, skipping the side trip to the campground and cutting the total distance in half. We wanted to check out the campground first hand.

Getting to the Trailhead

The trailhead is found at the very back of the Buckhorn Campground, about 33 miles back from La Cañada-Flintridge off Highway 2 in the Angeles National Forest (Google map).

Trail Description

Start at the Burkhart Trail and head down. Yes, this is one of those trails where the elevation gain is all on the way out. Some people prefer to get the vertical out of the way first, but that’s not really an option for this trip. But it’s worth it. 

Heading down the Burkhart Trail

The trail descends down a mostly shady canyon with a babbling creek at the bottom. The Buckhorn Campground provides car camping, and a lot of people were exploring and playing in the creek not far from the trailhead. We soon left them behind as we traveled further down.

Redwoods

I was surprised to see a number of redwood trees — an unusual site in southern California.

Trail Markers

At the 1.2 mile mark, the trail reaches a junction with the Pacific Crest Trail. The falls are to the right only  a few hundred yards down the trail. You’ll have to scramble down the embankment to reach them, and there was a handy rope to make getting down (and back up) a bit easier.

Detour to Cooper Canyon Falls

Look for the steep scramble down to the base of the falls.

I was surprised to see fairly decent-sized fish swimming in the pool below the falls! The waterfall and creek were beautiful in spite of the drought. In wetter years as the snow melts, Cooper Canyon Falls are spectacular.

Here’s a shot from Kolby “The Hike Guy” Kirk taken during his 2011 hike on the PCT:

Kolby Kirk at Cooper Canyon Falls

Doubling back to the junction, we took the PCT toward the Cooper Canyon Campground. This was about 1.5 miles up another canyon, and we ran into a group of PCT thru-hikers headed the same way. The campground itself feels quite developed, even though you have to hike back there. There are two pit toilets, picnic tables and plenty of area for tents — making it suitable for groups. And the creek runs just behind the camp area, providing a water source.

Cooper Canyon Camp

Personally I wouldn’t choose this camp for a quiet getaway, but for a group looking for an easy way to test the waters and give backpacking a try, this could be ideal. And it gives you a chance to actually backpack a section of the epic Pacific Crest Trail.

Cooper Canyon Falls Trail Map

Download file: Cooper Canyon Falls.gpx

Cooper Canyon Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

 

Cooper Canyon Tips

  • No permits are required for the Cooper Canyon Camp. There are six, first-come, first-serve hike-in sites.
  • Water is typically available from the stream at Cooper Canyon Camp, but should be treated. Flow may be low or non-existent in dry years during the height of summer.
  • An Adventure Pass is required to park at the Burkhart Trailhead.
  • After the hike, grab a burger and a beer at a favorite biker destination — Newcomb’s Ranch on your way back.

Cooper Canyon Weather Forecast

[forecast width=”100%” location=”93553″]

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/hiking-cooper-canyon-falls/feed/ 21
Talking Ultralight Backpacking on #trailtime https://socalhiker.net/talking-ultralight-backpacking-on-trailtime/ https://socalhiker.net/talking-ultralight-backpacking-on-trailtime/#comments Wed, 27 Aug 2014 02:19:09 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=13534 August 28, 2014 I will be talking about ultralight backpacking on #trailtime

Join me this Thursday, August 28th at 3pm PDT when I’ll be co-hosting the weekly #trailtime tweet chat. The topic? Ultralight backpacking.

It’s not just about drilling holes in your tools or snipping the labels of clothes to shave ounces, but a practical discussion about how to have more fun, go further, and feel better carrying a little less weight on the trail.

How to Participate

All you need is a Twitter account to join in. You can search for the hashtag #trailtime and watch for the questions. Many people find it easier to use a computer rather than a phone, and tools like the Twitter app, Tweetdeck or websites like twchat.com can make it easier to follow the chat. When you’re ready to answer a question, just prefix your tweet with “A1:” (for Answer #1) and include the #trailtime hashtag so others in the chat will see it.

The good folks over at Sierra Trading Post host #trailtime every Thursday at 3pm Pacific. It’s a great way to connect with other people who love outdoor adventure.

See you on Thursday, and if you’re not already following me on Twitter… do it now!

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/talking-ultralight-backpacking-on-trailtime/feed/ 1
Lost Coast Trail: Miller Flat to Black Sands Beach https://socalhiker.net/lost-coast-trail-miller-flat-to-black-sands-beach/ https://socalhiker.net/lost-coast-trail-miller-flat-to-black-sands-beach/#comments Sun, 24 Aug 2014 01:42:01 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=13420 Last Day on the Lost Coast Trail

Today was our fourth and final day on the Lost Coast Trail. The last day of any backpacking trip is always bittersweet. We looked forward to sleeping in a bed and eating a meal that wasn’t rehydrated. Yet we want to linger and savor the sense of peace and connectedness we’ve enjoyed on the trail.

Trail Details
Distance: 10 miles
Time: 5 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 75 ft
Dogs: Yes
When to go: Year-round
It seemed fitting that our final day would also be our longest mileage. We had 10 miles between us and our Xterra at the trailhead. And we needed to cover the first 4.5 miles before the tide started coming in.

Our tide chart told us that high tide peaked at 7:45am. We broke camp in the morning mist and headed south down Miller Flat. One mile south of Big Flat Creek, the terrace ends and the trail heads down to the beach. We arrived a bit early, and the surf still lapped the rock outcrops. We dropped our packs and enjoyed the smell of the salt air and the sound of the waves crashing. The cobbled beach stones chattered as the surf pushed and pulled them down the beach.

Waiting for the Tide to Recede on the LCT

Soon we were joined by two other groups of backpackers. The first — an older group of four brothers and their father; the second a group of three twenty-somethings — one hiking barefoot. One by one each group started back down the Lost Coast as the tide began to recede. We unconsciously created space between each party, so we still had the sense of having the trail mostly to ourselves.

50 Shades of Grey

The entire Lost Coast Trail is beautiful and surprisingly diverse. But this 4.5 mile section from the south end of Miller Flat to Gitchell Creek may have been my favorite section of the trail. You walk on the beach. The mountains and the forest drop precipitously down to the beach itself. At high tide, the surf meets the forest.

The close proximity of thick forested hills provides hiding spots for the deer, bear and other creatures whose prints you will often see in the sand. It’s odd to think of a bear or a deer on the beach, but here its quite normal. And who can blame them!? The scenery is absolutely breathtaking.

Along this section are two popular camp areas at Shipman Creek and Buck Creek. These often fill up, which was one reason we stayed at Miller Flat.

The next mile beyond Gitchell Creek shows signs of signifcant erosion — a reminder that the sea is continually reshaping the coastline.

Boulders on Black Sands Beach

At mile 8.2 there are two significant boulders on the beach. When you reach these, you’re in the home stretch. Beyond these rocks the beach widens, and on a clear day you can pick out a few homes on the bluffs of Shelter Cove two miles away.

Black Sands Beach Trailhead

The Black Sands Beach trailhead parking is on a bluff between Telegraph and Humboldt Creeks. Continue past Telegraph Creek, then head up the north side of Humboldt Creek and you’ll see the walkway.

Lost Coast Trail: Day Four Trail Map

Download file: Lost Coast Trail Day 4.gpx

Day Four on the Lost Coast: Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

The Lost Coast Trail

After the Hike

We stowed our gear and I put on a fresh shirt that I left in the car, then headed for lunch in Shelter Cove. From there, we drove the long, windy road back to the 101 and turned south. Our destination? A civilized finish to the trip with a stay at the Glendeven Inn in Mendocino. Highly recommended.

Shelter Cove Weather Forecast

[forecast width=”100%” location=”95589″]

The Lost Coast Trail
]]>
https://socalhiker.net/lost-coast-trail-miller-flat-to-black-sands-beach/feed/ 13
Lost Coast Trail: Spanish Flat to Miller Flat https://socalhiker.net/lost-coast-trail-spanish-flat-to-miller-flat/ https://socalhiker.net/lost-coast-trail-spanish-flat-to-miller-flat/#respond Sat, 23 Aug 2014 02:54:02 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=13419 Climbing on Solid Ground

The Lost Coast Trail has several sections which are impassable at high tide, and it is essential that you bring a tide chart along to avoid becoming trapped in one of these spots.

Trail Details
Distance: 7.5 miles
Time: 4-5 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 100 ft
Dogs: Yes
When to go: Year-round
Today would be the only day of our adventure with no impassable sections. It was a pleasure knowing we didn’t have to watch the clock or worry about getting to any particular point before the tide came in.

I was the first one up, and took some time to play with my Olloclip macro lens for an early morning micro-adventure, cataloguing the various wildflowers right at our campsite. It never ceases to amaze me how brilliant and beautiful the world is, and often hidden in plain sight.

No more than half a mile down the trail we passed another Lost Coast cabin further down Spanish Flat, looking well-kept and lived in.

Lost Coast Cabin

At the one mile mark, we crossed through a shady thicket of low trees at Oat Creek. The fog kept the temperatures perfect for hiking.

At two miles, we crossed Kinsey Creek, and marveled at how many creeks there were running this late in summer during a drought. You are never far from fresh water sources on the Lost Coast. In southern California, we’ve grown accustomed to carrying all the water we’ll need for a hike, and it took us while to realize that no, we don’t need to carry three liters of water. One will do.

At three miles, the ancient jeep trail we’d been following on Spanish Flat disappeared — a victim of erosion and the ever-changing coastline. We dropped down to the beach and started hiking on cobbled stones that crunched under our boots.

At 3.6 miles we paused and took a break at Big Creek. Someone had built a rather elaborate structure out of driftwood. This practice is frowned upon by the rangers, as it runs counter to the leave no trace philosophy.

Driftwood Shelter

It was at Big Creek that we also saw our first sign of other people in almost two days. A tent was setup at a campsite not far away.

We picked our way down the coast. Hiking on these rocks was difficult and slow, so we tried to stick as close as possible to the base of the bluffs where the ground was at least a little bit more solid.

At 4.6 miles, the trail climbed atop a terrace. We had reached the northern limit of Big Flat. The trail begins to climb, reaching the highest on our trail — a mere 100 feet or so above sea level — through thick, twisted pine trees.

When we finally emerged we came down to the broad terrace of the flat. The trail travels straight through grassy fields. We were wary of rattlesnakes and ticks, but had no problems with either.

The trail widens from single track to double track, eventually becoming a makeshift dirt air strip at mile six. We had heard about this air strip, and it was interesting to finally see it. Not much more than flat, straight dirt road that passed right by the nicest cabins we’d seen yet. The one was definitely inhabited, with solar panels for power and at least one person working in the yard. What a life.

Big Flat Cabin on the Lost Coast Trail

Deer grazed nearby, and one young fawn passed in front of us, completely unfazed by our presence. Not far past the cabin the trail turns abruptly 90 degrees and heads straight toward the ocean before turning to follow near the top of the bluff.

At 7 miles, we reached Big Flat Creek. It’s a big creek, and there are a number of good camp sites on both sides of it. We dropped our packs and scouted out the best. I had my eye on the tall forest of trees on the south side of the creek on Miller Flat, and found an idyllic spot out the hot afternoon sun.

While there really isn’t a bad campsite on the Lost Coast, this was the most comfortable. It was a fitting site for our final night on the trail.

Day 3 Campsite at Miller Flat

We were the first in the area to set up camp, but we were not alone. Over the next few hours several other small groups of backpackers showed up. It was the most people we had seen yet, but even so we were spread out. Sitting on the beach watching the sunset we saw other people, but back in our camp we had solitude and privacy.

Sunset on the Lost Coast Trail

Lost Coast Trail: Day Three Map

Download file: Lost Coast Trail Day 3.gpx

Day Three on the Lost Coast: Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Shelter Cove Weather Forecast

[forecast width=”100%” location=”95589″]

Come back tomorrow for Day 4 on the Lost Coast Trail!

The Lost Coast Trail
Overview of the Lost Coast TrailOverview of the Lost Coast Trail

 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/lost-coast-trail-spanish-flat-to-miller-flat/feed/ 0
Lost Coast Trail: Sea Lion Gulch to Spanish Flat https://socalhiker.net/lost-coast-trail-sea-lion-gulch-to-spanish-flat/ https://socalhiker.net/lost-coast-trail-sea-lion-gulch-to-spanish-flat/#comments Thu, 21 Aug 2014 22:03:51 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=13221 The Lost Coast

I woke up to the early morning light. Outside our tent the air was thick with fog and heavy with moisture. Large drops of condensation clung to our rain fly, and everything that wasn’t covered was damp.

Trail Details
Distance: 7 miles
Time: 3 hours
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 120 ft
Dogs: Yes
When to go: Year-round
We fired up our stove, boiling water for our Starbucks Via and ate awesome breakfast burritos while the sun began to break through the morning mist. The next four miles of the Lost Coast Trail would be mainly on the beach, and are impassable at high tide. Consulting our tide chart print out, we knew that high tide peaked at 7:19am, and as the tide dropped, we hit the trail.

We refilled our water bottles in the creek at the bottom of Sea Lion Gulch, then started down the beach. This section of the Lost Coast is notable for the bowling ball-sized boulders. We had to pick our steps slowly and carefully, making progress slow.

Day 2 on the Lost Coast Trail

Half a mile down the coast, the trail heads overland. The distant balancing rock you see in the photo below is the visual cue: this point is impassable at all tide levels. Turn inland up the wash and look up the hill for signs of a trail.

Impassable

The sign for this overland detour is easy to miss. It’s high on the bluff, perched on a rock. As you’re hiking down the beach, you’ll find that the rocks and the water seem to be squeeze out the beach. Look for that balancing rock and then find the overland detour.

The LCT Sign

We headed into the gully and found the trail as it detoured around the point.

Detour

The sign for the LCT detour sits high on the bluff, well away from the beach.

The LCT Sign

This rocky spine marked the high point of the overland detour, which offered sweeping views of the coastline in both directions.

Rocky Spine

On the downhill side of the detour are the remains of another old cabin and a junction with the Cooskie Creek Spur trail. This junction is tricky, as the sign for the LCT is on the opposite side of the post — pointing in a non-obvious direction.

Look at all sides of these posts

This minimalist approach to trail signage is a recurring theme on the Lost Coast. I had a conversation with one of the rangers who explained that it is quite intentional. The theory is that this land is wilderness, and they have attempted to keep the human touch light. I like that approach, but it means you’ll have to use your navigation smarts to keep yourself on the right trail. When you see a sign or even a trace of a junction, pause for a moment and look around. Make sure you’ve taken the right fork in the trail.

Beachfront Cabin

This cabin has seen better days, but just imagine the view someone once enjoyed. Actually, you don’t have to imagine. Hike the Lost Coast Trail and this view can be yours.

Low Tide on the Lost Coast Trail

Back down on the beach, we picked our way among the cobbled stone and coarse black sand, around the rocks and ahead of the waves. Beach hiking here is tough and slow. By this time the sun had burned off all the fog and morning haze, and it while the breezes were still cool, we were working up a sweat.

At mile 5 we reached Randall Creek, which marks the north end of Spanish Flat. This grassy terrace gave us a welcome break from the tough beach hiking. Hiking on solid earth is bliss! We stopped here for lunch and setup our fly for some shade.

Spanish Flat

Just two easy miles later, we stopped to camp just south of Spanish Creek. We had the beach entirely to ourselves, and the time to enjoy it. We kicked our boots off and even took a little nap on the black sand beach. There were no emails or text messages to reply to. There were no updates to post. Just two people enjoying the sun on the Lost Coast.

Lost Coast Trail: Day Two Map

Download file: Lost Coast Trail Day 2.gpx

Day Two on the Lost Coast: Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Shelter Cove Weather Forecast

[forecast width=”100%” location=”95589“]

Come back tomorrow for Day 3 on the Lost Coast Trail!

The Lost Coast Trail
Overview of the Lost Coast TrailOverview of the Lost Coast Trail

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/lost-coast-trail-sea-lion-gulch-to-spanish-flat/feed/ 4
Lost Coast Trail: Mattole Beach to Sea Lion Gulch https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-the-lost-coast-trail-mattole-beach-to-sea-lion-gulch/ https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-the-lost-coast-trail-mattole-beach-to-sea-lion-gulch/#comments Wed, 20 Aug 2014 16:44:57 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=13181 Hiking the Lost Coast We drove up Highway 101 from San Francisco, marveling at the beautiful scenery all the way. The golden coastal mountains, dotted with ancient oak trees slowly give way to towering redwoods that darken the skies. We turned off at Garberville and stopped for lunch before making the two hour drive to Shelter Cove. Oddly, our day would begin at the end of the Lost Coast Trail.

Trail Details
Distance: 5.4 miles
Time: 3 hours
Difficulty: Moderate
Elevation gain: 50 ft
Dogs: Yes
When to go: Year-round
We unloaded our packs, filled our water bottles and locked up the Xterra. Lost Coast Shuttle sent a dual-cab pickup to take us and two guys who had just finished the trail up to Mattole Beach, another two hours away. Yes, it’s only 25 miles if you hike the Lost Coast, but to drive there takes two hours.

We made it to the Mattole Trailhead by 5:30pm. The shuttle service provided us with a great King Range map and a tide chart that I actually preferred to my own (we were prepared, of course). We filled out and filed our permit at the self-service station and decided that we’d start hiking tonight and leave the car campers behind.

Soft Sand Trail

The Lost Coast Trail starts out in the soft, dry sand dotted with ice plant. Hiking in soft sand is an interesting experience. You have to shorten your stride and slow your pace. The best advice I heard was to try not to use your toes. I’m not sure why, but it seemed to help as we plodded along. The views were beautiful. The beach strewn with driftwood, seaweed and all sorts of interesting shells and artifacts.

Washed Ashore

Soon sand gave way to wave-smoothed pebbles and rocks that crunched under our boots. Hiking the Lost Coast Trail is an art. Most of the time there isn’t an established path — except on the flats — and along the beach your challenge is to find the most efficient surface for hiking. Sometimes that’s the freshly wet set near the surf. Other times its nearest the bluffs where the dirt, stone and sand provide some semblance of stability. Overlaid on a map, our GPS tracks might make us look like drunken sailors, but there was a method to our madness.

Joan on the Lost Coast Trail

When you’re lucky there are bits of real trail on solid ground. Take them. They may not last, as the coastline and the bluffs are constantly in flux, but enjoy them when you can. Every time we made the transition from sand to solid ground, it felt like we turned the turbochargers on.

Our first obstacle was the point up ahead, right at the 2.5 mile mark. We knew had to make it around that point before high tide, when it becomes impassable. No problem. We had our tide charts, had planned ahead and knew we could walk right around it.

As we neared the mouth of Four Mile Creek, we spied our first of several private cabins on the Lost Coast. It’s surprising to see a cabin out here where there are no roads, no power lines or utilities.  They private cabins are all rustic and weathered, and most are no longer habitable — long overtaken by the combination of neglect and the harsh wind, rain and weather of the Lost Coast. Not surprising when you consider that this area often receives over 100 inches of rain per year. 

Beachside Cabin

This particular cabin looked to be in pretty good shape, with an outhouse that had a half door, so you could enjoy the view from your throne. This is as close as we got. These cabins are all private and as curious as we were, we didn’t want to trespass or infringe on their privacy.

We continued on, and soon spied the famous Punta Gorda lighthouse. This historic light house was built in 1910 after a number of fatal shipwrecks on the rocks off the coast. It’s unique in that it’s on the mainland, and it’s short, squat lighthouse. It remained in operation until 1961, when new technology replaced the need for the lighthouse.

Punta Gorda Lighthouse

We were able to explore the lighthouse and climb up the rusty iron spiral staircase to the top. It’s in remarkably good condition even  a century later.

Inside the Lighthouse

The Punta Gorda Lighthouse is 3.75 miles from the Mattole trailhead, making it a great day hike destination for campers. Starting late in the day as we had, we say one other couple who were returning from the lighthouse. These would be the only two people we saw on the trail today.

The sun was dipping lower, and we were aiming to reach Sea Lion Gulch for our first night’s camp, about 1.25 miles further down the coast.

We found a campsite on the bluff overlooking the gulch.

Day 1 Campsite

Sea Lion Gulch is so-named because sea lions and seals frequent the rocks just off the coast. Indeed, there was a cranky old sea lion with is deep wails and the barks of the seals to confirm that we had arrived.

Our campsite gave us a great view down the coast. The next four miles of the trail were impassable at high tide, so by starting here, we could time our entry as the tide was receding and make sure we didn’t get caught by the incoming tide.

Lost Coast Trail: Day One Map

Download file: Lost Coast Trail Day 1.gpx

Day One of the Lost Coast: Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Hiking the Lost Coast

Lost Coast Trail Tips

  • You can camp anywhere on the Lost Coast, but use previously established campsites whenever possible, to minimize impact on the environment.
  • Carry a tide chart and know where the impassable sections are! While in those sections, keep an eye on the ocean. A rogue wave can sneak up at any time, and unsuspecting hikers have been swept out to sea.
  • There is zero cell phone reception on the Lost Coast Trail. You’ll have to use backcountry smarts to handle any emergency that arises. Of course, you’re carrying the Ten Essentials, right?
  • Be sure to start at the beginning, with our Overview of the Lost Coast Trail.
  • We didn’t have any rain on our trip (July is historic a low-rainfall on this otherwise very wet trail). Even so, we had to use our rain fly every night. Anything that wasn’t covered got soaked with condensation from the fog. So cover up!

Our first day on the Lost Coast was memorable. We felt the solitude of the trail, and the beauty and history of this rugged coastline. We drifted to sleep serenaded by the waves crashing on the rocks below.

Next, read Day 2 on the Lost Coast Trail: Sea Lion Gulch to Spanish Flat.

Shelter Cove Weather Forecast

[forecast width=”100%” location=”95589“]

 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-the-lost-coast-trail-mattole-beach-to-sea-lion-gulch/feed/ 10
The Lost Coast Trail: An Overview https://socalhiker.net/the-lost-coast-trail-an-overview/ https://socalhiker.net/the-lost-coast-trail-an-overview/#comments Sun, 17 Aug 2014 15:05:42 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=13254 Backpacking the Lost Coast

We arrived at Mattole Beach early in the evening. The trailhead has a scattering of car campsites, which we were eager to leave behind. We donned our backpacks, hit the trail, and promptly lost ourselves in the vast beauty of the coast. It feels somehow primal; the convergence of sea and land on this solitary, rugged section of the Northern California coastline. There are no roads on this section of the coast–the terrain is too rugged. There is no cell phone coverage. And we saw very few people. We were disconnected from the modern world, and reconnecting to the land, the sea and ourselves.

I breathed in deeply, the moist, salty air filling my nostrils and renewing my energy with each step. We were off the grid in the best way possible. We were on the Lost Coast Trail. 

The Lost Coast is so named because this section of this section of land was too steep and rugged to build a road. Big Sur was tamed by Highway 1, but not the Lost Coast. Highway 1 veers inland 20 miles around this remote section of coastline. There are no roads or cars. Just getting to the trailhead is a journey in itself.

Trail Details
Distance: 25 miles
Time: 3-4 days
Difficulty: Moderately strenuous multi-day
Elevation gain: 50 ft
Dogs: Yes
When to go: Year-round
The Lost Coast Trail stretches 25 miles through the King Range National Conservation Area, from Mattole Beach in the north to the village of Shelter Cove in the south. The trail is fairly flat (there are a few hills to climb) but the terrain is challenging. You go from hiking on coarse black sand to pebbly beaches; from slippery, wave-smoothed stones the size of bowling balls to the blessed solid ground of the flats. Sections of the trail are completely impassable at high tide, making timing and tide chart knowledge essential. And the weather is highly unpredictable.

We hiked the Lost Coast Trail over four days and three nights — a comfortable pace that allowed flexibility in our hiking schedule to accommodate the high tides. We started with a rough itinerary, but with the exception of the third night, changed every planned camp location. Have a plan, but plan to be flexible. The Lost Coast demands it.

An Overview of the Lost Coast Trail

Punta Gorda Lighthouse

The first day on the trail we started out about 5:30 PM, and hiked an easy 5-1/2 miles. Along the way, we stopped by the beautiful and historic Punta Gorda Lighthouse. The lighthouse was built in 1910 after numerous fatal shipwrecks off the coast, and was in operation until 1961, when it was replaced by more advanced navigation technology. There used to be a number of beautiful cottages and out buildings, but these were tragically burned down by the forest service in the early ’70s. Today, only the concrete structures of the lighthouse and the fuel house remain.

Still More Rock Walking

The trail, such as it is, mainly involves following the coastline. The terrain often is soft sand that slows down your pace to a slog, or rocks that force you to carefully choose each step. There are two large flats along the route that offer solid ground–a welcome respite from the rocks, sand and gravel.

Creek Crossing

Water is never far away. Even in a dry year like this, we met sources of fresh water every mile or less along the trail — from small rivulets to full-fledged creeks.

Note: in storms and during the rainy season, these creeks can swell to waist-high depth and crossing can be treacherous. 

The Lost Coast in Northern CaliforniaWhere is the Lost Coast?

The Lost Coast Trail in the King Range National Conservation Area is about five hours north of San Francisco. To get to Shelter Cove, take the Garberville exit off Highway 101, heading west on Shelter Cove Road. Right right on Beach Road, and continue about a mile to the Black Sands Beach parking lot. Get Google Maps directions to the Black Sands Beach trailhead.

To reach Mattole Beach on the north end of the Lost Coast, take Lighthouse Road west from Petrolia, all the way to the end. Get Google Maps directions to the Mattole Trailhead.

Note that the drive to either of these trailheads takes patience. It can take 1-1/2 hours to drive from the 101 to Shelter Cove, and the road can be harrowing. It’s all part of the adventure.

The Lost Coast Trail Map

Download file: lost-coast-trail.gpx

Lost Coast Trail Tips

  • Bear canisters are required throughout the King Range National Conservation Area. While we didn’t see any signs of bears, two guys we shared the shuttle with had seen bear tracks on the beach on their last day of the trip. Yes, there are bears on the Lost Coast. Fortunately, you can rent canisters from the ranger station for $5 per canister, per trip at these three locations.
  • Where to go when Nature calls… This one blew me away, but the rule on the Lost Coast Trail is to dig a hole on the beach below the high tide mark and make your deposit right there. Everywhere else I’ve ever hiked the rules typically have you do this well away from water, but in this case, the rangers want you to do it in the ocean. In fact, its right on the permit.
  • Rangers will check and fine for violations. Violations include not carrying a bear canister, not carrying a permit, or not following the rules regarding campfires. Read the rules, and follow them. We met a ranger on our fourth day, and he checked our permit and canister and actually quizzed us to make sure we read the rules.
  • Which direction to hike? North or South? This one is easy. Hike from north to south. The prevailing winds will be at your back. Start at Mattole Beach and head south to Shelter Cove.

Permits

Permits are required to hike the Lost Cost Trail. Check availability at Outdoor Status.

Lost Coast Resources

  • Getting to the trailhead is a challenge in itself. You could plan a yo-yo (out-and-back) trip, but that turns it into a challenging 50 mile hike. Most people plan to take a shuttle. There are two shuttle companies that serve the area: Lost Coast Shuttle and Lost Coast Adventures. We used Lost Coast shuttle and were super-pleased with the service. We drove to the Black Sands Beach trailhead on the south end of the trail in Shelter Cove, where the shuttle met us and drove us up and around to the north end of the trail — a windy hour and a half drive. The benefit to this approach is that when you get to the end of the trail, your car is waiting for you, rather than you waiting for the shuttle. The shuttle is pricey, but understandably so since each round trip takes about four hours total. Keep in mind that the more in your group, the lower the overall cost of the shuttle–as long as your group fits in one shuttle.
  • GPS user? Download our Lost Coast GPX file.
  • Download the King Range Wilderness Map  (8.5 MB PDF)
  • Monthly weather averages. Note: it gets wet here during much of the year.

Should you hike the Lost Coast Trail?

Follow the links below for my day-by-day trip report and guide for our Lost Coast backpacking trip. I highly recommend this trail to anyone with a sense of adventure and a love of rugged wilderness.

If you’ve got questions about the Lost Coast Trail, let me know in the comments below.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/the-lost-coast-trail-an-overview/feed/ 112
How to Use a Buff as a Backpacking Pillow https://socalhiker.net/how-to-use-a-buff-as-a-backpacking-pillow/ https://socalhiker.net/how-to-use-a-buff-as-a-backpacking-pillow/#comments Wed, 21 May 2014 17:00:00 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=12984 Buff - the Perfect Backpacking Pillow

I love my Buff. It’s the multi-purpose headwear that can be a neck gaitor, a face mask, a headband and a about a dozen other configurations. I’ve worn my Buff on the Trans-Catalina Trail and the John Muir Trail. But not until a recent backpacking trip did I learn that a Buff could also become the perfect backpacking pillow.

I had been using a Thermarest fleece pillow case. It’s fairly small and light, and you can stuff your jacket inside. But when you’re backpacking, you want every piece of gear you bring to do as much as possible, so you have less weight to carry. Curt Cragg — the organizer of the JMT JAM 2014 shared his awesome tip for using a Buff as a pillow case.

Here’s how it’s done:

What You Need

 

You’ll need a Buff and a jacket. I’m using my Marmot fleece.

Steps 1-2

Fold your jacket up into a rectangular bundle and insert it into the Buff. The stretchy material of the Buff helps hold everything in place.

 

Sleep Well!

That’s really all there is to it! It’s a quick and easy tip that’s more comfortable than a nylon stuff sack, and more efficient than a separate pillow case.

Finished Buff pillow

The Buff might just be the perfect backpacking pillow.

The Perfect Backcountry Pillow

Got any other great Buff tips? Share them in the comments below.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/how-to-use-a-buff-as-a-backpacking-pillow/feed/ 3
Backpacking on the Santa Cruz Trail in the Santa Barbara Backcountry https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-on-the-santa-cruz-trail-in-the-santa-barbara-backcountry/ https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-on-the-santa-cruz-trail-in-the-santa-barbara-backcountry/#comments Tue, 06 May 2014 19:36:35 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=12983 Backpacking the Santa Cruz Trail in Santa Barbara Backcountry

Backpacking in Santa Barbara? Usually when people think of Santa Barbara they think of Stearns Wharf, the beach, the shops on State Street or the wild college scene near UCSB. But what you might not realize is that the Santa Barbara backcountry takes you into the expansive Los Padres National Forest, with deep canyons, soaring ridge lines and clear, cool streams. This two-day backpacking trip on the Santa Cruz Trail provides a weekend escape and an introduction to Santa Barbara’s real wild side.

Trail Closure In Effect
January 6, 2017 Update: Major sections of this trail were closed due to the Rey Fire in Santa Barbara County. It has since reopened, but early reports are that the trail is “a mess.” We will update with details as soon as we get them.

Rey Fire Burn Area

Trail Details
Distance: 21.8 miles
Time: 2 days
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 3,000 ft
Dogs: Yes
When to go: Fall-Spring
Download the GPX
This was my first time backpacking in the Los Padres National Forest. I joined a group of hikers as part of the first JMT JAM. Our first night we spent in a group camp near the trailhead, giving me time to make the drive from LA on Friday afternoon and allowing us to hit the trail first thing Saturday morning.

Getting to the Trailhead

This trail begins at the Upper Oso Campground off of Paradise Road, which can also be a good staging camp for Friday night. Campsites are available for reservation for $20/night, and you can get driving directions here. There is trailhead parking for free with an Adventure Pass (though currently up in the air, I’d recommend using one for now).

Trail Description

From the trailhead, head north and into the hills. The trail begins as a dirt road running parallel to the creek and labeled as Camuesa Canyon Road on the map. At 0.7 miles, we reached a bend in the road. Here our trail broke away from the road, continuing into the canyon.

Registering at the Santa Cruz Trailhead

Be sure to stop here and sign the trailhead register. There are no permits required for camping back here (although you do need a campfire permit if you plan to have a campfire), but signing the register will help the rangers keep track of who is in the backcountry. With the drought conditions we’ve had this year, it’s a worthwhile precaution.

Off the dirt road, the trail becomes much more enjoyable. The single track trail runs beside the creek under the shade of old growth oak trees. At 1.8 miles, you’ll see a junction to Nineteen Oaks Camp heading uphill to the right.

Trail Junction

Just beyond this junction our trail crosses the creek and begins a steady climb out of the canyon. In late April, the hills were covered with wildflowers. I saw Mariposa (pictured below), Lupen, California Poppy and many more that I couldn’t name. The trail is also mostly exposed and quite relentless in it’s climb.

Mariposas in Bloom

The Santa Cruz Trail is remarkably engineered, with a steady grade that makes the climbing easy. There are surprisingly few switchbacks, which sometimes makes this trail feel very long.

Wildflower Garden Path

Most of the terrain has full sun exposure, except when crossing through the canyons. The plant life ranges from agave to manzanita to chaparral to grassy knolls.

Poppy Field

At 5.5 miles, I reached the Alexander Saddle. At 3,950 feet above sea level, it’s the high point of this trek (which started at 1,191 feet). That’s a respectable climb with a backpack.

Here’s a panorama from the Alexander Saddle, looking back on the trail.

View from Alexander Saddle

This is a great place to stop for food and rest. Soak in the views. We actually spied some snow on the mountains further north from the rain the night before. Be aware that this saddle is also a junction. There is another trail that turns and heads up the ridgeline to the right. This is not the Santa Cruz Trail! Read the sign carefully, because the next segment of the trail is not as obvious.

Heading down from Alexander Saddle

At 6.3 miles there is a sign for Little Pine Spring. There is a fairly reliable spring here and a campsite, but the trail was completely overgrown difficult to even locate.

The Forty Mile Wall

At 7.2 miles you cross the canyon and begin a long traverse on what is affectionately referred to as The Forty Mile Wall. In reality, it’s just under 2.5 miles, but it does at times feel like the trail will just go on and on. This section of the trail follows the southwest face of a steep ridge dotted with splashes of brilliant orange poppies.

A Blaze of Orange Poppies

Finally at the 9.5 mile mark, you round the ridge and begin a descent into the wooded canyon via a series of switchbacks. At the bottom, the trail crosses the creek and turns east. About a quarter mile further lies the Santa Cruz Station.

Santa Cruz Station

There is a pit toilet not far from the station, and there are several good campsites nearby with picnic tables and a masonry cooking area. The stream is close by, providing a good source for replenishing your water (be sure to filter or treat it first).

There is an open grassy area as well as a number of beautiful spots to pitch a tent under old growth oak trees.

Sunday morning, we broke camp and headed back the way we came. Our total mileage: 21.8 miles.

In the End

The Santa Cruz Trail was a beautiful trail, particularly during the spring. This trail made for a great weekend excursion and excellent shake-down hike for the hikers in the group who were training to thru-hike the JMT this year. Being my first excursion in the Los Padres National Forest, it whet my appetite for more. I’ll be back to explore more of this area in the future. 

Santa Cruz Trail Map

Download file: Backpacking the Santa Cruz Trail.gpx

Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

 

Tips for Hiking in the Santa Barbara Backcountry

  • This is a 3-season trail best hiked in fall, winter or spring. It can get dangerously hot and dry during the summer.
  • If you’re planning to have a campfire, be sure to first get a campfire permit. They are free, and you can get it online here.
  • After your hike, stop in at the Cold Spring Tavern on Stagecoach Road. It’s on your way back into Santa Barbara, and famous for their tri-tip sandwiches, live music and people watching on the weekends.

More Santa Barbara Backcountry Resources

Santa Cruz Trail Weather Forecast

[forecast width=”100%” location=”93105″]

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/backpacking-on-the-santa-cruz-trail-in-the-santa-barbara-backcountry/feed/ 36
Outdoor Mistakes: Navigation Overconfidence https://socalhiker.net/outdoor-mistakes-navigation-overconfidence/ https://socalhiker.net/outdoor-mistakes-navigation-overconfidence/#comments Mon, 24 Mar 2014 16:11:25 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=12888 outdoor-mistakes-navigation-overconfidence

It was our second day of a 22-day thru-hike on the epic John Muir Trail. I was the ring-leader — I had organized the trip, recruited three willing hikers, obtained the permit and got us to Yosemite Valley a couple days earlier. I had been to Yosemite many times. I had even hiked the JMT before — 30 years earlier.

Outdoor Mistakes
Part of a series on Outdoor Mistakes where other bloggers share their outdoor mis-adventures. Be sure to check out all the posts over at Sierra Social Hub.
On day one we hiked from Happy Isles to Little Yosemite Valley, where we stowed our gear in a bear locker and slack-packed to the top of Half Dome. Today, we were planning to hike from Little Yosemite Valley to Sunrise Meadow. Easy peasy.

The young guns — Jeffrey and Hari — got an early start. The plan was to meet at  Sunrise Camp. If they got their early, they could snag the best campsite for our little group.

Joan and I took our time. As we were getting ready to break camp, we spied a bear ambling towards the campground, hoping to find an inattentive or lazy backpacker with their food improperly stored. We shot a few blurry photos from a safe distance, even as a family with children raced toward the bear to get a closer look. But that’s an outdoor mistake for another story.

Bear!

We checked our gear and headed up the trail.

After 1.3 miles of climbing, we reached the junction to Half Dome. We had hiked here yesterday, so this part of the trail was still fresh in our memory. We took the right branch toward Sunrise, and hiked on.

Just 1/4 mile further we reached our next junction. Our map showed our trail continuing along the north side of Sunrise Creek, but the trail ahead looked to be heading toward a campsite. The trail to the left was much more travelled, and after a quick survey of the area, I headed up to the left.

We trudged along, climbing higher and higher. The sound of Sunrise Creek grew more and more faint. My girlfriend Joan began to question my navigation skills. “Didn’t you say this trail ran near the creek?”

I brushed off her question and reassured her that this was the right trail. “Sometimes the scale of a map can be deceptive.” Hah. We continued to climb. I was beginning to question my decision as well, but at this point, the thought of backtracking was unappealing.

One of the great things about backpacking is the community of the trail. When encountering other hikers headed in the opposite direction, it’s common to shout out a cordial “Hi! Where you headed? Where you coming from?” I used this to my advantage here. We encountered our first group…

“Hi! Where you coming from?” I asked hopefully. I wanted confirmation that we were on the right trail, and that we wouldn’t have to backtrack, and that the miles of uphill hiking weren’t in vain.

“Sunrise” came the answer. YES! I thought to myself. I turned to Joan and told her it was confirmed. I had basically doubled down on my commitment to this trail.

Still, we were climbing higher and higher. Soon we could see Half Dome. This didn’t smell right.

Then next group of hikers came heading down the trail. “Where you coming from?” I asked again. “Sunrise Lakes.” Uh-oh. Sunrise LAKES?! Could that have been what the other group meant when they said “Sunrise”?

We stopped to check our map. Yes, it was certain we were on the wrong trail. We were en route to Clouds Rest and on to Sunrise Lakes beyond. I was eating my words.

my-wrong-turn-on-the-jmt

It looked like we wouldn’t meet up with Jeffrey and Hari tonight. We went with Plan B. We bagged Clouds Rest and what are probably the best views of Half Dome and the Yosemite Valley. We resolved to hike on until we could find a good campsite, then we would start early tomorrow and meet up with Jeffrey and Hari at Tuolumne Meadows.

Cloud's Rest

Jeffrey and Hari were self-sufficient. We had planned to stick together in pairs, and had food, fuel and shelter to do just fine. And yes, on day three we did meet up again in Tuolumne Meadows.

So while it wasn’t a disaster, it was a heaping serving of humble pie. And it was also the only wrong turn I took on the entire John Muir Trail.

What I Learned From My Mistake

I was over-confident — maybe even borderline cocky — about my choice at the junction. I should’ve taken time to check my maps and even break out my compass to make sure we were on the right trail. Being skilled and experienced doesn’t help you if you get a little cocky.

On the bright side, while we ended up doing way more vertical gain than we had planned, we were equipped and prepared physically to deal with it. We had the supplies we needed and were in no real danger. And we had a plan to rejoin our friends at Tuolumne.

Although a popular trail like the JMT is well-marked, take time to use your map and navigation skills. And skip the humble pie.

Outdoor Mistakes TweetChat
On Thursday, March 27, 2014, Andy Hawbaker from Sierra Trading Post will be hosting an #STPLive tweetchat at 3pm PDT. Fire up Twitter and point it at the #STPLive hashtag to join in!

 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/outdoor-mistakes-navigation-overconfidence/feed/ 3
Thru-Hiking the JMT: Guitar Lake to Mt. Whitney https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-guitar-lake-to-mt-whitney/ https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-guitar-lake-to-mt-whitney/#comments Sat, 17 Aug 2013 14:33:46 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=7318 Sunrise Panorama on Whitney

Day 22 on the John Muir Trail…

Technically, this day begins at the end of Day 21. We went to bed early last night, sleeping lightly for a few hours and waking to our alarm at 11:30 PM. We ate Clif Bars and packed up our sleeping gear and tent. Donning our headlamps, we made one final check to make sure nothing was left behind. We headed up the John Muir Trail towards the tallest peak in the contiguous 48 states — Mount Whitney — 14,505 feet above sea level.

John Muir Trail Day 22
Distance: 16 miles
Cumulative Distance: 222.23 miles
Total Ascent: 4,201 ft
Cumulative Ascent: 60,597 ft
Harrison Map Sheet 1
The moon was behind the mountains, but the sky was cloudless tonight, and the stars shone brightly. We hiked along the trail, keeping close together and taking our time. In the darkness, we had to be extra careful.

Our headlamps did a great job of illuminating our steps. As we climbed higher, we could see other headlamps down below, bobbing up and down as other hikers started out in the wee hours of the morning. Apparently we weren’t the only ones who thought to get a very early start on Whitney.

We hiked along, our heads down and our eyes on the trail for several hours. Our pace was slow, but steady. Suddenly, I practically walked into the Whitney Trail Crest junction sign!

Whitney Trail Crest Junction, 3am

We were shocked! The climb went by quickly. From here we thought we would wait for sunrise, then hike the last 2 miles to the summit in daylight.

We dropped our backpacks and pulled out our sleeping bags. It was cold up at the crest, especially since we had stopped hiking. We sat there and tried to sleep, but it wasn’t going to happen. Soon, we had hikers who were coming up from Whitney Portal marching past us in the darkness. We decided if they could handle the trail in the dark, we could too. Besides, we weren’t going to sleep.

Joan en route to Mt Whitney

So we packed our sleeping bags and left our backpacks near the junction. We took a fanny pack and water, slack-packing to the summit. And along the way there, the sun rose.

Sunrise

Turning around, I captured this view looking west toward the sun-kissed mountain tops.

Sun-kist Mountain Peaks

The trail was treacherous, but we took our time to be safe. By the time we reached the shelter on the summit, we no longer needed our headlamps at all. We headed for the true summit, and greeted a few other hikers who arrived just before us.

Jeff & Joan atop Mount Whitney

Our thru-hike on the John Muir Trail was complete! We hiked the entire JMT, from Yosemite to Whitney. We were standing on the summit of the tallest peak in the contiguous 48 states. We learned new things about ourselves and each other, and expanded our understanding of what we were capable of.

Our mission was complete. But our journey was not yet over. We still had to hike 10.6 miles down to Whitney Portal, where we had parked our Xterra three weeks earlier.

Summit Register?
JMT-JeffI have one regret about our summit of Mt. Whitney… we forgot to sign the summit register! We had seen the aluminum “desk” next to the shelter, but I didn’t realize that the top opened. And so we never signed the register. Doh!
We hung out at the summit, resting, snacking, taking photos and basking equally in the warmth of the sun and in our sense of accomplishment. Finally we decided it was time to head down.

In our original itinerary, we had planned to stop at Trail Camp below Mt. Whitney, but before Whitney Portal. This would leave an easy six mile hike out on the final day. But we had opted to shave some miles off previous days, so to stick to our original exit schedule, we were hiking all the way out to Whitney Portal.

First, we headed back to the Whitney Trail Crest. Our packs were waiting for us, undisturbed by other hikers. In fact, a number of other backpackers had also left their packs here, since you have to come back this way in any case.

We hoisted our packs one more time and began the descent.

As we hiked down, we passed what seemed like a hundred people hiking up to Whitney. There were some solo hikers but most were in groups of 2, 3 or 4. Most of them carried day packs rather than backpacks. We wound our way down the infamous 99 switchbacks, including an icy patch with a handrail for safety. There was no snow on the trail though.

Looking back, it was hard to believe that we were “up there” just a few hours earlier. Wow.

We were up there? Today?

Descending from Mt Whitney with a full backpack was challenging, even though we weren’t carrying much food at this point. We descended 6,300 feet over those last ten miles. It took a toll on our bodies. Our feet were swollen and sore. Our joints creaked and ached. But the thought of a cheeseburger and beer at the Whitney Portal Store kept  us moving.

Finally we could see the Whitney Portal parking area. We must be close. We placed bets on how long it would be before we were there. “30 minutes!” I announced confidently. I was wrong by about an hour.

That last stretch winds down along the longest, slowest switchbacks ever designed. There were times when I swore we were actually moving further away from our destination. Like a desert mirage, it tantalized us with promises of greasy food and cheap calories, but we never seemed to get any closer.

Finally we saw a sign of “civilization.” Ironically, it was a sign declaring (to those hiking in the upward direction) that they were now entering the John Muir Wilderness. But for us, it meant we were getting closer to civilization.

Signs of Civilization

We made it to Whitney Portal. We ate that cheeseburger, and drank that cold beer. And it was good.

Un Cerveza, Por Favor!

Trail Map: Guitar Lake to Mt Whitney to Whitney Portal

The John Muir Trail official ends on the summit of Mount Whitney, but we still had to hike down to Whitney Portal where our car was parked. This map details the route up to the top of Whitney, as well as down to Whitney Portal.

Download file: JMT-Day-22.gpx

JMT Day 22 Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Jeff Hester atop Mt Whitney

Subscribe to our Newsletter

Don’t miss a single day in our JMT series! Subscribe now and get email updates for each post on SoCal Hiker.

Got a question about the JMT? Something you’d like more info on? Post a question in the JMT forum!

Our thru-hike on the John Muir Trail is complete, but the story is not finished. Watch for details on gear, food and what we will do differently next time.

Originally hiked August 17, 2010.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-guitar-lake-to-mt-whitney/feed/ 24
Thru-Hiking the JMT: Wright Creek to Guitar Lake https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-wright-creek-to-guitar-lake/ https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-wright-creek-to-guitar-lake/#comments Fri, 16 Aug 2013 21:09:54 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=7316 Guitar Lake

Day 21 on the John Muir Trail…

Last night we camped in the shadow of Mt. Whitney. We woke up excited, knowing that we were so close to our goal. We had been hiking on the John Muir Trail for three weeks. We had come a long way from that first day in Yosemite. We met many challenges — both physical and mental. Now there was no question about whether we would finish the JMT — but when. 

John Muir Trail Day 21
Distance: 7.23 miles
Cumulative Distance: 206.23 miles
Total Ascent: 2,147 ft
Cumulative Ascent: 56,396 ft
Harrison Map Sheet 1
Joan felt so confident and enthusiastic, she talked about marching right up to the top of Mt. Whitney right now! I suggested we get to Guitar Lake first, and then see how we felt.

Guitar Lake sits at 11,500 feet on the west side of Mt. Whitney. Our hike today to the lake would be a relatively short seven miles, so who knows what we’ll do!

11 Miles to Mt Whitney

After breakfast, we broke camp and headed out. We had a bit of hiking up-and-down, roller coaster-style today. Up and over a ridge, then down to Wallace Creek.  Up and over another ridge, then down to Crabtree Meadows.

Crabtree Meadow

Wag What?

Wag Bag Distribution Center

Near the Crabtree Ranger station, we picked up a wag bag. This is a cleverly designed contraption that you poop into. That’s right, we would be required to carry any poop we created from here until the end of the trail.

Fortunately, we only had one more night on the trail.

From Crabtree, the JMT climbs steadily beside babbling Whitney Creek. We passed several smaller lakes, and stopped for lunch in a shady spot near the creek.

At this altitude, the trees were sparse. They clustered around ponds, leaving much of the trail exposed to the hot sun.

Heading up Whitney Creek

At about 3:30 PM, we reached Guitar Lake. We setup camp near the “guitar body” portion of the lake, by a cluster of large boulders that would provide a bit of shade later in the afternoon.

Guitar Lake

At this point, Joan agreed that hiking straight to the top of Mt. Whitney was not going to happen.

We set up the tent, filtered water, soaked our feet in the lake and rested. We ate an early dinner, and decided that we’d start hiking up Mt. Whitney at night. We cleaned up and packed up everything so we could easily break camp in the darkness. We set our alarms for 11:30 PM, then laid down to nap for a few hours before our final ascent.

A Plan is Hatched
JMT-JeffThe first time I hiked the John Muir Trail back in 1980, we started up Mt. Whitney at midnight. There was a full moon, and we wanted to get up in time to see the sunrise. Having done it once, I suggested we could give it a try this time. We wouldn’t have the sun beating down on us. We had headlamps. So we decided to give it a shot.

Trail Map: Wright Creek to Guitar Lake

Download file: JMT-Day-21.gpx

JMT Day 21 Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Subscribe to our Newsletter

Don’t miss a single day in our JMT series! Subscribe now and get email updates for each post on SoCal Hiker.

Got a question about the JMT? Something you’d like more info on? Post a question in the JMT forum!

Tomorrow, we summit Mount Whitney and complete the John Muir Trail!

Originally hiked on August 16, 2010.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-wright-creek-to-guitar-lake/feed/ 3
Thru-Hiking the JMT: Over Forester Pass to Wright Creek https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-over-forester-pass-to-wright-creek/ https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-over-forester-pass-to-wright-creek/#comments Thu, 15 Aug 2013 20:45:07 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=7313 Forester Pass Looking North

Day 20 on the John Muir Trail…

At 13,200 feet above sea level, Forester Pass may not be the highest point on the John Muir Trail (that would be Mt. Whitney) but it is the high point of the Pacific Crest Trail.

John Muir Trail Day 20
Distance: 12 miles
Cumulative Distance: 199 miles
Total Ascent: 3,869 ft
Cumulative Ascent: 54,249 ft
Harrison Map Sheets 2 and 1
As we’ve hiked further and further south on the JMT, our average altitude has risen. Much of today’s trail is above the tree line, in a rugged, rocky landscape that’s as beautiful as it is desolate.

Our goal this morning was to reach Forester Pass before noon, and we got there just before 11:30am. The route up looks like piles of gravel with the occasional patch of snow and lake a the bottom of the slope, but there is a surprising amount of life flourishing in the high altitude.

IMG_2767

The trail cuts across a steep slope of scree that is often covered in snow, making it even more treacherous. Keep your eyes on the trail. When you want to look around, stop and steady yourself first.

In our case, we had a few patches of snow, but their were plenty of boot prints leading the way and it wasn’t too bad.

Snow patches on Forester Pass

When we reached Forester Pass, we celebrated! We took the requisite photos, ate a snack,  and communed with the marmots.

SoCal Hiker on Forester Pass

On the south side of Forester Pass, the John Muir Trail drops down a series of expertly engineered switchbacks in a narrow chasm, then winds around the steep sloping scree to the basin below.

Looking South from Forester Pass

Once in the basin, the trail continues downward on an easy grade to Tyndall Creek. There were patches of trees, and we were able to find a shady spot for lunch.

As we headed on, we passed a couple trail junctions, and our first sign announcing the distance remaining to the top of Mt. Whitney! It was thrilling to realize that we were actually going to complete the JMT! We could practically smell it. Oh wait, that was just us…

Trail Junction on the JMT

Although we had already hiked over Forester Pass, we weren’t finished climbing for the day. We had about another 600 feet of elevation gain up to Bighorn Plateau.

Are We There Yet?
JMT-JeffThere was no car to pull over, but this last stretch up and beyond the Bighorn Plateau seemed to never end. It was one of those points on the trail when you think to yourself, “How much further?!” To which the reply is typically, “Oh, about a mile… mile and a half.”

Prepare yourself. It’s always more than a mile and a half. Or at least, it feels that way.

Tyndall-Creek-Basin

Finally the trail dipped down into a valley and we reached Wright Creek. Tonight we would sleep in the shadow of Mt. Whitney.

Trail Map: Forester Pass, Bighorn Plateau and Wright Creek

Download file: JMT-Day-20.gpx

JMT Day 20 Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Subscribe to our Newsletter

Don’t miss a single day in our JMT series! Subscribe now and get email updates for each post on SoCal Hiker.

Got a question about the JMT? Something you’d like more info on? Post a question in the JMT forum!

Tomorrow, we head to Guitar Lake, just below Mt. Whitney.

Originally hiked on August 15, 2010.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-over-forester-pass-to-wright-creek/feed/ 5
Thru-Hiking the JMT: Upper Rae Lake, Glen Pass to Vidette Meadow https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-upper-rae-lake-glen-pass-to-vidette-meadow/ https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-upper-rae-lake-glen-pass-to-vidette-meadow/#comments Thu, 15 Aug 2013 03:19:16 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=7311 Heading Down to Vidette Meadow

Day 19 on the John Muir Trail…

We awoke early, determined to get a jump on Glen Pass (11, 970ft.). Last night we camped at 10,600ft. just above Upper Rae Lake and were looking forward to reaching the pass early before it got too warm.

John Muir Trail Day 19
Distance: 9 miles
Cumulative Distance: 187 miles
Total Ascent: 3,212 ft
Cumulative Ascent: 50,380 ft
Harrison Map Sheets 3 and 2
I need to qualify what I mean by an “early start.” We typically did not set an alarm to wake up  in the mornings. We would wake at about sunrise, rise maybe an hour later to enjoy a leisurely breakfast. Sometimes we didn’t actually hit the trail until nearly 10am. Many thru-hikers cannot fathom such a late start, but we enjoyed it. It worked for us, even though it sometimes mean rolling into camp at night around dusk.

This morning I awoke before sunrise. Our camp was very close to the trail, and even in the darkness, there were hikers headed up toward the pass, their headlights bobbing up and down with each stride. That was not our definition of early. We called it sheer madness.

In all seriousness, there are some people who like to wake up, pack up and start hiking immediately to help warm their body. After they have hiked for one or two miles, they stop and cook breakfast. It works for them, and it maybe it would work for you.

Today we got up and were on the trail before the sun hit our campsite, and that was early enough for us.

Looking Back at Rae Lakes

Being above the tree line, we knew there would be lots of exposure, and it helped to get the pass out of the way early. And there was quite a crowd already at the top of Glen Pass.

Almost to Glen Pass

We climbed about 1,500 feet in 1.5 miles. Not a bad warm-up. Looking north from Glen Pass, we were treated to a tremendous view of where we had been.

View North From Glen Pass

From Glen Pass, we headed south and down towards Vidette Meadows. Our goal was to camp at Upper Vidette Meadows, positioning us well for Forester Pass tomorrow.

As we descended, we saw more and more smoke in the air from a wildfire to the west. It was disconcerting for two reasons. First, we didn’t know how far away the fire was, or if it threatened any part of the John Muir Trail further south, posing danger to us and requiring a change of plans. Second, Joan suffers from asthma, and smoke didn’t help matters. We were concerned, but pressed forward.

Smoke to the West

Whenever we passed other hikers, we’d enquire about the wildfire and try to glean some knowledge about where it was, and whether it posed danger to us. Information is limited on the trail. There is no cell coverage. There is no Internet. But the reports we heard confirmed that the fire was far enough west that it posed no eminent threat.

We paused near the junction to Bullfrog Lake to refill our water bottles and eat lunch. It was good to be in the shade, and the mosquitos weren’t even too bad.

On our way down to Bubbs Creek, we ran into a couple who was section hiking the PCT. Last summer, they hiked the entire Oregon section. This year, they were tackling the section that more or less tracks along the JMT, though they started at the southern end of the Sierras and were headed north-bound. They were happily feasting on cheese and crackers, which they had rummaged from a bear box in Lower Vidette Meadows. “Look for it! There’s still some good stuff left in there…” they promised. Visions of a delectable backcountry smorgasbord danced in our heads as we headed down the trail.

One of the questions that I’m often asked about is how easy (or difficult) it is to follow the John Muir Trail. For the most part, the trail is very easy to follow and extremely well marked. However, not all junctions identify which direction the JMT follows, so you still need a good set of maps and basic navigation skills.

Smoke Protection

On this section of the JMT, there are an unusually high number of trail junctions. We made a point of sticking together and checking the map at each to ensure we were headed in the right direction. We didn’t want another Cloud’s Rest detour.

We made our way to Lower Vidette Meadows, and sure enough, we found the bear box with a cache of leftover foodstuffs. We were excited to rummage through this left-behind food. We salvaged some tea, some ramen and a few other goodies. There was cheese, but it looked very suspect. Not exactly the smorgasbord we imagined, but still a nice bonus.

Hiker Trash
JMT-JeffThere’s an old hiking joke that goes something like this…

“What’s the difference between a backpacker and a homeless person?” The answer? Goretex.

As we excitedly rummaged through days-old food left in a bear box, I realized were weren’t far off from “dumpster diving.” It’s all a matter of perspective.

We followed Bubbs Creek up the valley, climbing 1,300 feet in just over three miles. The trees were growing sparse when we found a great established campsite for the night.

Our Campsite Near Upper Vidette Meadow

Trail Map: Rae Lakes to Glen Pass to Upper Vidette Meadow

Download file: JMT-Day-19.gpx

JMT Day 19 Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Subscribe to our Newsletter

Don’t miss a single day in our JMT series! Subscribe now and get email updates for each post on SoCal Hiker.

Got a question about the JMT? Something you’d like more info on? Post a question in the JMT forum!

Tomorrow, we climb Forester Pass — over 13,000 feet high!

Originally hiked on August 14, 2010.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-upper-rae-lake-glen-pass-to-vidette-meadow/feed/ 3
Thru-Hiking the JMT: Woods Creek to the Rae Lakes https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-woods-creek-to-the-rae-lakes/ https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-woods-creek-to-the-rae-lakes/#comments Wed, 14 Aug 2013 03:38:29 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=7309 Rae Lakes and the Painted Lady

Day 18 on the John Muir Trail…

Yesterday we discussed our plans for today’s hike. We had originally planned to hike over Glen Pass to Vidette Meadow, but decided to modify the itinerary to have an easier day and leave us just below Glen Pass. Even with the modification, we would meet our original exit date to Whitney Portal.

John Muir Trail Day 18
Distance: 8.5 miles
Cumulative Distance: 178 miles
Total Ascent: 2,434 ft
Cumulative Ascent: 47,168 ft
Harrison Map Sheets 3 and 2
The first two miles the JMT followed the cascading creek down the valley to the wonderful Woods Creek suspension bridge. This is a marvel of engineering made even more remarkable by the fact that it’s located miles from civilization. Signs at the bridge instruct hikers to cross one at a time, and of all the footbridges we cross on the JMT, this one stands out.

Woods Creek Suspension Bridge on the JMT

On the other side, we paused for our first break, well aware that the remainder of our hike we would climb over 2,400 feet.

It was a warm, dry day, and the forest thinned as we climbed.  At the 5.8 mile mark, we stopped at Dollar Lake (10,200ft.). There were some beautiful shady spots, so we stopped and actually cooked a dinner for lunch — a first for us.

Dollar Lake

After a leisurely lakeside meal, we headed back up the JMT towards the Rae Lakes. This chain of three lakes are renown for their beauty, and the Rae Lakes Loop is a popular backpacking route in Kings Canyon National Park.

In the spirit of John Muir, we sauntered along the east shore of the lakes, stopping at the ranger station to check for word on Hari and Jeffrey. They outlined their plans for the remaining days, and were actually picking up additional miles with the goal of exiting at Whitney Portal one or even two days early. We added our plans, so the rangers would be aware, and continued on.

Rae Lakes

We paused to say hello to Steady, a north-bound Pacific Crest Trail thru-hiker from Australia. He and his wife — Slow — had no prior backpacking experience. They had seen a documentary about the PCT and decided it looked an an adventure worth doing. They bought two tickets to San Diego, stopped at REI to buy equipment, and were on the trail a few days later. Slow and Steady had covered a big section of the PCT already, and did quite well in spite of their lack of experience. After 3-1/2 months on the trail, they had become experts.

Steady (of Slow and Steady)

As we headed past the second lake, we saw two 8-point bucks grazing nearby, unfazed by our presence.

Stag at Rae Lakes

But the best was yet to come, as the John Muir Trail threads between the second and third Rae Lakes, we had stunning views of the dome named The Painted Lady. Why is it called this? This photo says it all.

IMG_2746

At the far side of the Rae Lakes, we found a campsite for the night.

Day 18 JMT Campsite

In the end, we had logged a mere 8.5 miles. It was an easy day, but we were well positioned to tackle Glen Pass tomorrow.

Flexibility
JMT-JeffHaving a plan is essential. Our planning prepared us physically and mentally for the rigors of the JMT. But having flexibility is also essential. We took a hard look at our itinerary and decided it would be worth having a lighter day today. Giving our bodies a chance to rest, and camping close to Glen Pass, we could make up the mileage over the next four days.

Plan, but allow flexibility.

Trail Map: Woods Creek to Rae Lakes

Download file: JMT-Day-18.gpx

JMT Day 18 Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Subscribe to our Newsletter

Don’t miss a single day in our JMT series! Subscribe now and get email updates for each post on SoCal Hiker.

Got a question about the JMT? Something you’d like more info on? Post a question in the JMT forum!

Tomorrow, we head to over Glen Pass to Vidette Meadow.

Originally hiked on August 13, 2010.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-woods-creek-to-the-rae-lakes/feed/ 11
Thru-Hiking the JMT: Over Pinchot Pass to Woods Creek https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-over-pinchot-pass-to-woods-creek/ https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-over-pinchot-pass-to-woods-creek/#comments Tue, 13 Aug 2013 05:34:56 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=7306 Lake Marjorie Panorama

Day 17 on the John Muir Trail…

We awoke just before sunrise, with frozen beads of condensation clinging to outside of our tent. It was chilly. Boil water! Make coffee! Stat!

John Muir Trail Day 17
Distance: 11.1 miles
Cumulative Distance: 169.5 miles
Total Ascent: 2,194 ft
Cumulative Ascent: 44,734 ft
Harrison Map Sheets 4 and 3
Most of this trip, we were spending all day in shorts and short sleeves. I put on my knit cap at night to keep my head warm, but rarely needed more than my Marmot fleece jacket after sundown. This morning was an exception. I had the fingerless wool gloves on, the knit cap, the fleece and my shell on. It was cold. We ate our breakfast and headed downhill to our Kings River crossing. This was a pretty big crossing, but we were able to get across without removing our boots. And then we began our climb leading us to today’s pass — 12,130ft Pinchot Pass.

Crossing Kings River

As we headed up towards Lake Marjorie, we saw a note from Jeffrey and Hari taped to one of the trail signs. We were instructed to “stop by the ranger station.” We took a break and wandered about a 1/4 mile off trail to the ranger station — no more than a seasonal tent cabin. We chatted with the rangers and learned that Jeffrey and Hari were doing fine (as were we). They would relay a radio message up ahead to let them know all was well. Good communication and collaboration from all involved. Lake Marjorie was a beautiful blue that mirrored the blue skies we enjoyed. The air was brisk, but the sun warm, and with 5.5 miles behind us, we were feeling good. We stopped for lunch on a rock outcropping overlooking the last unnamed lake before Pinchot Pass.

 

Resting at Lake Marjorie

Pinchot was a pretty easy pass, as far as passes go. Our vertical gain was “only” about 2,200 feet. When we reached the pass, we stopped and visited with a trio of backpackers on a week-long trip.

Party on Pinchot Pass

Passes, Peaks, and Creek Crossings
JMT-JeffAs much as I love coffee, there are (thankfully) no Starbucks on the JMT. But there are natural gathering places where hikers tend to congregate, enjoy a break and swap stories. Throughout our day, we would come to a creek crossing, or a mountain pass, and almost every time there would be other hikers taking the opportunity to rest, take photos, or just take a load off. Take the time to say hello. The people we met on the JMT were an awesome, friendly bunch. When you’re out there, say hello and strike up a conversation. We’re all connected through the shared experience of the trail.
From Pinchot Pass, we descended over 2,600 feet in five miles. The trail was easy, but we were weary by the time we reached Woods Creek. 

Upper Woods Creek

We followed the creek down the basin into a narrow canyon dotted with waterfalls, and stopped for the night at the first campsite we found, sharing with a young couple from Quebec.

Camping Here for Day 17

Our Evening Ritual on the JMT

Each night at camp, we went through more or less the same routine. Our evening ritual began with setting up the tent. Then, down to the creek to filter water. We would typically fill the four 32-ounce bottles, pumping the water through the filter. It’s a chore, but a necessary part of the routine. After refilling our water, we’d settle down to preparing dinner. Pumping and priming my white fuel stove, then boiling water for a hot beverage and our rehydrated dinner. We’d use our bear canisters as stools as we filled our bellies with a warm meal, then clean everything up. Most nights, we were in bed by 9pm. Sometimes, we’d take turns reading aloud from a cheesy paperback novel we brought along, or simply talking about the day behind… or the day ahead. Sleep comes easily, and is well-earned on the John Muir Trail.

Trail Map: Kings River to Pinchot Pass to Woods Creek

Download file: JMT-Day-17.gpx

JMT Day 17 Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Subscribe to our Newsletter

Don’t miss a single day in our JMT series! Subscribe now and get email updates for each post on SoCal Hiker. Got a question about the JMT? Something you’d like more info on? Post a question in the JMT forum!

Tomorrow, we head from Woods Creek to Rae Lakes.

Originally hiked on August 12, 2010.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-over-pinchot-pass-to-woods-creek/feed/ 6
Thru-Hiking the JMT: The Golden Staircase and Mather Pass to Kings River https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-golden-staircase-mather-pass-to-kings-river/ https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-golden-staircase-mather-pass-to-kings-river/#comments Sun, 11 Aug 2013 23:50:05 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=7302 Looking South from Mather Pass

Day 16 on the John Muir Trail…

Today we climb the Golden Staircase, past the Palisade Lakes and up over Mather Pass (12,100ft). We will climb 4,682 feet and descend 2,486 feet, logging 12.6 miles in the process. In other words, this will be a big day in every respect.

John Muir Trail Day 16
Distance: 12.6 miles
Cumulative Distance: 158.4 miles
Total Ascent: 4,682 ft
Cumulative Ascent: 42,540 ft
Harrison Map Sheet 4
We started up the valley paralleling Palisade Creek up to Deer Meadow and started up the Golden Staircase.

Why is it called the Golden Staircase? First of all, it’s a steep series of switchbacks that will take you up, up and UP in a very short distance. Some call it Mother Nature’s StairMaster. Second, if you catch it toward the golden hour before sunset, the light reflects off cascading Palisade Creek giving it a golden glow.

We took our time on the Golden Staircase, and while it was tough, we were tougher. Joan and I can tell that two weeks of hiking the JMT has really made a difference. We reached the high shelf above the Golden Staircase feeling strong.

Looking Down the Golden Staircase

We had logged about five miles, and stopped to enjoy lunch beside Palisade Creek. It was a beautiful day, with a good breeze. Not much shade, unfortunately, as we were above the tree line.

Above the Golden Staircase

Refueled and rehydrated, we continued on. About a half mile up the trail we came across the first of the two Palisade Lakes. These are beautiful lakes, and the trail follows the canyon wall around their north-east shoreline.

Palisade Lake

Beyond Upper Palisade Lake the land became increasingly stark and Mather Pass loomed high above us. We would have a lot of climbing yet to do.

Climbing Mather Pass

When we finally reached Mather Pass, we rested, drank water and took some photos. The climbing behind us, it would be all downhill for the rest of the day.

The descent on the south side of Mather Pass is intimidating. The trail is narrow with a series of switchbacks down a slope that seems impossibly steep. We had to keep our eyes on the trail — one misstep could be catastrophic.

It’s difficult to adequately express how steep this section of the trail is. To give you some sense, after we reached the Upper Basin, I paused to look back towards Mather Pass, and spotted a pack train slowly making their way down the trail. Impressive, and scary.

Pack Train Descending Mather Pass

The Upper Basin looks a  bit like a moonscape.

Upper-Basin-(south-of-Mather-Pass)

We headed down along the headwaters of the Kings River. Other than the pack train behind us, we hadn’t seen anyone since the Palisade Lakes. It had been a long day, and while we originally had hoped to camp at the South Fork Junction, the sun was getting low and we started looking for a suitable place to camp for the night.

We were just beginning to get back below the tree line, when we saw a scraggly solo hiker headed up the trail. We stopped and said hello, and talked about where were were coming from. I asked the older gentleman if I could take a photo of him — to which he replied “I should probably tell you who I am…”

Reinhold Metzger

It turns out that we had run into Reinhold Metzger. He was 69 years old and on a 14-day NOBO (north-bound) JMT thru-hike — his 12th time. Not only that, but Reinhold previously held the unsupported thru-hike speed record of 4 days, 12 hours and 45 minutes.

The sun was setting, but Reinhold was planning to hike over Mather Pass and see how far he got. His gear was not particularly fancy or new — he even had an old external frame backpack. He was thinking about picking up some ultralight gear and maybe doing a yo-yo of the JMT (in his case, hiking north-bound, then turn around and doing it again south-bound).

Hike Your Own Hike
JMT-JeffSome of my friends will hear about Reinhold’s hiking pace and his age, and give me some ribbing hiking the JMT so much slower. Still others will suggest he’s nuts for hiking in darkness and claim he’s missing the point.

The real truth? Our reasons for hiking are vastly different. Our ability to go further or faster vary. What we want to achieve can be very different, as well. So whether you’re hiking locally, or on the JMT, hike your own hike.

Trail Map: The Golden Staircase, Mather Pass and the Upper Basin

Download file: JMT-Day-16.gpx

JMT Day 16 Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Subscribe to our Newsletter

Don’t miss a single day in our JMT series! Subscribe now and get email updates for each post on SoCal Hiker.

Got a question about the JMT? Something you’d like more info on? Post a question in the JMT forum!

Tomorrow, we head over Pinchot Pass to Woods Creek.

Originally hiked on August 11, 2010.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-golden-staircase-mather-pass-to-kings-river/feed/ 9
Thru-Hiking the JMT: Over Muir Pass to Helen Lake https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-over-muir-pass-to-helen-lake/ https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-over-muir-pass-to-helen-lake/#comments Sat, 10 Aug 2013 00:33:38 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=7150 Muir Hut at Muir Pass

Day 14 on the John Muir Trail…

This morning we warmed ourselves by a campfire as our new friend Brian defrosted his pants, still wet from his creek crossing yesterday. Today we would hike over Muir Pass (11,955′) — our highest pass to date and home to the iconic stone Muir Hut.

John Muir Trail Day 14
Distance: 10.1 miles
Cumulative Distance: 134 miles
Total Ascent: 3,155 ft
Cumulative Ascent: 36,626 ft
Harrison Map Sheets 6 and 5
Our distance was manageable, but we were going to be hiking at ever higher elevations from here on out. As a point of reference, Muir Pass is higher than San Gorgonio — which at 11,503′ is the tallest peak in Southern California. Starting in Yosemite Valley two weeks ago, we had plenty of time to acclimate to the altitude, but this was our highest yet, and we didn’t know exactly how it would affect our bodies. We would soon find out.

McClure Meadow at Sunrise

The  first section of the trail followed the forested floor of Evolution Valley, gradually climbing.

Hiking through Evolution Valley

At the two mile mark, we climbed a series of switchbacks, taking us above the tree-line, where we would remain for the rest of the day. The landscape changes above the tree-line, sometimes resembling a moonscape — other than the the lakes dotting our path.

We stopped at Evolution Lake to filter water, munch on some food and enjoy a little patch of green grass under the blue skies.

Filtering Water at Evolution Lake

Joan Considers Homesteading
JMT-JoanAfter leaving Evolution Lake, I wasn’t feeling well. My head ached, and my stomach was uneasy. I didn’t know if I could go on, and at one point I decided I was going to sit down and live in that spot for the rest of my life.

Jeffrey suggested I eat something every hour. There are times when you don’t feel hungry or thirsty, but at these altitudes, it’s more important than ever to provide hydration and fuel.

I ate, rested and we continued on, albiet at a slower pace. And as much as I loved the beauty of the mountains, I’m glad they talked me out of living the rest of my life in that spot on the trail.  

During our break, Hari and Jeffrey were concerned that Joan might not make it to the end of the John Muir Trail. After rest, food, water and some time to think, we reached a decision. Hari and Jeff would hike on ahead as a team. Joan and I would stick together as a team. We would stick with the original exit date, but they would not wait up for us if we took longer.

We hoisted our backpacks and hiked on, now officially in two teams.

Wanda Lake was beautiful, but the weather was becoming bleak. Dark clouds loomed ominously, and the wind chilled us.

Wanda Lake

The Final Stretch to Muir Pass

I have to pause here to say a few words about that final mile to Muir Pass. It sucks. It’s a dreary, “trail” up an area covered with granite gravel. There is no dirt — just softball-sized gravel that makes each step a chore. It didn’t help matters that we were tired and it was towards the end of our day, or that we were at the highest altitude yet. But we had spied Muir Hut on the pass, and were determined to reach it.

And reach it we did. We took time to take some photos and duck inside where we had protection from the wind.

Jeff & Joan at Muir Hut

Muir Hut

Muir Hut is a marvel of construction. It’s built of rocks gathered from the area, but sand and other materials had to be brought in four or more miles. The conical roof structure is amazing, especially from inside. Clark Fork has additional details on the history of Muir Hut.

“This building was constructed in 1930 by the Sierra Club in cooperation with the Sierra National Forest and dedicated to the memory of John Muir.

The Muir Hut is intended as a temporary shelter for hikers caught in storms on this exposed section of the trail. Overnight camping and fires are prohibited.” – From the plaque inside Muir Hut

At this point, the clouds were looking pretty ominous, we decided to hike down the trail and make camp at the first good spot. We didn’t have to go far. We set up near a small unnamed lake just above Helen Lake. We had just barely enough room to clear an area for our tent, but we had an amazing view of the light show as the sun set.

Helen Lake

We had two weeks on the John Muir Trail under our belts. It was another rewarding day on the trail.

Trail Map: McClure Meadow to Muir Pass and Helen Lake

Download file: JMT-Day-14.gpx

JMT Day 14 Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Subscribe to our Newsletter

Don’t miss a single day in our JMT series! Subscribe now and get email updates for each post on SoCal Hiker.

Got a question about the JMT? Something you’d like more info on? Post a question in the JMT forum!

Tomorrow, we hike through the stunning Le Conte Canyon and up Palisade Creek

Originally hiked on August 9, 2010.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-over-muir-pass-to-helen-lake/feed/ 3
Thru-Hiking the JMT: Rosemarie Meadow to Muir Trail Ranch https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-rosemarie-meadow-to-muir-trail-ranch/ https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-rosemarie-meadow-to-muir-trail-ranch/#comments Wed, 07 Aug 2013 21:50:09 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=6909 WP GPX Maps Error: GPX file not found! /home/runcloud/webapps/app-socalhiker/wp-content/uploads/JMT-Day-12.gpx Heart Lake

Day 12 on the John Muir Trail…

John Muir Trail Day 12
Distance: 8.45 miles
Cumulative Distance: 113.1 miles
Total Ascent: 1,292 ft
Cumulative Ascent: 29,435 ft
Harrison Map Sheets 8 and 7
Today was a relatively easy day. We started just below 10,000 feet, so our climb up Seldon Pass (10,900′) wasn’t too difficult. From here, we headed down, down, down to Muir Trail Ranch for our final resupply. Yes, you read correctly. Muir Trail Ranch would be our final resupply point. That meant that we would be picking up ten days of food, which at an average of 2 lbs. of food per person, per day works out to 20 lbs. of food each of us would be adding to our backs.

Carrying that 20 lbs. won’t be the biggest challenge. Our bodies have grown accustomed to the rigors of the life on the trail. We’ve got our “trail legs.” The real challenge will be getting 10 days of food to fit inside the mandatory bear canisters.

Waking up in Rosemarie Meadow was a beautiful start to the day. The sun glistened on the lazy creek. Frost coated the grass.

Rosemarie Meadow

We warmed up with scrambled eggs (powdered, and not half bad), spiced up with slices of a beef stick and some olive oil;  and our morning coffee (Starbucks Via).

Breakfast - it all began as powder.

We warmed up quickly as we began to climb Seldon Pass, in what would become our pattern for the days ahead — climb a pass, descend, camp. Rinse and repeat.

En route to the pass the JMT took us by the crystal-clear waters of Marie Lake. It never ceases to amaze me how clear and beautiful these lakes are. We could easily pick out the trout swimming in the water.

Beautiful clear water of Marie Lake

We regrouped at Seldon Pass, breaking for a snack (Clif Bar, anyone?) and snapping the requisite photos.

Hari, Jeffrey and Jeff on Seldon Pass

Just below the pass, we paused for yet another photo opportunity at Heart Lake. Yes, that is Joan and I standing in the “V” of the heart-shaped lake. The full view of the lake is at the top of this post.

Jeff and Joan at Heart Lake

Descending from Heart Lake, we followed the babbling water of Sallie Keyes Creek, which led to none other that the twin Sallie Keyes Lakes. These scenic lakes sit side by side, and the JMT travels right between them on a narrow band of forest. We stopped for lunch, but not for long — the mosquitos were also hungry.

Between Sallie Keyes Lakes

Finally we began to descend the steep canyon walls through a series of switchbacks. At the 7.6 mile mark, we reached a junction that took us off the JMT and down towards Muir Trail Ranch.

Junction to MTR

At Muir Trail Ranch, we checked in and they started searching for our resupply packages. Due to the size, we had shipped three 5-gallon buckets. While we waited, we rummaged through the backpacker’s buckets — a set of buckets with “extra” stuff donated to anyone who needs it. We were like kids in a candy shop.

The Resupply Barn

Bad News

They found one of the three buckets — with the supplies for Joan and I. But Hari and Jeffrey’s buckets were nowhere to be found. They double- and triple-checked the storage shed. Nothing in their inventory log, although they could see that we had paid for them. We waited for the tractor to delivery today’s shipment, but it wasn’t on there. We were getting worried.

The wonderful folks at MTR felt bad for this, and promised it had never happened before. They invited us to join them for dinner tonight and breakfast in the morning, and we were welcome to scrounge through the backpacker’s cache for anything we needed.

Joan took advantage of their offer to use the hot baths, and we enjoyed an amazing dinner alongside their regular guests. Jeffrey and Hari were able to pick through the extra supplies and piece together meals for the remainder of the trip.

Hot Bath at MTR

Now the only challenge remaining was getting it all in our bear canisters.

We did not.

We ended up with some stuff that we threw into a bear bag and hung for the night. We chose the non-smelly, non-essentials, and hoped for the best.

Evening Light

Learning to Expect the Unexpected
JMT-HariWe were  disappointed when our buckets didn’t turn up at MTR. Fortunately, there was more than enough food in the backpacker’s cache that we were able to do just fine.

JMT-Jeffrey

With any big hike like the JMT, it’s important to remember that things will not go as planned. Something will go wrong, somewhere along the way. It’s important to keep a good attitude and be flexible.

Trail Map: Rosemarie Meadow to Muir Trail Ranch

Download file: JMT-Day-12.gpx

JMT Day 12 Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Subscribe to our Newsletter

Don’t miss a single day in our JMT series! Subscribe now and get email updates for each post on SoCal Hiker.

Got a question about the JMT? Something you’d like more info on? Post a question in the JMT forum!

Tomorrow, we head from Muir Trail Ranch to McClure Meadow.

Originally hiked on August 8, 2010.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-rosemarie-meadow-to-muir-trail-ranch/feed/ 8
Thru-Hiking the JMT: A Zero Day at Vermilion Valley Resort https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-a-zero-day-at-vermilion-valley-resort/ https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-a-zero-day-at-vermilion-valley-resort/#comments Tue, 06 Aug 2013 04:39:01 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=6806 VVR-panorama

Day 10 on the John Muir Trail…

Today was a special day. Today was a zero day — hiker-speak for a rest day or “zero-mileage” day. And Vermilion Valley Resort was the perfect place for it.

John Muir Trail Day 10
Distance: 0.0 miles
Cumulative Distance: 93.15 miles
Total Ascent: 0 ft
Cumulative Ascent: 24,300 ft
Harrison Map Sheet 8
VVR caters to thru-hikers and fisherman, and is a popular resupply stop on both the JMT and the Pacific Crest Trail (the PCT). The resort gets completely socked in during the winter, and only opens up when the roads  clear. Our VVR experience began yesterday when we stepped onto their water taxi for the four mile boat ride across Lake Edison. This was the first time in 9 days that we traveled without using our own two legs — other than for sitting.

When we arrived at VVR, we checked in and they opened a tab for our expenses. You settle up before you leave, and since we would be here for two nights, there would be plenty of opportunities to part with our money.

Welcome to VVR

Last night, we set up camp in the free tent camping area, then feasted on steak and cold beer in the dining hall. The dining hall has a rotating menu and a few optional choices, and the seating is on long benches which you share with your new best friends.

This morning, I awoke at sunrise, and wandered down to the lakefront. The water was still and a mist swirled above it as the sun warmed the surface.

Lake Edison from VVR

Joan and I managed to book a small room for the night. In addition to a free tent camping area, VVR also has tent cabin and actual rooms for rent. The first thing we did after checking into our room was shower. The second thing was start our laundry. Yes, VVR has a washer and dryer, too.

We picked up our resupply package and distributed it among Hari, Joan, Jeffrey and I. We at breakfast, lunch and dinner in the dining hall, enjoying the extra calories and guilt-free eating. “Yes, I believe I will have a slice of pie, thank you!”

Dining at VVR

But the best part about VVR wasn’t sleeping in a real bed. It wasn’t the steak or the pie. The best part about VVR was the conversations we had with other hikers at the dinner table and around the campfire at night. These conversations enlightened, entertained and inspired us. The hiker community is bound by the experiences we shared, and those bonds are stronger for it.

We met many thru-hikers, some hiking it for their second or third time. One young  couple were headed northbound. The family who with the “missing” teen hiker on day 7 was there. All of us were glad to share a hot meal for once not cooked over a backpacking stove.

Plan B - Exit the JMT?
JMT-JoanComing off of Silver Pass yesterday, I was in a lot of pain. The blisters on my feet really hurt. I had serious doubts that I could continue, and was  considering exiting the JMT at VVR. Around the dinner table last night, I heard everyone sharing their own stories of blisters, aches and pains. Everyone shared their  remedies for treating blisters, and I was encouraged. I realized what I was experiencing was pretty typical.

That evening, Jeff told me he hoped I would consider continuing, but the decision would have to be mine.Today, I treated my blisters and rested, and made my decision… I would finish hiking the John Muir Trail.

Taking a zero day recharged our batteries, and the experience at VVR was memorable. We were ready to once again hit the JMT tomorrow.

Important! Check Lake Conditions with VVR

In 2010, Lake Edison was at capacity. In 2013, the water levels had dropped quite a bit, meaning a longer walk to the boat launch, especially on the west end of the lake. The moonscape below is actually the lake bed. No, it’s not dried up, but you can see the levels are way down.

Lake-Edison-July-2013

Subscribe to our Newsletter

Don’t miss a single day in our JMT series! Subscribe now and get email updates for each post on SoCal Hiker.

Got a question about the JMT? Something you’d like more info on? Post a question in the JMT forum!

Tomorrow, we head to from Mono Creek to Rosemarie Meadow.

Originally hiked on August 5, 2010.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-a-zero-day-at-vermilion-valley-resort/feed/ 3
Thru-Hiking the JMT: Tully Hole to Vermilion Valley Resort https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-tully-hole-to-vermilion-valley-resort/ https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-tully-hole-to-vermilion-valley-resort/#comments Mon, 05 Aug 2013 05:27:54 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=6735 Still Below Silver Pass

Day 9 on the John Muir Trail…

Today, we climb 10,900 ft Silver Pass. Our total ascent is 2,272 ft, but we will also be descending 4,121 ft. to Lake Thomas Edison, where we will ferry to the far end of the lake to rest and resupply at Vermilion Valley Resort. VVR takes us several miles off the John Muir Trail, but it’s a detour well worth taking.

John Muir Trail Day 9
Distance: 11.75 miles
Cumulative Distance: 93.15 miles
Total Ascent: 2,272 ft
Cumulative Ascent: 24,300 ft
Harrison Map Sheet 8
We clambered back down from our secret campsite, taking the JMT downhill beside Fish Creek. The water quickened as the canyon narrowed, turning into a churning cascade.

It’s a beautiful section of the trail, and we started off feeling good about the day.

Fish Creek Cascades

We cross Fish Creek at this impressively sturdy bridge, and begin our climb to Silver Pass.

Bridge over Fish Creek

Our trail takes us up about 2,400 feet in just over three miles.  If you’re lucky, you might find a great place to sit and rest.

Rest Stop

We were well above tree line, and the sun was warm, but not unpleasant. The views on the trail to Silver Pass are expansive as it winds between a Squaw, Chief, Warrior and Papoose Lakes.

Below Silver Pass

At about 4.25 miles, we finally reached Silver Pass, and took a break for lunch.

Silver Pass

From Silver Pass, we headed down to Silver Lake and then alongside Silver Pass Creek. The persistent downhill trail began to take a toll on our feet.

Silver Pass Eats Joan's Feet
JMT-JoanGoing up is one kind of challenge, but the downhill trail puts a strain on the joints and the feet. My feet were hurting pretty bad on the descent, and even after stopping numerous times to apply moleskin and readjust my boots, each step was excruciating.

Finally, we reached Mono Creek. The trail follows the creek for miles, but with a much more gentle descent. At the 10 mile mark, we reach a bridge crossing the creek, and a junction towards Lake Thomas Edison.

We headed another 1.5 miles to the ferry landing for Vermilion Valley Resort — commonly referred to as VVR. We were feeling pressure to get there before the last boat left at 5pm. We made it.

On the Ferry

The Hiker’s Water Taxi

VVR’s ferry service runs from the east end to the west end of Lake Edison and costs $19 for round trip service. It is possible to hike the route, following the trail along the lake, but this adds 4.8 miles to your journey. For details on hours of operation and alternatives, check the VVR Water Taxi site.

The trip to the opposite end of the lake was longer than I expected. It took nearly 30 minutes to get from one end to the other. When we arrived, we found a campsite and headed to the VVR cafe for steaks and cold beer.

Welcome to VVR

Sitting around the communal tables, sharing stories with other thru-hikers we became an instant community. Looking forward to a zero day tomorrow didn’t hurt, either.

Tully Hole to Vermilion Valley Resort

Download file: JMT-Day-9.gpx

JMT Day 9 Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Subscribe to our Newsletter

Don’t miss a single day in our JMT series! Subscribe now and get email updates for each post on SoCal Hiker.

Got a question about the JMT? Something you’d like more info on? Post a question in the JMT forum!

Tomorrow, we enjoy our a “zero day” at VVR

Originally hiked on August 4, 2010.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-tully-hole-to-vermilion-valley-resort/feed/ 6
Thru-Hiking the JMT: Deer Creek to Tully Hole https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-deer-creek-to-tully-hole/ https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-deer-creek-to-tully-hole/#comments Sat, 03 Aug 2013 23:18:08 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=6626 Tully Hole

Day 8 on the John Muir Trail…

After a “half day” of hiking yesterday, we looked forward to getting back on the trail today. We planned to head from Deer Creek to Tully Hole — about 12 miles. The elevation gain would be mainly slow and steady, and we would be hiking right at the tree line most of the day.

John Muir Trail Day 8
Distance: 11.1 miles
Cumulative Distance: 81.4 miles
Total Ascent: 2,572 ft
Cumulative Ascent: 22,028 ft
Harrison Map Sheets 9 and 8
We headed south as the trail clung to the steep  sides of Cascade Valley, rewarding us with inspiring views to the west. The first few miles are dry and dusty, with no good sources of water, but we were well prepared.

This was effortless climbing, relatively speaking. As we  headed south along the side of the valley, the trail was climbing the entire way, but with no switchbacks and a gentle grade, we barely noticed.

South Towards Purple Lake

At mile five we stopped for a lazy lunch break at Duck Creek, kicking the boots off and soaking in the cold, refreshing water.

IMG_2508

As we sat in the shade happily munching on our lunch, an older gentleman named Al happened by. He was a solo north-bound — or NOBO — JMT thru-hiker, and he was on track to complete the JMT in 14 days with no resupply. This was Al’s second JMT thru-hike. The first time, years earlier, he had used “traditional” backpacking gear (much as we had) weighing in at over 40 lbs. This time around he went ultra-light. His base pack weight was a mere 14 lbs. 

IMG_2509

We pondered the benefits and trade-offs of going ultra-light as we finished our lunch. And as we heaved our packs back up on our backs to continue hiking, we were pretty sure Al was on to something.

At mile 7.3, we came across the beautiful Purple Lake. The steep mountain sides leading to Purple Lake left us wondering whether there were many — or any — good campsites there, but it had a wild feel about it that was attractive.

Purple-Lake

From Purple lake we ascended the saddle reaching the highest point on today’s hike en route to Lake Virginia. This doesn’t look like much, but it was hot and dusty.

Between-Purple-and-Virginia-Lakes

Lake Virginia was big and beautiful. The John Muir Trail passes the inlet to Lake Virginia, then skirts the eastern border before passing over another saddle and the final descent to Tully Hole.

Lake Virginia

One of the joys of thru-hiking is the people you meet along the trail. We had crossed paths with numerous other thru-hikers, some of them several times. And as our JMT crew stretched out, each of us hiking our own pace, we would sometimes encounter the same people, but at different times.

Lake Virginia

On this day, Hari had hiked up ahead and ran into a Ranger at Lake Virginia. He was checking for two things: permits and bear canisters.  Hari had a long, friendly conversation with the Ranger while he waited for the rest of us to catch up. The Ranger had run across a two guys who were backpacking without a bear canister — a big no-no — and was escorting them back to his camp where he was going to graciously loan them a spare canister. That’s pretty awesome.

Hari and The Secret Ranger Campsite
JMT-HariBeing friendly has its benefits. Our intended destination was Tully Hole — which we learned was famous for mosquitos. Talking to the Ranger about our plans, he revealed a “secret campsite” that the Rangers sometimes used. It’s not on the maps.

When we reached Fish Creek, we crossed over and did a short boulder scramble up to a granite outcrop. Here there was enough of a breeze through the canyon to keep most of the mosquitos at bay. 

The trail down to Tully Hole drops 1,000 feet in about a mile with a series of switchbacks. As we got closer to the bottom, we could make out the granite outcrop with our new “secret campsite” destination.

Pics 052 378

Our “secret” campsite was awesome. We cooked dinner, relaxed and enjoyed an amazing light show as the sun set. Joan did a great job of capturing the changes in colors on the nearby mountains.

JMT Day 8: Deer Creek to Tully Hole

Download file: JMT-Day-8.gpx

JMT Day 8 Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Subscribe to our Newsletter

Don’t miss a single day in our JMT series! Subscribe now and get email updates for each post on SoCal Hiker.

Got a question about the JMT? Something you’d like more info on? Post a question in the JMT forum!

Tomorrow, we head over Silver Pass, down to Edison Lake and Vermilion Valley Resort.

Originally hiked on August 3, 2010.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-deer-creek-to-tully-hole/feed/ 5
Thru-Hiking the JMT: Devil’s Postpile to Deer Creek https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-devils-postpile-to-deer-creek/ https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-devils-postpile-to-deer-creek/#comments Sat, 03 Aug 2013 00:52:02 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=6559 Fire Damaged Forest

Day 7 on the John Muir Trail…

John Muir Trail Day 7
Distance: 6.5 miles
Cumulative Distance: 70.3 miles
Total Ascent: 2,067 ft
Cumulative Ascent: 19,456 ft
Harrison Map Sheets 10 and 9
We were tired from our 13 mile hike yesterday, and this would be an easy day. We would feast at the Mulehouse Cafe at Red’s Meadow, pick up our second resupply package, have a surprise visit from some old friends, and hike only half our normal average — just 6.5 miles.

As we broke camp, we said goodbye to our new friend and gracious campsite host Chris Ryerson. He was on a 45-day walkabout in the High Sierras. No specific agenda or route, just hiking up and down and over and about from one mountain to the next. We were grateful that he offered to share his campsite with us, and we still keep in touch.

Chris Ryerson

The first stop was about 1/2 a mile away: Red’s Meadow Resort. They have a small market and you can ship resupply packages to them. We ate breakfast at their Mulehouse Cafe, and then divvied up our resupply package.

Red's Meadow Resort

Sometime that morning, I got in touch with a friend who lives in Mammoth Lakes, and was one of the members of my first JMT thru-hike back in 1980. As it turns out, his mom (who was also part of that 1980 thru-hike) and dad were in town, and they surprised us with a visit at Red’s Meadow.

Don & Zandra

We ended up spending all morning hanging out with Don and Zandra, reminiscing about our 1980 JMT thru-hike and catching up. Before we knew it, it was lunch time… so back to the cafe we went.

Get the Milkshake
JMT-JeffreyWhen (not if) you stop at the Mulehouse Cafe in Red’s Meadow, you must order a milkshake. With whipped cream.

It may very well be the best milkshake you have ever tasted. 

After lunch, with full bellies and full packs, we were finally ready to hit the trail.

There are quite a few trails criss-crossing the Red’s Meadow area, and getting on the right one is important. We found the JMT and headed south.

Almost immediately, we emerged in a fire-scarred mountainside. The area is full of new growth, with new pine trees, lupen, and ferns everywhere. And not a bit of shade for quite a while. Being the middle of the day, the sun beat down on us as we climbed out of the valley.

IMG_2491

We came upon a mountain spring that percolated into a creek right before our eyes.

Mountain Spring

After two miles, we finally exited the fire damaged area and entered the cool shade of the forest again.

Minarets across the valley

Crossing Crater Creek at the 3.6 mile mark, we stopped for a break in the shade of the forest.

Pics 052 206

Lost on the JMT
JMT-JeffAt the Crater Creek crossing, we met another group of JMT thru-hikers that we had crossed paths with a couple times before. This family group had a teen who it seems ended up on the wrong trail, and they were trying to locate him. Their story has a happy ending. They found the teen (he had headed north instead of south) and were able to continue their journey.

The lesson? Two heads are better than one. If you’re hiking with a group, have a plan to stick together, or meet up at trail junctions. 

The last three miles were easy and scenic. Most of the time we were near either Crater Creek or Deer Creek. There were wildflowers, meadows, and gentle grades. We were all glad to have had an easy “half day” of hiking.

Devil’s Postpile, Red’s Meadow to Deer Creek

Download file: JMT-Day-7.gpx

JMT Day 7 Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Subscribe to our Newsletter

Don’t miss a single day in our JMT series! Subscribe now and get email updates for each post on SoCal Hiker.

Got a question about the JMT? Something you’d like more info on? Post a question in the JMT forum!

Tomorrow, we hike to Tully Hole.

Originally hiked on August 2, 2010.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-devils-postpile-to-deer-creek/feed/ 7
Thru-Hiking the JMT: Thousand Island Lake to Reds Meadow https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-thousand-island-lake-to-reds-meadow/ https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-thousand-island-lake-to-reds-meadow/#comments Fri, 02 Aug 2013 00:37:10 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=6438 Devil's Postpile

Day 6 on the John Muir Trail…

I woke up before sunrise to take  photos. Thousand Island Lake was still, reflecting Banner Peak like a mirror. The sun cast a brilliant yellow glow as it struck the mountains, and we welcomed the warm rays.

Thousand Island Lake Panorama

At 9,850 feet, Thousand Island Lake is just below the tree line. It got downright cold overnight, although we were comfortable in our sleeping bags and tent. “Tent-less” Hari awoke to a dust of frost on his pad and sleeping bag, but even he was warm inside. The hard part is getting up and out.

John Muir Trail Day 6
Distance: 13.3 miles
Cumulative Distance: 63.8 miles
Total Ascent: 2,619 ft
Cumulative Ascent: 17,389 ft
Harrison Map Sheets 11 & 10
Today was going to be a long day, but with a lot of downhill. We would be descending to Red’s Meadow (7,580 ft) near the iconic Devil’s Postpile National Monument. In Red’s Meadow there is a store and a cafe. There is a road into the area from Mammoth Lakes, although access is limited. We were looking forward to replenishing our caloric deficit with a big meal at the cafe, and picking up our second food resupply from the store.

When you look at the elevation profile, it looks like it’s “mostly” downhill. Beware! Elevation profiles can be deceiving. The scale of the profile might lead you to think that there’s a few little hills, but a largely downhill hike. While there is more down than up on this segment, those “little hills” amounted to nearly 2000 feet of elevation gain. At over 13 miles, this was also one of our longest days so far.

So we struck out early and began the hiking the “roller coaster” trail that strings together the lakes named for precious gems: Emerald, Ruby and Garnet Lakes.

Emerald and Ruby Lakes are small, but stunning. The aquamarine waters run very deep, and we could see the trout swimming about.

Ruby Lake

Garnet Lake looks similar to Thousand Island Lake, and offers views of both Mt. Ritter and Banner Peak (left and right, respectively). I had summited Banner Peak 34 years earlier, and the area brings back fond memories.

Garnet Lake

Soon we descended towards Shadow Creek. The JMT follows the creek along a series of beautiful rapids and falls. A perfect spot for our lunch.

Shadow Creek lunch stop

The creek empties into Shadow Lake, another beauty, but off-limits for camping due to over use.

Shadow Lake

The JMT skirts the west and southern edge of Shadow Lake, then heads up over another “little hill.” Finally we were on the descent to Red’s Meadow. This section was seemed longer than it was. Being at a lower elevation, the forest was thicker and shaded us from the afternoon sun. But the trail never seemed to end.

Finally we heard the roar of Minaret Falls. We were on the last steep descent to the valley and Red’s Meadow.

When we reached the junction with the trail to Devil’s Postpile, we strayed from the JMT. The Devil’s Postpile is a National Landmark and one of the finest examples of columnar basalt in the world.

Devil's Postpile

The hexagonal columns rise over sixty feet up. Take time to take the trail to the top, where the tops of the columns have been sheared smooth by glaciers many years ago. The result looks a lot like a tile floor.

Pics 052 105

Jeffrey, Joan and I finally located the Red’s Meadow campground. Hari arrived ahead of us, and after determining that all the campsites were already taken, struck up a friendship with Chris Ryerson, who shared his site with us. We paid the campsite fee, setup camp, and headed to the Red’s Meadow Bath House.

Red's Meadow Bath House
JMT-JeffThe Red’s Meadow Bath House is free to use (expect a line). The water is fed from natural hot springs. The “baths” are a little “rustic” and there are no controls on the heat, but it was HOT! It felt really good to wash away the dust and grime. Even though some of us had gone for a dip in a nearby lake, this was the cleanest we felt in a week. We were refreshed and recharged, and thankfully done with hiking for the day. 

UPDATE: Sadly, the Bath House is closed. You can hike over to Reds Meadow Resort and get a shower for $7, but the free, hot spring fed bath house pictured below is closed. Hopefully they’ll reopen it someday.

Hot spring baths

Thousand Island Lake to Red’s Meadow

Download file: JMT-Day-6.gpx

John Muir Trail Day Six Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Got a question about the JMT? Something you’d like more info on? Post a question in the JMT forum!

Tomorrow morning, we would pick-up our resupply package and have breakfast at the cafe before hitting the JMT and continuing our journey south to Deer Creek

Originally hiked on August 1, 2010.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-thousand-island-lake-to-reds-meadow/feed/ 16
Thru-Hiking the JMT: Lyell Canyon to Thousand Island Lake https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-lyell-canyon-to-thousand-island-lake/ https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-lyell-canyon-to-thousand-island-lake/#comments Thu, 01 Aug 2013 00:42:00 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=6373 Island Pass and the Minarets Panorama

Day Five on the John Muir Trail…

Yesterday’s hike up Lyell Canyon was relatively easy. Today, we would hit several big milestones. First, we would hike over our first serious pass. At 11,056 ft, Donohue Pass was still covered with snow, and the altitude was as high as we had been on the JMT so far. We would also pass the 50 mile mark. And we would bid adieu to Yosemite… and hello to the Ansel Adams Wilderness in Inyo National Forest.

John Muir Trail Day 5
Distance: 9.7 miles
Cumulative Distance: 50.5 miles
Total Ascent: 2,200 ft
Cumulative Ascent: 14,770 ft
Harrison Map Sheets 12 and 11
It got pretty cold last night camping near 10,000 feet. We used the tent fly for the added warmth. We boiled water for our Starbucks Via and our oatmeal, then pumped and filtered water and broke camp. When it’s cold, it helps to get moving.

One of the great things about hiking the John Muir Trail is that you are never very far from a water source. There are only a few stretches where we really needed to carry more than a liter of water with us. If we needed more water, we would stop and filter more.

We crossed the bridge over Lyell Fork and headed out.

Some of the creek crossings were a little sketchy. You either hiked through the icy cold water, or carefully stepped one foot in front of the other, placing them on the slippery stones and doing your best not to fall in. We were glad we had our trekking poles. We made a point to always have three points of contact with the ground. 

At some of the lakes, there are feint trails that run around the perimeter. It’s easy to mistake these for “the” trail, but we knew we would be climbing and stuck to our uphill trajectory.

There were numerous rivulets that crossed the trail, as well as a wide range of wildflowers.

Rivulets crossing the Trail

More Wildflowers on the JMT

Soon we were high above the canyon, and ready to ascend the final incline to the pass. We stopped to look back on the canyon we just climbed out of.

Looking where we cam from

We passed one last lake and started up a granite trail that was fully exposed. Well above the tree line, we were nearing the crest of Donohue Pass.

Traversing the Snow

We reached the pass and took an early (and well deserved lunch break). Our trail mascot Yoda was proud.

Pics 051 924

From Donohue Pass, we split in two groups. Joan and I hiked on to our camp for the night at Thousand Island Lake. Jeffrey and Hari decided to tackle rocky Donohue Peak. There is no trail up Donohue Peak; it’s mainly boulder scrambling (no technical climbing required). Even so, it’s a slog up and back down. They were rewarded for their efforts with some amazing views.

Donohue Peak Panorama

From Donohue Pass, there is a long downhill trudge. The sun was warm and our spirits were high. And we still had about six miles to go. The scenery changed as we once again descended below the tree line and crossed Rush Creek.

Crossing Rush Creek

Watch the trail signs carefully. Several trails converge in this area, and you don’t want to take the wrong trail. From the creek, we climbed towards Island Pass. This pass is easy to miss, because it’s really a wide, broad saddle dotted with little ponds. The distinctive feature? Jaw-dropping views of the majestic Minarets, their jagged peaks rising dramatically above you to the west.

Finally, we came into view of Thousand Island Lake.

This is a huge lake. No, it doesn’t really have a thousand islands. Yes, it does have a LOT of islands–more than I care to count. And it sits directly below the spectacular Banner Peak.

Cairn over Thousand Island Lake

The trail winds down to the outlet of Thousand Island Lake. There is no camping around the outlet, so we had to follow the northern shore for about half a mile before we found a suitable campsite. We settled in, refilled our water bottles and pitched our tent. Jeffrey and Hari strolled in just in time for dinner — tired but proud to have bagged Donohue Peak.

Repelling Mosquitos: A Natural Approach
JMT-JeffreyThe mosquitos were pretty bad at Thousand Island Lake. I chose not to use repellent. My approach? Long pants and long sleeves. When I needed, I wore a mosquito net over my head. Once at camp, I could get into my tent until sundown. Most of the mosquitos disappear when the sun sets and the temperature dips, so I could cook and eat my dinner in peace.

Thousand Island Lake is one of my favorite places. It’s beauty always inspires me. And it’s a popular destination that many people hike to out of Mammoth Lakes. For these reasons, it’s crowded and attracts bears. We were all using bear canisters and didn’t have any problems, but we did hear some noise from other campsites that had to chase off bears.

The map below shows the general route we took, and the gallery below includes additional photos in chronological order.

Upper Lyell Canyon to Donohue Pass, Island Pass and Thousand Island Lake

Download file: JMT-Day-5.gpx

JMT Day 5 Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Subscribe to our Newsletter

Don’t miss a single day in our JMT series! Subscribe now and get email updates for each post on SoCal Hiker.

Got a question about the JMT? Something you’d like more info on? Post a question in the JMT forum!

Tomorrow, we hike to Red’s Meadow.

Originally hiked on July 31, 2010.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-lyell-canyon-to-thousand-island-lake/feed/ 9
Thru-Hiking the JMT: Tuolumne to Upper Lyell Canyon https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-tuolumne-to-upper-lyell-canyon/ https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-tuolumne-to-upper-lyell-canyon/#comments Wed, 31 Jul 2013 03:51:43 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=6256 Lyell Fork

Day Four on the John Muir Trail

Tuolumne Meadows StoreI was looking forward to this day. The mileage was a little easier, and the first nine miles were up the almost imperceptible incline of Lyell Canyon. Getting in later than expected on Day Three meant hanging around until the Tuolumne Meadows Post Office opened so we could pick up our resupply package.

While we waited, we feasted on tasty breakfast burritos at the café. The post office doesn’t open until 9am, and then we had to divvy up the foodstuffs, squeeze everything into our bear canisters and reload our packs. As we were repacking, we met some fellow JMT thru-hikers also picking up their resupply. I’ve found that camaraderie amongst backcountry hikers is effortless.  As John Muir said, “One touch of Nature makes the whole world kin.” You feel that kinship among just about everyone you meet on the trail. I think Muir was on to something.

John Muir Trail Day 4
Distance: 10.25 miles
Cumulative Distance: 40.75 miles
Total Ascent: 1,475 ft
Cumulative Ascent: 12,570 ft
Harrison Map Sheet 12
GPX file
It was nearly 10am when we finally hit the trail — a very late start. From the post office, we took a trail towards the Tuolumne Meadows Lodge then a short segment of the Pacific Crest TrailThis led us to a sturdy bridge over the Lyell Fork, finally reuniting us with the JMT.

Hari heads out

The trail up Lyell Canyon was heavenly. Well, the first nine miles or so.

The water is unbelievably beautiful

First off, the trail is soft, smooth and straight. It’s as close to level as you’ll see on the JMT. And it parallels the sublime waters of the Lyell Fork creek. The waters of Lyell Fork were so clear and so stunning, it was difficult to keep out of the water. So we jumped in! 

At our lunch break, Joan and I (Jeffrey and Hari were up ahead, as routine) found a secluded boulder outcrop next to a wide, deep section of the creek. We kicked our boots off and stretched out on the boulders like lizards in the sun. When it got a little too warm, we jumped into the invigorating water, washing away the trail grime and sweat. It was heaven on earth.

I swam

We lazily lounged about for two hours, enjoying the perfect setting, and then decided we’d better hit the trail again if we were going to make camp before nightfall.

Enjoying the Journey
JMT-JoanWe found that by the end of the day, we were so exhausted, that after cleaning up from dinner, we just wanted to climb into our tent to sleep. I loved our long lunches when we lounged, soaked our tired feet in the water, and took some time to enjoy the moment.
As we hiked up Lyell Canyon, we saw pristine meadows, a multitude of tiny, nameless waterfalls down the steep canyon walls, wildlife and wild flowers. Finally, our trail began to climb. And boy did it climb.

The last bit goes up steeply

Our elevation gain for the day was modest by JMT standards (about 1,475 ft). But most of it was in the last mile. The trail is made up of granite steps better suited to horses than humans. This makes sense because both the JMT and the PCT were designed specifically to support horses, explaining in part the giant-sized steps we climbed to our camp for the night.

We made camp at Upper Lyell Canyon, just before the wooden bridge. There are a number of great camp sites here, and they are spread out far enough that although we had seen other hikers there, we weren’t aware of their presence when we were at our camp site.

Lyell Fork runs rapid here, so filtering water required extra caution. We didn’t want to fall in or lose any equipment.

And at an elevation of 9,670 ft, we were nearing the tree line. Tomorrow we’d be heading over snow-covered Donohue Pass and saying good-bye to Yosemite.

Tuolumne Meadows to Upper Lyell Canyon

This map details our journey on Day 4 of the JMT, from Tuolumne Meadows to Upper Lyell Canyon. You’ll notice that the trail follows a nice, gentle slope for the first nine miles, then ends with a strenuous climb. Phew!

Download file: JMT-Day-41.gpx

JMT Day 4 Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Subscribe to our Newsletter

Don’t miss a single day in our JMT series! Subscribe now and get email updates for each post on SoCal Hiker.

Got a question about the JMT? Something you’d like more info on? Post a question in the JMT forum!

Tomorrow, we hike over Donohue and Island Pass and down to Thousand Island Lake

Originally hiked on July 30, 2010. 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-tuolumne-to-upper-lyell-canyon/feed/ 7
Thru-Hiking the JMT: Tuolumne Meadows Resupply https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-tuolumne-meadows-resupply/ https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-tuolumne-meadows-resupply/#comments Tue, 30 Jul 2013 04:55:48 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=6177 WP GPX Maps Error: GPX file not found! /home/runcloud/webapps/app-socalhiker/wp-content/uploads/JMT-Day-3.gpx Tuolumne Meadows Panorama

Day 3 on the John Muir Trail and we were starting a long way from where we originally planned to camp. Our unauthorized off-trail camp dubbed The Middle of Somewhere was beautiful and quiet, but we had 3.5 miles to hike just to get to Sunrise High Sierra Camp, where we should’ve been starting. If you do the math, that means that yesterday’s little excursion to Clouds Rest turned today’s easy 8.6 mile trek into a more rigorous 12.1 miles.

Sunrise Lakes Panorama

John Muir Trail Day 3
Distance: 12.1 miles
Cumulative Distance: 30.5 miles
Total Ascent: 2,124 ft
Cumulative Ascent: 11,095 ft
Harrison Map Sheets 13 and 12
GPX file
On the bright side, we got to visit the Sunrise Lakes. These three lakes were quiet and serene, and would make a great stop if we weren’t hiking the JMT.

The water on Sunrise Lakes was still, reflecting like a mirror.  We hiked quietly, passing only a few other backpackers, and felt as though we had the mountains to ourselves.

Joan stepping across a lock in Sunrise Lakes

From Sunrise Lakes, we pass over a saddle and down to Sunrise High Sierra Camp. Finally we were back on the JMT. We stopped for lunch but didn’t linger — the mosquitos were as hungry as we were.

Back on the JMT

From here the trail winds along the perimeter of the meadow, slowly and steadily climbing towards Cathedral Pass — the first of many mountain passes on the JMT. From the pass it’s a well-shaded, downhill trek to the Tuolumne Meadows.

Cathedral Peak

When we reached Tuolumne Meadows, it was tempting to think we had “arrived.” We caught glimpses of Tioga Road through the trees and could hear passing cars. There were more casual hikers in the area, but we still had a full mile yet to go before we would reach the backpacker’s campground. It was one of those times when a mile seems longer than it really is.

Tuolumne Meadows Panorama

Hari and Jeffrey were already there and had staked out a spot for us. Unfortunately the Tuolumne Post Office had closed about 15 minutes earlier, so we would have to wait to pick-up our resupply package until the morning. Fortunately, the diner was open. We feasted on cheeseburgers and fries. We earned it.

Three days on the John Muir Trail were under our belts. We summited Half Dome and Clouds Rest. And we made it to our first resupply point — Tuolumne Meadows.

Resupply at Tuolumne
JMT-JeffYou might wonder why you would bother resupplying at Tuolumne — a mere three days into a three week trek on the JMT. Consider this: you will carry on average two pounds of food, per person, per day. The next resupply point is Reds Meadow — three days further. Skipping this resupply point would mean carrying an extra six pounds. The math says, resupply at Tuolumne.

Middle of Somewhere to Tuolumne Meadows

This map details our journey from our off trail camp to Sunrise High Sierra Camp, over Cathedral Pass and down to Tuolumne Meadows.

Download file: JMT-Day-3.gpx

JMT Day 3 Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Subscribe to our Newsletter

Don’t miss a single day in our JMT series! Subscribe now and get email updates for each post on SoCal Hiker.

Got a question about the JMT? Something you’d like more info on? Post a question in the JMT forum!

Tomorrow, we head up Lyell Canyon.

Originally hiked on July 29, 2010. 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-tuolumne-meadows-resupply/feed/ 10
Thru-Hiking the JMT: Little Yosemite Valley to Sunrise Camp https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-little-yosemite-valley-to-sunrise-camp/ https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-little-yosemite-valley-to-sunrise-camp/#comments Mon, 29 Jul 2013 01:21:03 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=6102 WP GPX Maps Error: GPX file not found! /home/runcloud/webapps/app-socalhiker/wp-content/uploads/JMT-Day-2.gpxWP GPX Maps Error: GPX file not found! /home/runcloud/webapps/app-socalhiker/wp-content/uploads/JMT-LYV-to-Cathedral-Lakes.gpx Half Dome

It’s day two on the John Muir Trail. We woke up feeling creaky but confident. Hiking up Half Dome on day one tested our mettle. Today, we planned to hike 10.4 miles to the Sunrise High Sierra Camp. We ate our super-charged oatmeal breakfast and broke camp. As we were getting ready to leave, we saw a bear wandering near the western edge of the camp.

Black bears are common along the JMT, especially in the more popular areas such as Little Yosemite Valley. That’s one of the reasons they have bear lockers for your food in some places, and require an approved bear-proof canister for food storage everywhere else.

Bear in Little Yosemite Valley

This bear was getting ready to wander into the campground to snag some unsuspecting camper’s breakfast or an open bear box — both reasons to be vigilant with your food in the mountains.  Black bears won’t chase you down unless they or their young are threatened. We chose to keep a safe distance and admire the bear from afar.

John Muir Trail Day 2
Distance: 6.8 miles
Cumulative Distance: 18.4 miles
Total Ascent: 3,971 ft
Cumulative Ascent: 8,971 ft
Harrison Map Sheet 13
GPX file (official JMT)
GPX file (Clouds Rest)
We had originally hoped to spend last night at a camp site about a half mile beyond the junction to Half Dome, which would’ve put us 2.8 miles further up the JMT. Unfortunately our permit was for “Happy Isles to Little Yosemite Valley” and the ranger made it clear that we were not to camp beyond that on the first night. Our first 2.3 miles on day two we repeated a portion of the trail we hiked up yesterday en route to Half Dome.  From that junction, we headed east near to the next junction, where the trail parallels the north side of Sunrise Creek.

There is also a junction here with a trail to Clouds Rest. 

Hari and Jeffrey — armed with the energy of youth — were well ahead of us.  Joan and I hiked at our normal slow-and-steady pace. Joan suspected we were too far from Sunrise Creek, and questioned my navigation skills. I reassured her that we were on the correct trail, and we kept hiking onward (and upward).

Day 2 on the JMT

The climb was suspiciously relentless. We weren’t supposed to be gaining this much elevation, were we? Soon, I was second-guessing myself. We consulted with some hikers coming down the trail toward us. “Hi! Where ya’ coming from?” is the typical refrain when passing other hikers on the trail. “Sunrise” they replied. I took this to confirm that we were in fact headed in the right direction, since we were headed towards Sunrise High Sierra Camp.

We continued on, hiking even higher.

There’s a peculiar truth about the psychology of climbing thousands of feet of elevation gain. You don’t want that climbing to be for nothing. You sincerely want to be right, so you haven’t “wasted” that effort, only to have to retrace your steps and hike even further than you had planned. That’s where I was at, and the higher we hiked, the more committed I had become.

Name this dome...

Another group of hikers came down the trail toward us. “Where ya hiking from?” “Oh, we’re coming down from Clouds Rest.”

Ugh. Not what I had wanted to hear. 

I ate humble pie and we revisited our map to come up with Plan B. It turns out, we were well on our way to Clouds Rest and miles up the wrong trail. We decided to continue on and past Sunrise Lakes (obviously the “Sunrise” the earlier hikers had referred to). From there a trail looped down to Sunrise High Sierra Camp. We wouldn’t make it today, but we wouldn’t be too far off, either.

Jeff Eats Humble Pie
JMT-JeffThe John Muir Trail is very well marked, but you still need to know how to navigate… and listen to your girlfriend! Although Joan will be the first to admit she is generally “directionally challenged,” she was 100% right on this one. I chose the wrong trail, then stubbornly insisted on following it. There’s a lesson in there…

Always Look at the Bright Side of Life

The benefit of our “alternative” route is that we got to summit not only Half Dome, yesterday, but Clouds Rest today. Clouds Rest has magnificent views of Half Dome, Yosemite Valley, and 360 degrees of pure wilderness beauty. And although Jeffrey slack-packed up here yesterday afternoon, we could boast that we summited with our full backpacks. Hah!

Yosemite Valley from Cloud's Rest

Impromptu off-trail camp

Impromptu off-trail camp

I discovered that I once again had cell reception on Clouds Rest (thank you AT&T) and left a message for Jeffrey and Hari explaining that we would meet them at Tuolumne Meadows tomorrow.

After Clouds Rest, we continued until on past an tiny unnamed creek and setup an impromptu and unauthorized camp for the night off trail. This is strictly against the rules in Yosemite, but we weren’t prepared to hike through the darkness. We were very careful to choose a spot where we would leave no trace. We setup camp for the night in a little place I like to call The Middle of Somewhere, because we knew where we were, but weren’t where we planned to be.

Little Yosemite Valley to Clouds Rest and the Middle of Somewhere

This map details our journey from Little Yosemite Valley to Cloud’s Rest and on to our impromptu off-trail camp.

Download file: JMT-Day-2.gpx

Jeffrey and Hari managed to stay on the JMT, but decided to power on past Sunrise (too many mosquitos) and camped at the Cathedral Lakes (also too many mosquitos, but not enough energy or time to continue further). Jeffrey captured some great shots of the lake at the golden hour.

Cathedral Lake

This also set them up for an easy 5 mile hike downhill hike to Tuolumne Meadows the next day.

Little Yosemite Valley to Cathedral Lakes

This is the “correct” route along the JMT which Jeffrey and Hari followed.

Download file: JMT-LYV-to-Cathedral-Lakes.gpx

JMT Day 2 Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Subscribe to our Newsletter

Don’t miss a single day in our JMT series! Subscribe now and get email updates for each post on SoCal Hiker.

Got a question about the JMT? Something you’d like more info on? Post a question in the JMT forum!

Tomorrow, we head to Tuolumne Meadows for our first resupply.

Originally hiked on July 28, 2010. 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-little-yosemite-valley-to-sunrise-camp/feed/ 23
Thru-Hiking the JMT: Happy Isles to Little Yosemite Valley, Plus Half Dome https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-happy-isles-to-little-yosemite-valley-plus-half-dome/ https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-happy-isles-to-little-yosemite-valley-plus-half-dome/#comments Sun, 28 Jul 2013 05:53:27 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=5993 Liberty Dome and Nevada Falls

The night is fading as we awaken, excited to finally start hiking the John Muir Trail. I slept like a log at the backpacker’s campground, but Jeffrey and Hari heard people chasing a bear away from the car campground. We eat a quick breakfast, break camp, don our backpacks and walk along the road to our official starting point, the trailhead at Happy Isles.

John Muir Trail Day 1
Distance: 11.6 miles
Cumulative Distance: 11.6 miles
Total Ascent: 5,000 ft
Cumulative Ascent: 5,000 ft
Harrison Map Sheet 13
GPX file
Our plan for our first day on the JMT is a fairly short climb to Little Yosemite Valley, where we will drop our packs and setup camp for the night. From there, we slack-pack to Half Dome and back. Half Dome isn’t officially part of the JMT, but we’re so close it seems a shame not to include it. And it will be a first for Joan, Jeffrey and Hari.

6:15 am - We're up! At the backpacker’s campground, getting ready to pack up and hit the JMT!

On our way to Happy Isles

While not part of the official mileage, first we had to get to the trailhead.

We reached the trailhead took the obligatory starting photo.

Happy JMT-ers

The “trail” starts out as a paved, asphalt path due to the sheer number of people who head up this route to visit Vernal and Nevada Falls. Most of the other people on the path are day hikers, gawking at our packs and gear. We’re on an emotional high, as months of planning, training and preparation finally bears fruit.

As we climb higher, we hear and see the mighty falls, with Liberty Dome and Half Dome. The thought races through our minds — “We’re going to be up there later today?!”

Nevada Falls

We buzz along, taking photos and stopping for a snack at the top of Nevada Falls. Although we’ve been here before, it feels great to be back, this time on a bona fide adventure.

Above the falls, the trail climbs a bit more, finally leveling out along the headwaters of the Merced River. The John Muir Trail splits here. To the right, it runs close to the river through coarsely ground granite — difficult to hike in. To the left, it gets more sun exposure. Both lead the final mile to the campground at Little Yosemite Valley.

Happy Isles to Little Yosemite Valley

This map details our journey from Happy Isles to the Little Yosemite Valley campground.

Download file: JMT-Day-1-data.gpx

At this point, we’ve hiked a modest 4.4 miles, but gained over 2,000 ft in elevation. We found a suitable campsite (don’t expect solitude — this campground is booked solid, and nearly as cramped as the backpacker’s campground in the valley), dropped our backpacks and stowed our food in the bear locker.  We put together a slack-pack with water and snacks, and headed up Half Dome.

Little Yosemite Valley to Half Dome

After dropping our gear and setting up camp, we hiked this route up Half Dome and back.

Download file: Little_Yosemite_Valley_to_Half_Dome.gpx
Half Dome Permits
Got permits for Half Dome?Because of the volume of foot traffic Half Dome gets, a permit system was introduced. When we hiked this, you were allowed to include Half Dome if you had a permit for the John Muir Trail.

Today  you must specifically request this as part of your wilderness permit if you plan to include a side-trip to Half Dome. See Half Dome Permits for Backpackers for details.

Heading up Half Dome is a 7.2 mile round trip from Little Yosemite Valley, with another 2,700 ft of elevation gain.

We reached the shoulder, and climb the series of steep switchbacks with big steps carved into the granite. This section is a little gnarly, as one mis-step and you’re in for a nasty tumble. From the top of that, you actually descend to the saddle and the base of the cables.

A long, steep section of granite steps

While the practice is discouraged, it’s common to see a pile of gloves at the base of the cables. Pick up a pair and use them. I’ve seen the bloody hands of those who chose to skip using gloves, so either suck it up and borrow a used pair or bring your own.

Half Dome Panorama

Going up the cables is pretty simple and also pretty safe — as long as you use common sense. The two cables are elevated to “railing” height, and there are wood boards laid at roughly 12 foot intervals where you can stand on the steep granite and give your arms a rest. The dangerous part is that there are many other people going up and down these same cables, and each time you pass someone, the negotiation takes extra care. We made a point to stop at those boards when meeting someone coming down the cables.

Joan was feeling trepidation on the Half Dome cables

Jeffrey and Hari were already at the top as Joan and I ascended the cables. About half way up, I heard Joan call out. She was feeling nervous and wanted to go back down. I came back down the cables to her and we talked through it. Finally, she decided to give it another try, with me right behind her. She made it!

Joan on Day 1 of the JMT
JMT-Joan“Even though we had trained extensively, I was nervous and not really sure what it would be like. Just walking to the trailhead along the road my pack felt really heavy! As the day went on, it got easier… until we hiked up Half Dome. It’s a tough hike, and I got really scared on the cables. I felt like I was holding up the line. When I made it to the top, I felt great!

“I was exhausted when we got back to camp, but felt like if I could do Half Dome, I could do anything.”

Hari on the Diving Board at Half Dome

The top of Half Dome is broad — about the size of a football field. You can wander around pretty safely as long as you’re careful around the edges. We enjoyed the views, took lots of photos, then headed back down.

Half Dome Tips

  • Going down the cables, a lot of people get really uptight and nervous. What I’ve found works best is to face downhill and “walk” down Half Dome using my gloved hands as brakes. Instead of standing upright, my body is perpendicular to the slope. This seems a little unnatural at first, but gives you a lot of control and worked well for Joan, also.
  • There’s no reliable water source between Little Yosemite Valley and Half Dome, so plan accordingly. Once you reach the saddle, you’ll have a lot of sun exposure and with the elevation and climbing, it’s easy to get dehydrated. We had about a liter each, and wished we could’ve had just a bit more.

Back at Little Yosemite Valley, we wandered down to the Merced and took a refreshing dip in the water. As we filtered water, we spied a deer and fawn casually crossing upstream. An idyllic scene.

Hari, Joan and I cooked and ate dinner. Jeffrey had a goal to hike up Cloud’s Rest in addition to Half Dome (insane, right?). The sun set and we began to get a little worried when Jeffrey didn’t show up. We checked with the rangers at the Little Yosemite Valley ranger station, and they basically said to wait. We actually had cell phone coverage up here (I’m on AT&T) and left him a voice message as well as a text. Finally about 9:30pm, Jeffrey made it back to camp.  Yes, he climbed Half Dome and Cloud’s Rest on his first day of the JMT.

 

JMT Day 1 Photo Gallery

Click on any photo to view a larger version. You can also leave comments on any photo.

Subscribe to our Newsletter

Don’t miss a single day in our JMT series! Subscribe now and get email updates for each post on SoCal Hiker.

Tomorrow, we head from Little Yosemite Valley to Sunrise.

Originally hiked on July 27, 2010.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/thru-hiking-the-jmt-happy-isles-to-little-yosemite-valley-plus-half-dome/feed/ 12
Hiking the John Muir Trail: What to Wear https://socalhiker.net/hiking-the-john-muir-trail-what-to-wear/ https://socalhiker.net/hiking-the-john-muir-trail-what-to-wear/#comments Fri, 28 Jun 2013 04:08:12 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=5470 What to wear on the John Muir Trail (JMT)

One of the questions everyone asks me about hiking the John Muir Trail is “What should I wear?” It’s not usually phrased so bluntly. Sometimes it’s couched in more specific terms, like “Should I wear down or fleece?” or “trail shoes vs. boots?”

While I can’t tell you what’s right for you,  I will share what I wore, and what worked well for me.

The photo below shows Reinhold Metzger and I on our respective JMT thru-hikes. Metzger was headed northbound, while I was taking the traditional southbound route. I’ve pointed out the key parts of my hiking “outfit” that you can see, and included a couple that you don’t.

what-i-wore-on-the-jmt

The astute observer will notice that Reinhold’s gear has a certain vintage quality about it. He’s using an external frame backpack and a mashup of clothes and gear that he’s cobbled together over the years. This tried-and-true approach is the same one you should use. Start with some basics components and add to it over time, keeping what works and replacing what doesn’t. You’ll find that quality gear lasts for years. If you watch for sales and closeouts, you can pare down the costs considerably.

Here are the details

ItemDescriptionWeightPrice
Wide-Brimmed HatThere are some great choices here, but mine happened to be an REI hat that includes a drawstring for those windy mountain passes (much needed), and the brim can be snapped up and out-of-the-way when needed. Looked a little goofy, but very functional.
Recommended.
8 oz.$25
Buff Multi-Function HeadgearThis awesome headwear can be worn as a headband, a bandana, a baclava, a dust screen, a neck gaiter and even more.
Highly recommended.
3.2 oz.$25
ExOfficio Boxer Brief
I had two pair. They wash, rinse and dry very quickly. They are pricey, but they hold up for a long time.
Highly recommended.
3 oz.$26
Under Armour Tech T-ShirtThis short sleeve shirt dries quickly and was a perfect base layer. It remains one of my favorite shirts to hike in.
Highly recommended.
6.5 oz.$23
White Sierra Kalgoorlie Long Sleeve ShirtThis lightweight wind shirt helped keep the sun off and cut the wind. It can be unbuttoned or removed when temperatures rise. The White Sierra brand was a great value.
Recommended.
3 oz.$30
Marmot Radiator Polartec Fleece JacketThis fleece provided added warmth when temperatures dipped in the evenings. Most nights, the t-shirt, wind shirt and fleece provided all the warmth needed.
Highly recommended.
18 oz.$125
White Sierra Trabagon JacketThis shell (not pictured) gave a final layer of protection in the coldest situations. There were only a few nights where this came in handy, as well as up on Mt. Whitney.
Recommended.
11.2 oz.$60
prAna Convertible PantThese pants have zip-off legs, which most of the time stayed off. There were two times when those legs came in handy: when the mosquitos were bad and when it was really cold. These got really dirty after three weeks on the trail, but washed up looking like new. I was amazed.
Recommended. Read my full review.
16.1 oz.$85
Keen Pyrenees BootsI debated using trail shoes or boots. In the end, I opted for a bit more support. These waterproof boots were super comfortable, especially after upgrading the insole. I had zero problems with blisters.
Read my full review.
35 oz.$140
Superfeet Green InsolesThese insoles made the boots feel like butter. Preparing for the JMT was the first time I splurged for them, and now I'm sold.
Highly recommended.
3.4 oz.$40
Smartwool Hiking SockI sometimes combined these socks with a lightweight silk liner sock. They fit and performed well the entire 211+ miles.
Recommended.
3.6 oz.$12
Total worn on body weight/costs:6 lbs. 15 oz.$591

Ultra-lighters will probably be aghast at the nearly 7 pounds of clothes (boots included) I wore. It’s a typical question that most thru-hikers wrestle with — trying strike the right balance between function and lowering weight. In my case, it was easier for me to lose 10 pounds that I didn’t have carry — not by cutting tags off my clothes or shortening my spoon handle, but by losing the weight personally through training.

As for what I wore, note that I didn’t create a shopping list and go out and buy all this gear. My gear acquired over time and trail-tested as we trained for the JMT. And every single one of these items is still in service today.

How does this compare to what I wore 30 years earlier? That’s a post for another day…

Disclosure: The links in the table above go to Amazon using my affiliate link. If you do decide to purchase there, you’re also supporting SoCalHiker.net. Many thanks to those who support this website! 

 

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/hiking-the-john-muir-trail-what-to-wear/feed/ 10
Hiking the John Muir Trail in 21 Days https://socalhiker.net/hiking-the-john-muir-trail-in-21-days/ https://socalhiker.net/hiking-the-john-muir-trail-in-21-days/#comments Mon, 23 Aug 2010 05:40:06 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=1264 Back in 1980 I hiked the John Muir Trail with a group of four friends from church. I was 18 years old, but our group ranged in age from 13 to 50-ish. Thirty years ago I had just graduated high school, time was not an issue, and we spread the journey over 25 memorable days.

I have long wanted to go back and hike the JMT again, and after years of planning, it finally came together — 30 years later. My girlfriend Joan and two friends from a local hiking club — Jeff A. and Hari — joined me for this epic, 21-day backpacking trip.

We got back home late this past Tuesday, and I’ve been thinking about how best to share the experience. There are so many stories, and so much to tell. I’ve decided to start with an overview of the experience (something everyone can appreciate), and I’ll follow up in the coming weeks with day-by-day details, field notes on our equipment, food and logistics for those interested in the nitty-gritty details.

Trail Details
Distance: 233 miles
Time: 21 days
Difficulty: Strenuous
Elevation gain: 46,700 ft
When to go: July through Sept.
Like most people hiking the JMT, we chose the North-to-South direction. This begins at the lower elevations in Yosemite and gradually tackles the higher altitude on the southern half of the trail after well-acclimated. Our Tuesday start day was fixed six months in advance (when the permit reservation was granted).

We started by driving up to Lone Pine and dropping of the car at Whitney Portal, so it would be waiting for us when we reached the end of the trail. We spent a night at the Dow Villa Motel. It’s a clean and comfortable place with a history of catering to Hollywood stars up for filming Westerns in the nearby Alabama Hills. I drove the car up to the portal and hitched a ride back into Lone Pine with Tex from one of the backpacking clubs in San Diego. He and a friend had just come down from a two-night backpacking trip that included Mt. Whitney — where we would be headed in three weeks.

Monday, we woke up early, grabbed a hearty breakfast and met Richard from Mount Whitney Shuttle for our ride to Yosemite Valley. The ride up took about five hours; the hike back would take 21 days.

After picking up our permit, we dropped our equipment at the backpacker’s campground and headed to Curry Village for our “last supper.” It’s a great place to people watch, with folks from all over the world converging for pizza, salads and cold beverages in this beautiful little corner of the outdoor world.

Day One – July 27

Tuesday morning, we woke early. Our permit required we spend one night in Little Yosemite Valley — after that, it was up to us and our legs. We reached camp, had lunch and then headed uphill for a bonus hike up Half Dome. Half Dome is an amazing side-trip that’s well worth the extra time, but it made for a long first day. In total we covered about 15 miles and over 5,000 feet of vertical gain. When we got back to camp, we went for a quick swim in the Merced, ate and slept well.

Day Two – July 28

On Wednesday, the young guns Jeff A and Hari hiked ahead, while Joan and I took an alternate route that swung by Cloud’s Rest. This was only our second day of the JMT, and it was our second day of >3000′ of vertical gain in a row. It kicked our respective asses, but was worth it. The views from Clouds Rest are even more impressive than from Half Dome, and the are no crowds (there were a handful of people at the top), no cables, no fuss. The Native Americans who called Yosemite their home in centuries past felt Clouds Rest had spiritual importance. I can’t argue with the sense of awe and wonder the views inspired.

We originally had planned to reach Cathedral Lakes, but Joan and I ended up camping near one of the Sunrise lakes, catching up to Jeff A and Hari at Tuolumne Meadows the next day.

Day Three – July 29

We traversed our first of many passes — Cathedral Pass — on our way to our Tuolumne Meadows. Tuolumne was our first resupply point. Many people skip resupplying here, being so soon into the trip, but why carry more food than you need to, especially when starting out? As we were sorting our resupply package, we bumped into Bob and Cheri from the Yahoo! JMT group — the first of several times our paths would cross.

Day Four – July 30

Most of this day was easy hiking along the idyllic Lyell Creek. The waters were clear and beckoned you to jump in. It felt good to take a long lunch, stretched out on a rock like a lizard letting the sun dry our bodies. At about the 10th mile of the day, we finally hit a serious vertical climb up to our destination — Lyell Forks.

I met a number of others also hiking the JMT at Lyell Forks, although most of them I did not see again. It was interesting that we would cross paths with some people day after day, and others we would never or rarely see at all.

Day Five – July 31

We finally left Yosemite Park, climbing over the 11,073′ Donahue Pass. Jeff A. and Hari took a side trip to bag Donahue Peak, then met up with us in the evening at Thousand Island Lake. This is one of my favorite areas of the Sierras. I’ve been here many times and will never tire of the beauty of the Minarets. This is an area we will come back to again and again to explore in depth.

We hit Thousand Island Lake at the perfect time for mosquitoes. There were huge swarms of them, making nets and Deet a necessity.

Day Six – August 1

Day 6 was a long day, hiking up countless ridges past the many “gem” lakes and finally a long descent through Devil’s Postpile National Monument to the crowded Red’s Meadow campground. We shared a site with “Chris” who was on a 45 day ramble around the Sierras. Chris was just one of many examples of the friendly people met along the trail.

The Red’s Meadow campground isn’t particularly scenic, but it’s worth stopping at if nothing else than for the free, hot spring fed showers. It felt great to get really clean, and the water was almost too hot!

Day Seven – August 2

We lazily hung around Red’s Meadow, picked up our second resupply package, and enjoyed both breakfast and lunch at the cafe. As an added treat, Don and Zandra Wilson took the shuttle down from Mammoth and met us for lunch. Zandra was one of the people I originally hiked the JMT with 30 years earlier, and it was a real pleasure to reminisce and catch up.

After filling our guts with non-dehydrated food and one of the best milkshakes you’ll ever enjoy, we headed up the trail for a relatively light 9 mile day to Deer Creek.

Day Eight – August 3

At lunch Joan and I met “Al” at Purple Creek. Al was an older guy who was doing his second JMT. His first time, two years earlier, he was “traditionally” equipped with a heavy pack and a 21-day itinerary. This time he was going lightweight, wearing trail runners and a base weight of 14 lbs. and a 14-day itinerary with no resupply points. He inspired us to look more closely at reducing our own base weight.

At the popular and beautiful Lake Virginia, Hari met a ranger who tipped us off to a “secret” ranger campsite on granite bluffs above Tully Hole. The breezes kept the mosquitoes at bay, and the views were amazing. It took a little scrambling to reach them, but it was a beautiful, special place to camp for the night.

Day Nine – August 4

Climbing Silver Pass was relatively easy. Descending was a bitch. This longer-than-expected downhill set a pattern for the JMT, where seemingly innocent downhill trails turned ugly, with deep steps and ankle-challenging gravel forcing you to slow to a snail’s pace. Eventually we reached the detour to Lake Thomas Edison, where we caught the ferry to Vermillion Valley Resort.

VVR was our third resupply point, and the site of our only “zero day” — a chance to rest and let our bodies heal a bit. They cater to JMT and PCT thru-hikers, and the camaraderie and food were fantastic. We were able to wash clothes, shower and catch up on the caloric deficit we had been running.

Day Ten – August 5

Our one-and-only zero mileage day. No hiking, just rest, eating, cleaning, and camaraderie. It was a welcome respite!

Day Eleven – August 6

Friday morning, we took the ferry back across the lake and climbed the 60 switchbacks up to the top of Bear Ridge. Most of the afternoon we followed the beautiful cascades along Bear Creek, finally reaching our first of only two creek crossings that required us to remove our boots. We camped in complete solitude at Rosemarie Meadow.

Day Twelve – August 7

From Rosemarie Meadow, we climbed Selden Pass and then a long descent to Muir Trail Ranch — our final resupply point.

MTR is the last place where you’re close enough to easily detour off the JMT and pick up a package, but it’s difficult for them. Packages must be shipped to an address in Lakeshore, they are picked up at the post office, loaded into a truck, driven to Florence Lake, loaded onto a boat, carried to the other end where they are loaded into a WW2-era Mercedes 4WD truck that carries it the last four miles to the remote ranch.

It’s also challenging for us, as it meant we had to somehow carry almost 10 days worth of food (and get it to fit in our bear cannisters)! A good rule of thumb is 2 lbs of food, per person, per day. That means we’re each carrying 20 lbs of food alone!

As if this wasn’t challenge enough, when we reached MTR, we learned that only two of our five 5-gallon resupply buckets could be found! The good people at MTR were wonderful, checking and double-checking their storerooms and the post office, but the three buckets could not be found. They refunded our handling fees for the three missing packages, and graciously invited us to join them for dinner that night, as well as breakfast the next morning. And fortunately, there are many packages that end up donated to the “hiker bins” and we were able to scavenge enough food to get us through the second half of the trip.

Day Thirteen – August 8

Following the South Fork of the San Juoquin River, we entered Kings Canyon National Park. One of the great things about the JMT is that you’re never far from water, and today was no exception. The entire day we hiked in parallel to a river or creek of some sort.

As we ascended to Evolution Valley, we also made our second “no boots” creek crossing before reaching our destination — McClure Meadow. We shared a campfire with Brian, another JMT thru-hiker from the Bay area whose path we we cross again several times in the next few days. This was also the night of the “big salami” story, which generated laughs for days afterwards.

Day Fourteen – August 9

Muir Pass was tough. It’s not particularly steep, but the trail to the pass is largely composed of course gravel about the size of a baseball and very difficult footing. Making it even tougher, Joan was hit with a bout of major indigestion. We reached the pass late, and decided to camp at the first level spot with water below the pass. As luck would have it, we found a stunningly beautiful little tarn which we had all to ourselves.

Day Fifteen – August 10

Most of this day followed the Middle Fork of the Kings River through Le Conte Canyon — another place I would like to return and spend more time in. Beautiful meadows, towering granite canyon walls that rival Yosemite with none of the crowds. We camped about two miles below the infamous Golden Staircase.

Day Sixteen – August 11

This was another tough day, with the Golden Staircase (which goes on and on) and then Mather Pass. Both were long, arduous climbs. When we finally reached the 12,100′ Mather Pass, we felt a real sense of accomplishment. Thankfully, the descent was smooth. On our way to the Upper Basin, we met an older guy who turned out to be Reinhold Metzger. Reinhart was hiking the JMT for his 14th time. He used to hold the record for the unsupported JMT thru-hike — 5 days, 7 hours and 45 minutes. This time, he was hiking a “yo-yo” trip from Mt. Whitney to Yosemite and back again in 14 days. A little more than I want to tackle, but pretty amazing for a 69 year old. Terrific guy.

Day Seventeen – August 12

Another day, another mountain pass. Today’s pass was 12,086′ Pinchot.

As you may have noticed, the southern half of the JMT includes a lot of mountain passes, higher elevations and lots of exposure above the tree line. The sun is brutal, and it gets hot. I highly recommend doing your best to hit these passes in the morning.

The route down from Pinchot was also long and tough; another example where the elevation profile for the trail only tells part of the story. We camped at White Fork, about 2 miles from the Woods Creek junction.

Day Eighteen – August 13

Originally we had planned to traverse Glen Pass (part of the “pass a day” program), but after reassessment, we modified the itinerary slightly. We camped at Upper Rae Lake, another beautiful area that we plan to revisit in the future. Along the way, we ran into PCT thru-hiker “Steady” (his wife is “Slow”). They hail from Western Australia, and before they started the PCT in April, neither had any backpacking experience. Needless to say, they are now both experts!

Day Nineteen – August 14

We got an early start and made it up Glen Pass before noon. It was tough, but we could feel our bodies getting stronger.

As we made our way towards Vidette Meadow, we could see and smell smoke from a forest fire. This caused some alarm in that we didn’t know exactly where the fire was, and the smoke could wreak havoc with Joan’s asthma. We watched the situation throughout the day, and fortunately by the next morning, the prevailing winds changed direction and the skies were clear.

Along the way, we ran into two PCT section hikers from Portland who had just finished munching down a snack of delectable cheese. Apparently, someone had left a bunch of food in one of the bear boxes in Upper Vidette Meadow and backpackers were scavenging for goodies. Of course, when we reached the campsite, we were no exception, and snagged a few packages of ramen to supplement our food supply.

The whole experience reminded me of the old joke that asks “What’s the difference between a backpacker and a homeless person? The answer: Gore-tex.” As we were rummaging through cheese, hotdogs and other questionable foodstuffs with relish, I realized this was a short step away from “dumpster diving.” Still, the ramen was a great addition to our dinners.

Day Twenty – August 15

The end was in sight as we climbed the 13,118′ Forester Pass. In keeping with our goal, we reached it before noon. The southbound descent was very similar to Mather Pass — smooth and easy hiking. We hiked another nine miles to Wright Creek. The excitement of Whitney was building.

Day Twenty-One – August 16

After relatively short 7.3 mile hike we reached Guitar Lake mid-afternoon. We ate an early dinner, and went to bed early. It may have been the earliest we made camp on the entire trip.

Day Twenty-Two – August 17

After napping for a few hours, we woke up at 11pm. Technically, it was still the 16th, but not by much. We broke camp, donned our headlamps and began the ascent of Whitney. We reached the Trail Crest about 3:30am, napped fitfully for a couple hours as we awaited the sunrise, then finally headed to the summit.

The sunrise from Mt. Whitney was simply stunning. At 14,505′ Whitney is the highest mountain in the contiguous 48 states. We saw range after range in the distance.

At the summit we soaked in the sunshine and the views and rested a bit. After 21 days and over 211 miles, we had officially reached the southern terminus of the John Muir Trail. Now we simply had to hike out to our car at the Whitney Portal — 10.6 miles away and a descent of over 6,000 feet.

I have just one thing to say about the trail down to the portal. It. Is. Brutal. Not a smooth, well maintained trail. Gravely with giant steps. Hard on the feet, the knees, and the back. Grueling. We kept on, knowing that a hot cheeseburger and cold beer awaited us at Whitney Portal. The last two miles were endless switchbacks that teased us with views of the cars in the Portal parking, while never seeming to get us any closer.

Of course, we did arrive there. We ate the greasy food and cold drinks, and marveled at how wonderfully comfortable the car seats felt on the drive back home.

Observations

Here are a few of my observations from the trail:

  • The John Muir Trail is challenging, but rewarding. It really lives up to it’s epic status. Many of the PCT thru-hikers we spoke with regarded the JMT as the best part of the PCT. We trained hard, but I was still surprised by how challenging the trail was.
  • No matter how light you go, you can probably still get lighter. And lighter is almost always better.
  • Elevation profiles do a really poor job of describing the difficulty of a trail, particularly the downhill.
  • Plan, but be flexible.
  • The people you meet on the trail are the best in the world.

Photo Gallery

You can click on any image to open a larger version, and you can leave comments on any photo.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/hiking-the-john-muir-trail-in-21-days/feed/ 34
Trans-Catalina Trail https://socalhiker.net/hiking-trans-catalina-trail/ https://socalhiker.net/hiking-trans-catalina-trail/#comments Fri, 12 Mar 2010 08:40:11 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=227 WP GPX Maps Error: GPX file not found! /home/runcloud/webapps/app-socalhiker/wp-content/uploads/trans-catalina-trail.gpx Wow

Santa Catalina is a beautiful island located only 27 miles off the coast of southern California. Though Catalina is a short 90 minute boat ride away, it feels like another world. There are two small, quaint towns on the island — Avalon and Two Harbors — and the remainder of the island is primarily wilderness managed by the Catalina Island Conservancy.

The 37.2 mile Trans-Catalina Trail traverses the entire island, from Avalon on the eastern tip to Starlight beach at the western end. Of course, once you get to the end, you’ve still got to hike back to Two Harbors to catch a boat back to the mainland. This adds another nine miles, making the total mileage a bit over 46 miles — perfect for a long weekend backpack getaway.

An overview map of the Trans-Catalina Trail

Trail Overview

  • Distance: 37.2 miles officially, though we logged a total of 53.3 miles (you have to hike back to Two Harbors)
  • Total elevation gain/loss: 9600′
  • Hiking time: 3-4 days backpack (11+ miles/day)

Trip Itinerary

  • Day 1:  Avalon to Black Jack – 15 miles
  • Day 2: Black Jack to Two Harbors – 12.5 miles
  • Day 3: Two Harbors to Parson’s Landing to Starlight Beach (the official terminus) and back to Parson’s Landing – 15 miles
  • Day 4: Parson’s Landing back to Two Harbors – 6.5 miles

Though surrounded by the Pacific, there’s no reliable water sources on the island. This isn’t much of a problem though, as you’ll find water provided at each of the campgrounds. Campsites can be reserved online through the Santa Catalina Land Company, and generally run about $16 per person, per night.

Getting There

Most people take a ferry from either San Pedro, Long Beach, Newport Beach or Dana Point to Avalon. Boats run daily to Avalon, and the fare runs about $32. The tricky part is the return trip. There is limited ferry service from Two Harbors back to the mainland, and at the time of writing, San Pedro was the only port with a ferry to Two Harbors. The alternative is to take a cab from Two Harbors to Avalon.

Trans-Catalina Trail Trip Report – Day One

We left Dana Point marina on Friday morning, taking the 7:45am Catalina Express to Avalon. I’ve heard that they don’t allow you to bring fuel on the boat, but they didn’t ask and I didn’t tell. Arrived in Avalon a little after 9am. Stopped at the Von’s Express to pick up last minute supplies (chapstick!) and then picked up our campground reservations (which double as your hiking permit) at the Atwater Hotel. Note that you pick up your reservations at the front desk, which is manned 24/7 (so you can start early, which I highly recommend). We paid an extra 8 bucks for a bundle of firewood for our first night camp. They store the firewood in lockers, and give you a key — a pretty good system.

From the Atwater, we wandered over to the Catalina Conservancy office and picked up another map. They have maps with the Trans-Catalina Trail on them, but gave us an older 2005 map that didn’t show the trail. Be sure to get the Trans-Catalina map. From here, we hiked a couple miles up Wrigley Terrace to the trailhead.

Road walking to the TCT trailhead On the road to the trailhead, looking back down on Avalon The trailhead for the Trans-Catalina Trail The official start of the Trans-Catalina Trail Sign for Renton Mine Road on the Trans-Catalina Trail Looking down Renton Mine Road at the beginning of the Trans-Catalina Trail

In the first five miles, we climbed up, up and up over 1600 feet to the Divide Road. The views at the east end of the island were phenomenal.

Divide Road dips up and down like a roller coaster. At 7 miles, we reached a junction with the Hermit Gulch Trail. This is the most direct route to Avalon, and popular with day hikers.

Day 1 on the TCT - Along the Ridge

At 9.6 miles, the TCT splits off from the Divide Road, veering left into the hills. At times, the trail almost seemed to disappear in the new growth of grass.

The Trans-Catalina Trail?

At 10 miles, we reached Haypress Reservoir. This makes a great place to break for lunch. The last 6 miles dove deep into the backcountry of Catalina Island, letting us enjoy some of the most remote sections and solitude.

Haypress Reservoir-7

One unexpected surprise? The gates we had to pass through where sections are fenced off to control movement of the island’s bison population.

Black Jack campground has lockers shade, picnic tables and fire rings. We reached the area after sunset, mainly because of our late morning start time.

I would recommend either taking an earlier boat (you can get one from San Pedro) or spending a night in Avalon (Hermit Gulch campground) and getting an earlier start. As it was, we didn’t really hit the trail until nearly 11am, and didn’t reach Black Jack until 7pm. We took our time and enjoyed the hike, but would’ve rather had a little more daylight at the end of our hike. As an alternative, we could’ve gone up the Hermit Gulch Trail to the ridgeline and shaved about 7 miles off Day One, but if we had, we wouldn’t have hiked the entire Trans-Catalina Trail.

Day Two on the Trans-Catalina Trail

Day Two started lazily with hot coffee around the campfire at Black Jack. We wanted to make a stop at the Catalina Airport — only about 2-1/4 miles away — for lunch of buffalo burgers. Be sure to check out the soapstone — used by Native Americans to craft items for trade on the mainland.

From the airport, the trail loops around eventually beginning a long downhill to Little Harbor, on the island’s south coast. On the map, this is generously labeled as Sheep Chute Road. The ruts indicated otherwise.

The Long Trail Down to Little Harbor

Little Harbor is about 7 miles from Black Jack, and next time I hike the TCT, I’ll stop here for a night. The harbor is quiet but windy, and the sites have picnic tables and some include shade structures. There is a restroom facility – a relative luxury for a backpacking trail.

As with all of the campgrounds on Catalina, there are roads that lead here. Most of the people we saw camping had been driven in and dropped off. In fact, there are services that will lug your gear from campground to campground on the TCT for a fee, leaving you to travel even lighter, or bring a cooler and more gear.

We stopped for a break at Little Harbor, then started another big climb. We had already hiked 7 miles, but our final destination for the day was the Two Harbors campground — another 6 miles away.

Fortunately, our climb was rewarded. The Ridgeline Trail from Little Harbor to Two Harbors was quite possibly the most beautiful section of the Trans-Catalina Trail. The coastline views were incredible.

on the Trans-Catalina Trail

Two Harbors was quaint, though the campground was nearly full and somewhat noisy. There is a restaurant/bar and a general store where you can find pretty much anything you need.

Day Three on the Trans-Catalina Trail

I awoke early on Day Three and headed down to the beach to get some pictures as the sun came up. The morning cloud cover made it difficult, but there were a few breaks where the sunlight shone through brightly.

Two Harbors Panorama

After breakfast, we broke camp and stopped at the Two Harbors Visitors Center (located on the pier) to pick up our locker key for Parson’s Landing. The staff at the visitors center were great, and even had a better map of the Trans-Catalina Trail. From there, we headed across the isthmus and back up the ridge line  following the Silver Peak Trail on the western section of the island.

Much of this part of the island appears to have new vegetation after the brush fire in 2007. Everything looked very fresh and green, and the wildflowers were in full bloom.

Wildflowers

The Silver Peak Trail climbs over 1,600 feet, then descends sharply down the Fenceline Trail to Parson’s Landing. NOTE: The Fenceline Trail down toward Parson’s Landing is really not designed for hiking, let alone backpacking. It is ridiculously sleep and treacherously slippery. Even with trekking poles, we had to make our way down this trail very carefully.

We reached Parsons Landing in the early afternoon, and setup our camp. The campsites are right on the beach, and this was our favorite place to camp on the island. Very beautiful, very remote, and the water was crystal clear. As at the other campgrounds, Parson’s Landing has chemical toilets, but no potable water. Your campsite reservation includes one bundle of firewood and a 2-1/2 gallon container of water (plenty for the two of us).

Once camp was setup, I set off for the western terminus of the Trans-Catalina Trail — Starlight Beach. It’s 4.6 miles from Parson’s Landing to Starlight (over 9 miles round-trip), so I had to hustle to make it there and back before dark. Thankfully, I only needed to carry a few supplies and not my backpack. This trail doesn’t go more than 600 feet above sea level, but somehow it manages to go up and down that you accumulate a lot of elevation gain.

Next time, I would spend two nights at Parson’s Landing, and hike to Starlight Beach after a good night’s rest. This breaks up the hiking and gives you more time to really enjoy and explore the area.

Catalina Fox

I did follow a little Santa Catalina fox along the trail for a while , and the trail was very tranquil.

Day Four on the Trans-Catalina Trail

On our last day we woke up to light rain, ate a no-cook breakfast and took the relatively flat coastal trail back to Two Harbors.

Technically, this six mile stretch is not part of the Trans-Catalina Trail; that ended at Starlight Beach. But you still have to get back to town to get to the ferry home.

Other Worldly

Unfortunately we missed the safari bus to Avalon (it leaves Two Harbors daily at noon). At the Two Harbors visitors center we were able to swap our Avalon-Dana Point tickets for a ferry ride from Two Harbors to San Pedro, and (lucky for us) were able to get a ride to pick us up.

One of the remarkable things about this trip was the solitude. While there were always others at the various campgrounds, we rarely saw a soul on the trails. When we finally finished our 53.3 miles and were waiting for the ferry, we ran into another couple who had also completed the Trans-Catalina Trail on the same schedule, but we had only seen them at Parson’s Landing.

The weather this time of year was perfect for the trip. The daytime temperature was in the 60’s with cooling breezes. Nights were chilly, but we were comfortable in our sleeping  bag and tent. Because so much of this trail is exposed to the sun, I would recommend doing this fall through spring and avoiding the worst summer heat.

 

Final Tips

There’s a lot of wildlife on Catalina, including bald eagles, bison and fox. Food and supplies available in both Avalon and Two Harbors. If you plan to take the ferry from Two Harbors back to the mainland, check the ferry schedule. You’ll probably need to plan your schedule around the Two Harbor ferry schedule.

Campsites in Two Harbors book up months in advance, especially for weekends in warmer months.

Trans-Catalina Trail Map

Click the icon in the top right to go full-screen. Click anywhere on the trail to get the mileage and elevation at that location.

Download file: trans-catalina-trail.gpx

Photo Gallery

Click on an image for a larger version.

Additional Trans-Catalina Trail Resources

Weather Forecast for Catalina Island

[forecast location=”90704″]

Got Questions About the Trans-Catalina Trail?

Ask anything in the TCT discussion forum.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/hiking-trans-catalina-trail/feed/ 139
Itinerary for the John Muir Trail https://socalhiker.net/itinerary-for-the-john-muir-trail/ https://socalhiker.net/itinerary-for-the-john-muir-trail/#comments Sat, 06 Feb 2010 02:03:14 +0000 https://socalhiker.net//?p=106 This was our planned itinerary for the John Muir Trail. You’ll note that the first day is a helluva hike, but a big part of the elevation gain comes without carrying a pack. We’re planning to stash our packs and ascend Half Dome as long as we’re there.

DayItineraryMileageAscentDescentTotal MilesTotal Ascent
1Happy Isles to Half Dome Junction12.35000185012.35000
2Half Dome Junction to Sunrise Camp7.6260040019.97600
3Sunrise to Tuolumne Meadows11.4400120031.38000
4Tuolumne Meadows to Upper Lyell Canyon9.5120010040.89200
5Upper Lyell Canyon to Thousand Island Lake9.72200195050.511400
6Thousand Island Lake to Devil's Postpile16.21800410066.713200
7Devil's Postpile to Deer Creek9170015075.714900
8Deer Creek to Tully Hole12.3205020508816950
9Tully Hole to Edison Lake11.81850315099.818800
10REST DAY00099.818800
11Edison Lake to Rosemarie Meadow12.333501050112.122150
12Rosemarie Meadow to Muir Trail Ranch9.510503350121.623200
13Muir Trail Ranch to McClure Meadow10.62200200132.225400
14McClure Meadow to NE of Helen Lake12.224501300144.427850
15NE of Helen Lake to Deer Meadow11.310002900155.728850
16Deer Meadow to Kings River1233002000167.732150
17Kings River to Woods Creek11.620503700179.334200
18Woods Creek to Vidette Meadow13.236502600192.537850
19Vidette Meadow to Tyndall Creek1238002500204.541650
20Tyndall Creek to Guitar Lake12.118001200216.643450
21Guitar Lake to Trail Camp1032002600226.646650
22Trail Camp to Whitney Portal6.8503700233.446700

Following this itinerary, our  average daily mileage is 11.67 miles, our average ascent per day will be 2,335 feet, and the largest single day elevation gain will be 5,000 feet.

2013 UPDATE: I’ve added links to the corresponding actual trail covered for each day. We kept to this itinerary pretty closely until Muir Pass. You’ll spot the tweaks we made as you read through the posts.

]]>
https://socalhiker.net/itinerary-for-the-john-muir-trail/feed/ 23